JP7454252B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In conventional gaming machines, a gaming machine determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and executes a game performance according to the result of the determination. is common.

Some of these gaming machines are equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a production control means for controlling production according to commands (signals) from the main control means (for example, Patent Document (see 1).

JP2019-033816A

However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means deviate.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows smooth cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the present invention, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means satisfies a starting condition (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 and a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by winning a prize); a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a special symbol, a variable display of a second special symbol), a storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); When the performance control means receives a winning signal (a winning signal) that is transmitted in response to an increase in the pending memory due to the establishment of the starting condition, the effect control means displays an icon (pending icon) based on the pending memory. means (the first image display device 70), and can perform a winning effect (outputting a winning sound, emitting light from a light emitting means), and can perform a variable effect based on the effect pattern in response to the start of the variable display. is started, and the fluctuating performance using the performance pattern can be ended in accordance with the end of the fluctuating display, and predetermined information (for example, model name, immersion It is possible to execute a specific performance (customer waiting demo performance) that can display a message (attention), and the icon can be displayed in either a normal display mode (white icon) or a special display mode (red icon) that is different from the normal display mode. It is possible to perform an icon change effect (pending icon change effect) that indicates the possibility that the special game will be executed by displaying the icon in a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 08). In this case, it is possible to execute a specific variation effect (variation effect patterns 15 to 17), to execute the icon change effect at a predetermined timing, and the main control means When executing the next variable display based on the next judgment information held in storage following the current variable display, the effect control means may change the current variable display while executing the current variable effect corresponding to the current variable display. If a communication abnormality occurs in which a predetermined display signal (stop command, start command) cannot be received, the main control means may terminate the current fluctuation display and execute the specific fluctuation pattern as the next fluctuation display. , the execution of the icon change effect can be restricted, and if a communication abnormality occurs in which a predetermined signal of the variable display cannot be received while the specific effect is being executed, the specific effect can be continued; When the predetermined signal for the variable display is received, the specific effect is ended and the predetermined effect pattern becomes visible, and when the start condition is satisfied while the predetermined number of the icons are being displayed, the number of the icons is changed. If the entered award signal with one more number of reserved memories than the entered award signal is received, one additional icon is displayed in the normal addition mode (multiple frames of animation, without a gap), and the entered award signal is When the time effect is executed once and the start condition is satisfied while a predetermined number of the icons are being displayed, the entry award signal in which the number of the reserved memories is one more than the number of icons is not normally received; After that, if the start condition is met and the entry award signal in which the number of pending memories is more than the number of icons is normally received, the icons are added in a special addition mode (multiple at the same time, one frame of Although multiple additional displays are performed using animation (with a space between them), the feature is that the input award presentation is executed once instead of being executed multiple times .

According to the present invention, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means.

It is a diagram showing an example of a front view of the gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a preliminary determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in a production control part. It is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the production control section. It is a diagram showing customer waiting performance processing in the performance control section. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration standby time determination table. It is a figure which shows the prefetch type|system|group performance process in a performance control part. It is a figure showing icon change production decision processing in a production control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a change scenario determination table. It is a figure showing icon change production execution processing in a production control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for pending icons. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a one-step change pattern determination table for the icon, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the two-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the said icon change pattern determination table for abnormalities. It is a figure which shows the continuous preview performance determination process in a performance control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous notice type determination table for performance modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous notice type determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous preview performance scenario determination table for performance modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous preview performance scenario determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states). It is a figure which shows the continuous notice performance execution process in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an alternative notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows lamp change production execution processing in a production control part. It is a figure showing the fluctuating performance pattern judgment processing in a performance control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state). It is a diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states). It is a diagram showing jackpot preview performance determination processing in the performance control section. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reach notice determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a dialogue notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of an advanced production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a fixed performance pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a re-lottery performance pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a fixed performance pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the overall control unit. It is a figure showing accessory initial processing in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return process in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in a customer waiting state. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where the operation unit is operated while waiting for a customer. It is a timing chart in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the production example in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a look-ahead motion performance and a step-up notice performance are performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance when a look-ahead motion performance and a step-up notice performance are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a pseudo continuous performance is performed before a reach performance. It is a figure showing an example of a performance in a case where a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a ready-to-win performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a development performance is executed and an SP ready-to-reach performance is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when the development performance is performed and the SPSP reach performance is performed. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a cut-in performance is executed during the SP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance in the case where a cut-in performance is executed during the SP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a figure showing example 1 of a performance in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing a continuation of performance example 1 in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a figure showing example 2 of a performance in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing a continuation of performance example 2 in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a variable mission performance is executed during a jackpot. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change performance and lamp change performance. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance when restarting after power supply to a gaming machine is stopped during execution of the said icon change performance and lamp change performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of a look-ahead effect performance, a pending icon change performance, and a lamp change performance. It is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the prefetch effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. This is a timing chart 1 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of timing chart 1. This is a timing chart 2 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example 1 of performance at various timings of timing chart 2. This is a second example of performance at various timings of timing chart 2. This is timing chart 3 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example 1 of performance at various timings of timing chart 3. This is a second example of performance at various timings of timing chart 3. This is a timing chart 4 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of timing chart 4. This is a timing chart 5 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of timing chart 5. FIG. 6 is a timing chart 6 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of a performance at various timings of the timing chart 6. It is a timing chart 7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of a performance at various timings of timing chart 7. FIG. 8 is a timing chart 8 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of the timing chart 8. FIG. 9 is a timing chart 9 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of the timing chart 9. It is a timing chart 10 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of a performance at various timings of the timing chart 10. This is a first modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a second modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a third modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a fourth modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a fifth modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a sixth modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is modification example 7 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 13 (timing chart 11) in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 14 (timing chart 12) in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 15 (timing chart 13) in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 16 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a timing chart 14 when a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 17 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a timing chart 15 when a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 18 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 19 where a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 1 (timing chart 1) when a command is normally received. This is a specific example 20 (timing chart 16) of a case where a command cannot be received normally. This is a second specific example (timing chart 2) when a command is normally received. This is a specific example 21 (timing chart 17) in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 22 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 23 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 24 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 25 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 26 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 27 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 28 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 29 where a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the fixed effect pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a on which game balls flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front and rear directions, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ) is fixed via.

The game board mounting frame 3 has a mounting part (not shown) for mounting the game board 5 from the front, and is removable from the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism part 6 at one end in the horizontal direction. The first hinge mechanism section 6 is rotatably supported using the first hinge mechanism section 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices installed on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is removably connected to the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism part 7 at one end in the horizontal direction so as to cover the front of the mounting part of the game board mounting frame 3, It is rotatably supported using the second hinge mechanism section 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed to close the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the mounting portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be viewed through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and game balls etc. put out from a payout device 100 described later. an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls; a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and have flowed into the overflow ball channel described later; and a game ball firing operation. A firing operation device 13 is provided for performing the following steps.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations on the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval between them, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to perform sound (music, voice) production. It has become. Further, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the direction and color of light emitted from each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a dispensing abnormality, which will be described later, occurs.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the game ball storage section 11a is sloped downward toward the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, in the center front side of the upper plate 11, there are a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for determining and selecting various productions to be described later. They are arranged side by side on the left and right.

The performance button device 16 includes a performance button 17 (not shown) that can perform a decision operation etc. (operation input), a performance button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) that detects an operation on the performance button 17, and a performance button A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 2) for driving the gaming machine 17 is provided, and the player can input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The production button 17 performs production light emission by lighting the production button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white, red, rainbow color). It is now possible. In addition, it is possible to move in the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located below and the production position located above by the driving force of the button drive motor that is a part of the button drive device 17b. The button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the button is at the origin position. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a production operation by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode using the driving force of a button vibration motor that is a part of the button drive device 17b, and the production can be performed even when the button vibration motor is vibrating. Button 17 can be operated.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can perform operations such as selection operations, and a cross key detection switch 19a (not shown) connected to the cross key 19 to detect operations on the cross key 19. (see FIG. 2) is provided, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

Further, on the right side of the upper tray 11, there is provided a rental operation section 20 that can perform operations for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance. When the lending button of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the remaining amount stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 is subtracted, and the game balls are lent out. When the return button of the operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

An overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12 for receiving game balls that cannot fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls. While this is being detected, the payout of game balls by the payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 2), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 2) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a plurality of firing volumes 15b (see FIG. 2) for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A handle LED (frame lighting device 10) is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is activated and game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting part 25 for mounting the game board 5, a firing device 26 for firing a game ball toward the gaming area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A locking mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with a front opening at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices installed on the back side of the game board 5 can be installed at the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Coming.

The firing device 26 includes a firing member 28 for firing a game ball, a firing solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the firing member 28, and a solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) that extends upward from the firing member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. An inclined firing rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at a firing position which is the inclined lower end of the firing rail 29 are provided. When the game ball sent out by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot out toward the game area 5a by the operation of the shooting member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member that guides the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 are provided. A firing ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 for guiding the game ball fired by the firing device 26 to the upstream part of the gaming area 5a. Furthermore, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the gaming area 5a to guide the game balls that have flown down to the outside of the gaming area (to the collecting section of the gaming board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40, called a so-called center case, that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior is provided, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 40 to A stage section 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the interior and making them flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the bottom of the gaming area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always be entered are provided at intervals, and these general winning holes 43 When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are ejected from the payout device 100 (not shown) as prize balls. It is dispensed onto plate 11.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, there are provided normal game gates 44 (normal game starting area) through which the game balls can pass, and the game balls that have passed through the general game gates 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 2), a normal symbol winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) is performed. Note that the winning lottery for normal symbols will be described later.

At the lower part of the gaming area 5a and directly below the stage part 42, a first starting opening 45 (special figure starting area) is provided in which a game ball can always enter a prize (ball), and this first starting opening 45 When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) is detected by the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are transferred from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. It is about to be paid out. In addition to paying out prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, a game ball is placed in a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a normal symbol winning lottery). A variable starting section 46 is provided which is converted into an open state (special mode) in which winning (ball hitting) is possible or easy.

The variable starting section 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) through which a game ball can enter a prize (ball entering), and a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) that allows a game ball to enter a prize (entering ball) into the second starting port 47. A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2), a movable member 48 that converts (variably) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 2). When the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are delivered from the payout device 100 to the top tray as prize balls. It is set to be paid out on the 11th. In addition to paying out prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

A prize opening lamp NR (not shown) is provided between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 to illuminate the area around the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect by emitting light from a panel illumination device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guiding member 37 and downstream of the right-hand general figure gate 44, there is a closed state in which it is impossible to win a game ball (ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the jackpot determination of the special symbol). A variable winning section 49 is provided which is converted from the basic mode to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won.

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can be won (balls entered), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (Fig. 2), an opening/closing member 51 for converting (variable) the big winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 51. When the grand prize opening 50 is in a closed state, it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball, and when the grand prize opening 50 is in an open state, winning a game ball (entering a ball) is difficult. ) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are transferred from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, and a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, An out ball flow path is provided that receives the game balls detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a and the big winning port detection switch 50a, and the game balls that have flowed into the out port 39, collects them, and allows them to flow down. An out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream part of the ball flow path. The game balls flowing down this out ball channel and detected by the out ball detection switch 52a are discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.

Outside the gaming area 5a, there are a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reservation display 63, a second special symbol reservation display 64, as well as. A normal symbol holding display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) to be described later is executed, and a round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) during a jackpot game (special game) or a time-saving game state. A right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 2) that prompts you to fire the game ball toward the right side of the gaming area 5a, and a status confirmation display that indicates that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. A main information display device 59 consisting of a device 68 (see FIG. 2) is provided.

Further, a winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). On this winning probability display sticker, the jackpot winning probability (1/285 to 1/300) and set value (4 to 1) of the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment are printed. Note that the position where this winning probability display sticker 200 is pasted is just one example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, but may be on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the game ball enters the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the prize gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot determination of the first special symbol means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a random number value for jackpot determination, etc. (first special symbol determination information) is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination This corresponds to comparing the random number value and the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot". In addition, when the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60, and after a predetermined period of time, a stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

Jackpot determination of the second special symbol means that when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, a random number value etc. for jackpot determination (second special symbol determination information) is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination This corresponds to comparing the random number value and the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot". In addition, when the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and after a predetermined period of time, a stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and in the variable display of each special symbol, the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order. do. When the special symbols are to be stopped and displayed, the LEDs are lit in a manner that indicates the result of each jackpot determination (jackpot mode, loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "jackpot" means executing a jackpot game (special game) in the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the first special symbol or the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the second special symbol. refers to the state in which one has acquired the right to do something. The term "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the jackpot 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 or 15 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time are reached, a predetermined number of game balls can be opened in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls entered), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous for the player in which the player can easily win the prize ball. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games with different degrees of advantage to the player, which will be described in detail later.

The normal symbol winning lottery is to acquire a random number value for determining a hit when a game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44, and compare the obtained random number value for determining a hit with the winning determination value to determine whether it is a "win". This corresponds to determining whether or not. In addition, when a winning lottery of a normal symbol is performed, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol display 62, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display of the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of the normal symbols. When the normal symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LED lights up in a manner that indicates the result of the winning lottery (a winning manner or a losing manner).

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "winning game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 may be opened even before the maximum number of openings or the maximum opening time is reached. The winning game (auxiliary game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) win a prize (balls entered). In other words, the "winning game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition for the variable display is likely to be satisfied). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol holding display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is used to determine the jackpot of the first special symbol that is stored when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 (balls entered). This is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing a variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Note that although up to four first reservation memories are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is used to determine the jackpot of the second special symbol that is stored when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 (balls entered). This is for displaying the number of rights (second pending memory) for performing the variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second pending memories. In addition, although up to four second reservation memories are stored, it may be fewer or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a normal symbol winning lottery (fluctuating display of normal symbols) that is stored when a game ball enters (passes) the common symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (Fuzuzu pending memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of Fuzuzuzu pending memory. In addition, although up to four ordinary figures are stored in the storage, the number may be smaller or larger than four.

In addition, the 1st special symbol display 60 and/or the 2nd special symbol display 61 can also be comprised with 7 segment LED. For example, if you win a special symbol jackpot, "7" will be displayed as a stop sign, and if you lose, a "-" will be displayed as a stop sign, and while the variable display is in progress, the light will turn off and "-" will be displayed as a stop sign. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous fluctuation display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the fluctuation display starts, the fluctuation display can be started by turning off the LED. It becomes easier to understand what has started.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. starts lighting up, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if it is a jackpot game with two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left will light up, and if it is a jackpot game with sixteen rounds, all the LEDs will light up.

The right-hand hitting indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is a right-hand hitting indicator 67 that prompts you to fire the game ball toward the right side gaming area (so-called right-hand hitting) during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state. This is for displaying a winning display, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED, and is for indicating that the setting is set to a setting change mode, which will be described later, or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later. When the mode shifts to , the LED starts lighting up, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the LED turns off. In this way, the status confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine. It is possible to easily check whether the settings are set or not.

Note that the installation position of the status confirmation display 68 is just an example, and is not limited to the installation position of this embodiment, and may be any position in the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display is displayed in the same manner (lit display) regardless of whether it is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, but the display is made so that it is possible to recognize which mode it is set to. You may. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinking. When the setting change mode is set, either the status confirmation display 68 or the second game information display device 69 lights up, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status is displayed. Only the confirmation display 68 may be displayed by lighting.

Further, in this embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or one LED of the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

At the lower right inside of the gaming area 5a, there are a sub-first fluctuation display 81, a sub-second fluctuation display 82, a sub-first reservation display 83, a sub-second reservation display 84, and a sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85. A sub-information display device 80 is provided, which includes a sub-normal figure reservation display 86, and a sub-right-hitting display 87 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). Note that the sub-information display device 80 is not provided with a display indicating that the sub-information display device 80 is set to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, such as the status confirmation display 68 described above.

The sub-first fluctuation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 is for displaying the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. (notification), each of which is composed of one LED. Then, when the corresponding special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp symbol LZ or the second lamp symbol LZ is displayed in a variable manner), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is a jackpot. The result of the judgment (lights up if it's a jackpot, turns off if it's a loss) is displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, in the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82, so that it can be grasped only whether or not the special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed, it blinks and stops while the special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed. It may be configured to turn on or off when displayed.

The sub-first reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories (number of reservations), and the sub-second reservation display 84 displays the number of second reservation memories (number of reservations). It is made up of two LEDs on the left and right. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and when the number of reservations is "2", the LED on the right turns off. The left and right LEDs light up, and when the number of reservations is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reservations is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the LED blinks at predetermined intervals (variable display). Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, an aspect indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights on in the case of a win, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the sub-regular pattern change indicator 85 may be configured to flash while displaying the normal pattern change, and to light up or go out when the normal pattern stops, so that it is possible to know whether or not the normal pattern change is being displayed.

The sub-universal drawing reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of ordinary drawings (reservation number), and is composed of two LEDs arranged on the left and right. Then, when the number of reserved general drawings is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, and when the number of reserved general drawings is "1", the left LED turns on and the right LED goes out, and the number of reserved general drawings turns off. When the number of reservations is "2", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reserved ordinary cards is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the production space 40a, and a , a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is provided, which is a liquid crystal display whose display area is smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A first movable member 73 is provided that resembles the same, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the performance space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays various effects according to the progress of the game. Performance displays include customer waiting demonstration performances that are executed during a customer waiting state (standby state where the game is not in progress) where special symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner, and production symbols that are executed while special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. There is a fluctuating effect accompanied by a fluctuating display of 70a.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas: a left area, a center area, and a right area. By scrolling the effect pattern 70a vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, a special symbol display area is formed in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area is changed to a special symbol variable display. By correspondingly scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61. In response to (synchronized with) the fluctuating display of the symbols, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols 70a is performed. That is, in response to the start of the fluctuating display of the special symbol, the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and before the fluctuating display of the special symbol stops, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (swinging display), and the special symbol is fluctuating. In response to the stop display of the display, the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 70a is stopped (still display). Note that, in addition to the symbols indicating numbers, symbols indicating alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided as the effect symbols 70a.

Note that the "temporary stop display" is a display in which the performance symbols 70a are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (completely stopped). (not done).
On the other hand, a state in which the production pattern 70a completely stops after the "temporary stop display" is referred to as a "stop display." Note that although the expression "main stop" may be used below, it has the same meaning as "stop display."

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a is stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (loss mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of jackpot determination. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same performance symbols such as "777" or the combination of regular performance symbols such as "357", and the loss mode is any other format. be. Note that the manner in which the performance symbols 70a are variably displayed is not limited to this, and may be one that scrolls in the left-right direction, or one that rotates (rotates) on the spot.

Also, during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as reach effect, background images, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), depending on the result of jackpot determination. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectations for a jackpot (special game) to be executed (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot winning expectation level") are increased. There is.

Here, "reach performance" is a jackpot game executed for the player in which a part of the combination of performance symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a pattern of variation that is expected to occur. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot (jackpot result mode), two performance symbols 70a are displayed in the left and right regions. 7'', the game stops temporarily, and the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are six types of reach effects: "normal reach effect," "SP reach effect," "SPSP reach effect," "SPSP '7' reach effect," and "full rotation reach effect." be.

"Normal reach effect" is a reach state in which the background image before reach is displayed, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a is fluctuated in the center area. This is a reach performance that is performed with a .

"SP reach effect" is executed after the normal reach effect, and the effect pattern 70a with the reach state formed is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the effect is higher than the normal reach effect (the expectation of a jackpot is high) ) is a reach performance where the performance is performed.

"SPSP reach performance" is a reach performance that is executed after the normal reach performance or SP reach performance, and has a performance effect (higher expectation of a jackpot) than the normal reach performance or SP reach performance.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that changes at a low speed when all the combinations of the plurality of effect symbols 70a that notify a jackpot are aligned. In this embodiment, this is a reach effect that is executed only when winning in the jackpot determination.

In this embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation degree related to the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect<SP reach effect<SPSP reach effect<full rotation reach effect (jackpot confirmed).

In addition, at the bottom of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a number of first special symbols with a number corresponding to the first reserved number of special symbols (U1), which is the number of the first reserved symbols currently stored in the normal gaming state, is displayed. A first reservation icon display area 70B for displaying reservation icons and a number of second reservation icons corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) which is the current number of second reservation storage in a specific gaming state. A second pending icon display area 70D for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a) being executed in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. A region 70C is formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display area 70B1, a second display area 70B2, a third display area 70B3, and a fourth display area 70B4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70B1 to 70B4 display the number of first reservation icons corresponding to the number of first reserved special symbols (U1). In other words, the number of first reserved icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of first reserved special symbols (U1).

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is first performed, and the second display section 70B2 displays the first pending icon H11. The first pending icon H12 indicating the first pending memory is displayed on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed third, and the third display section 70B3 displays the variable display of the first special symbol. A first pending icon H13 indicating the first pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first pending icon H14 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth. be done.

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display area 70D1, a second display area 70D2, a third display area 70D3, and a fourth display area 70D4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display second reservation icons in a number corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2). In other words, the number of second reserved icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of second reserved special symbols (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first performed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon H21. A second pending icon H22 indicating a second pending memory is displayed in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in the third display section 70D3. A second pending icon H23 indicating a second pending memory is displayed, and a second pending icon H24 indicating a second pending memory in which variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display section 70D4. be done. In addition, in this embodiment, the "first reserved number of special symbols" may be referred to as the "first reserved number" and the "second reserved number of special symbols" may be referred to as the "second reserved number".

The icon display area 70C displays the first pending icon or the second pending icon that was displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a). As the second pending icon displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TI is displayed, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a) The icon TI disappears (erases). Note that the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). Note that in this embodiment, the "first pending icon", the "second pending icon", and "the icon" may be collectively referred to as "icon".

In addition, on the left side of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a first pending number indicating the current number of first reserved special symbols (U1) is displayed in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. 1st special figure reservation number display area 70E for displaying the second special figure reservation number display area 70E for displaying the second reservation number indicating the current number of second special figure reservation number (U2) in the normal game state and the specific game state. A number display area 70F is formed.

The first movable member 73 is capable of emitting dramatic light by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The drive force of the first movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 2), moves the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located above and the presentation position located below. By moving to , it is possible to perform a performance operation, and the first position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 is capable of emitting dramatic light by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The drive force of the second movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 2), moves between the standby position (origin position) located at the upper right and the production position located at the lower left. It is possible to perform a performance operation by moving diagonally up and down, and a second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other's production positions, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate at the same time. By not doing so, they avoid conflict with each other.

Note that if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, when one movable member moves to the production position and returns to a position that does not overlap with the production position of the other movable member, The other movable member may be moved to the presentation position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball rental), and game balls supplied from island equipment, etc. A game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) that includes a main control board 110 that centrally controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110. A payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 according to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and a production that controls the production according to production control commands from the main control board 110. A production control device 130A (not shown) that includes a control board 130, a power supply device 160A (not shown) that includes a power supply board 160 that supplies power voltage to various control devices, and game information (not shown) external to the gaming machine. A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 2) for outputting a game signal (game signal) is provided.

Further, an opening/closing door-type cover member is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left-right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire production control device 130A from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member, display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and various lighting devices. A changeover switch 22 (see FIG. 2) is provided for switching adjustment modes related to adjustment of the light amount of the devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76).

On the front side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m to clear the memory contents or to indicate the level of advantage of the game. an RWM clear switch 111a that inputs a signal for updating the set value (different advantages); a signal for moving the set value to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting key; A setting key switch 112a for inputting information, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that allow the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped, and the like are installed.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values to be described later), and is composed of four 7-segment displays having decimal points DP arranged side by side. There is. An identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type) is configured on two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits. A numerical value segment is configured to display numerical information indicating numerical values of setting values and performance information.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically explained using FIG. 2. FIG. 2 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 centrally controls the progress of the game (basic operations). The main control board 110 includes a main control unit 110m as a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It is equipped with an input port for main control, an output port, etc. The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the production control board 130, etc.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate commands (data) in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 is It is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the production control board 130.

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , a magnetic detection sensor 53a, a radio wave detection sensor 54a, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, a payout control board 120, and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, a winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, a main information display device 59, a game information output terminal board 90, a payout control board 120, a performance control board 130, etc. is connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various indicators, and game notifications to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) from the gaming information output terminal board through the output port. Information etc. are output.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of the payout command from the main control board 110, and also controls the firing of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, etc. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and operates the payout device 100. control, and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the production control board 130, etc.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, etc. A dispensing motor 100b provided in the dispensing device 100 is connected to an output port of the dispensing control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives the payout command from the main control board 110, it drives the payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 to control the payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and controls the payout ball detection switch 100a to pay out a predetermined number of game balls. When the payout of game balls is detected, the control for paying out game balls is ended.

The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, etc. (not shown). A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to an input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feeding solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, etc. are connected to an output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed based on the detection signal from the firing volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is fired so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. The game ball is fired by driving the solenoid 28b.

The firing solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to a rotating shaft, and as the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates and launches the game ball A. . Note that the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to approximately 99.9 times/minute based on the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the firing of the game ball in one minute is approximately 99.9 times per minute. The number is approximately 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, the game ball will be fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The performance control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the performance related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the performance command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b in which an effect control program is stored, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an effect control unit 130m, and a first image display device 70 (main display control unit 140 that controls the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the panel drive device 75, and the panel lighting. It includes a lamp control section 150 that controls the device 76 and the like, and an input port, an output port, etc. for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby processing commands received from the main control board 110. In response to input signals from the display button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) are controlled to execute various effects (data and commands are transmitted). Output).

A performance button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), etc. are connected to the input port of the performance control board 130. In the production control board 130, a production button detection signal indicating that the production button 17 has been operated is input from the production button detection switch 17a, and a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the production control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. or controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that collectively controls image display and audio output based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m, and a control unit 141 that controls display control commands (display list) from the general control unit 141. A video control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and a voice control unit that receives voice control commands from the general control unit 141. It includes an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on the audio data, and an audio ROM 149 that stores audio data and the like.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 141b that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which LSI is connected.

The overall CPU 141a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out an overall control program stored in the overall ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while utilizing the overall RAM 141c as a work area. Thereby, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device It performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command instructing the effect sound to be output from the audio controller 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The VRAM 143 provided in the image control unit 145 (VDP) is a display list storage area that temporarily stores the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142a), and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , and a frame buffer area corresponding to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing starts.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the “frame buffer for drawing” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the general control unit 141. The drawing data is read from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, and a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second The image is output to an image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display various images.

Note that the image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by frequency-dividing this operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display Generates a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and displays the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Output to. In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) based on various performance data (including commands) transmitted from the performance control unit 130m. Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display on the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. In response to performance instruction commands and the like, control is performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined performances (data and commands are output).

The frame lighting device 10, button drive device 17b, panel lighting device 76, and sub information display device 80 are connected to the input/output port of the lamp control section, and the information is transmitted from the production control section 130m (sub CPU 130a). Based on the various production data (including commands), the lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 is performed, and the button driving device 17b and, It also performs drive control of drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power (operating power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine 1, and supplies the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, production control (substrate 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power outage detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power outage (power outage). A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 during a power outage (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the supply of main power is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk at the game parlor, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Note that even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a becomes operational when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, and the main CPU 110a enters an operational state when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when power is applied to the gaming machine, and when a power outage (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. supply As a result, even in the event of a power outage (power outage), the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c will be retained, and after recovery from the power outage (power outage), the gaming control state will be returned to the state before the power outage (power outage). It can be restored. Note that backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the production control board 130.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, the states related to jackpot determination of special symbols include a "low probability state" and "high probability state," and the states related to the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 include a "non-time saving state" and ""time saving state".

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) that is a "low-probability state" and a "non-time-saving state"
(2) A low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is a "low probability state" and a "time-saving state"
(3) High probability time saving gaming state (variable probability gaming state) which is a "high probability state" and "time saving state"

Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state." In addition, in this embodiment, the "low-probability time-saving gaming state" and the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, so they may be referred to as "specific gaming states."

In this embodiment, the "low probability state" means, for example, when the set value (jackpot probability in jackpot determination), which is the stage of advantageousness of the game, is "1", the first starting port 45 or the 2 Refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set as low as about 1/300 in jackpot determination of a special symbol performed on the condition that a game ball enters a starting hole 47. On the other hand, "high probability state" means that the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in a low probability state, and when the setting value is "1", the probability of winning a jackpot is set as high as approximately 1/60. Indicates the game state.

Specifically, there are four setting values, ``1'' to ``4.'' When the setting value is ``1,'' the probability of winning the jackpot in a low probability state is approximately 1/300, which is a high probability. The probability of winning the jackpot in the state is approximately 1/60, and if the setting value is "2", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/295, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately If the setting value is "3", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/290, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately 1/58, and the setting value is "3". 4, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/285, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high probability state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low probability state". Further, the low probability state changes to the high probability state after the jackpot game described later is completed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state is referred to as a "probability-variable jackpot." In addition, a jackpot that triggers a transition to a low probability state is called a "normal jackpot."

In this embodiment, the "non-time saving state" refers to the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbols that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44. This is a game state that is set longer than the "time saving state" and in which the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is likely to be set short. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and a variable display of the normal pattern is performed on the normal pattern display 62, but after the variable display of the normal pattern starts, For example, the display stops after 30 seconds. If the lottery result is a win, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the normal symbols are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, the "time saving state" means that in the winning lottery for regular symbols that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the regular symbols corresponding to the lottery result is " This is a game state in which the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to be shorter than the "non-time saving state" and longer than the "non-time saving state", for example, 2.5 seconds. Furthermore, in the "non-time saving state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the "time saving state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set to be low, for example 127/128. is set high. Therefore, in the "time saving state", when the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time saving state". As a result, in the "time saving state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game in a state where it is difficult to consume game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time saving state" is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery are more advantageous than the "non-time saving state". has been done. However, the "time saving state" may be set so that only one of the normal symbol variation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. Further, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be set to, for example, 0/128.

In addition, in this embodiment, a jackpot is determined in which the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is five times the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state (common regardless of the setting value). The probability is not limited to 5 times, but may be set to any value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as it is 10 times or less.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the jackpot determination, a small win that is less advantageous to the winner than a jackpot is not won, but for example, a small win is set to be won with a probability of about 1/100. Good too. In this case, it is preferable that the small win probability be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

Also, the larger the setting value is, the more advantageous it becomes to the player (higher jackpot probability), but conversely, the smaller the setting value is, the more advantageous it becomes to the player (higher jackpot probability). You may also do so.

In addition, the probability of being judged as a jackpot in a low probability state and/or a high probability state may be set to be the same for all setting values (1 to 4), or for example, for two or three setting values (1 and 4), 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of determining a jackpot in the low probability state and/or the high probability state may be the same. Furthermore, although the setting values in this embodiment are in four stages from 1 to 4, they are not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 6.

(Jackpot judgment table)
FIG. 3(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 45. , FIG. 3(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 3(a) and 3(b), the jackpot judgment table corresponds to the current setting value, the current probability state, the random value for jackpot judgment, and the jackpot judgment result (jackpot, loss). As a reference, the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot" is listed in the far right column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 3(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 3(b), and determines whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss" based on the current setting value, the probability state, and the random number value for jackpot determination.

For example, according to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. The random number value for determination is determined to be a "jackpot". Then, random numbers for jackpot determination other than those determined to be jackpots are determined to be "losses".

Note that the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored in the first special figure determination information retention storage area of the main RAM 110c, The special figure determination information acquired based on winning is stored in the second special figure determination information retention storage area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when making a jackpot determination, the special symbol determination information stored in the first special symbol determination information retention storage area or the second special symbol determination information retention storage area is shifted to the special symbol determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c. , jackpot determination will be performed using the shifted special figure determination information.

In addition, the first special figure judgment information reservation storage area is divided into a first storage part to a fourth storage part, and the reservation corresponding to the special figure judgment information stored in these first storage part to fourth storage part is divided into the first to fourth storage parts. The icons are displayed on the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B, respectively. The second special figure determination information reservation storage area is divided into first to fourth storage sections, and the reservation icons corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in these first to fourth storage sections are They are displayed on the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 4(a) is a special symbol determination table for jackpot for determining the type of special symbol when it is determined to be a jackpot, and FIG. 4(b) is a special symbol determination table for determining the type of special symbol when it is determined to be a loss. This is a special symbol determination table for losing to determine the type.

As shown in FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b), the special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the random value for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol, and the information corresponding to the determination result. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result are associated.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which a jackpot game is not executed. Special symbols "01" and "04" are special jackpot symbols that execute the first jackpot game, and special symbols "02" and "05" are jackpot symbols that execute the second jackpot game. , special symbols "03" and "06" are jackpot symbols for executing the third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game in which the grand prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is executed up to six times. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time has elapsed. Further, after the first jackpot game ends, the low-probability non-time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", a round game in which the grand prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. Furthermore, after the second jackpot game ends, the high accuracy time-saving gaming state (variable probability gaming state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, judging from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

In the "third jackpot game", a round game in which the second jackpot 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the jackpot is closed for two seconds is executed up to six times. Furthermore, after the third jackpot game ends, the highly accurate time-saving gaming state (variable probability gaming state) is set until the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, judging from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

Although one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of losing special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Good too.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any of FIGS. 4(a) to 4(b), and determines the type of special symbol, based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed and the random value for special symbol determination. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 4 is that the type of jackpot special symbol and the type of loss special symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player can play the game with peace of mind without having complicated gameplay.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 4 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various losing symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 5(a) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time saving states for determining the variation pattern of special symbols in non-time saving states, and FIG. 5(b) is a special symbol variation pattern in non-time saving states. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the time saving state for determining.

As shown in Figure 5, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening) that performs variable display, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), and the reach determination Random value, first special figure reservation number (U1) or second special figure reservation number (U2), random value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, special figure fluctuation pattern as a judgment result, special symbol fluctuation time and a special figure variation pattern designation command indicating a special figure variation pattern.

Therefore, the "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be one that can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 2 Determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern based on the number of special pattern reservations (U2) and the random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination, and send the special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command according to the special pattern fluctuation pattern to the production control board 130 It looks like this.

In addition, the performance control board 130 determines the content (performance mode) of the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance symbols 70a in accordance with the fluctuation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.), as will be described later. Therefore, in the rightmost column of the special pattern determination table shown in FIG. 5, the production contents that can be executed with the variable production are listed for reference.

As for the production contents shown in the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. , which means stopping without reaching.

In addition, "reach" means that the player expects a jackpot game to be executed in which a part of the combination of presentation symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other presentation symbols 70a change. means the manner in which it changes. For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot, the same performance symbols 70a in the left and right regions temporarily stop at "7". , refers to a mode in which the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the performance symbols 70a are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (not completely stopped). refers to the manner in which the

In addition, "normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a changes in the center area, and the expectation level of jackpot is the lowest. This is a reach production.

Moreover, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach effects that have a higher expectation of a jackpot than normal reach effects, and are performed after the normal reach effect and the extended effect. For example, the two performance symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to the corners of the first image display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70 is used to perform a special reach performance. . Note that in the "Special SP Reach", a more special effect than in the "SP Reach" is executed.

Furthermore, "SPSP reach" and "SPSP '7' reach" are special reach performances that have higher expectations for a jackpot than super reach performances, and are executed after the normal reach performance or the super reach performance. For example, a normal reach performance is performed to a development performance, and then the three performance symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to a corner of the first image display device 70, using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. It is designed to perform a special reach effect than "SP reach". In addition, in "SPSP reach", a reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a other than "7", and in "SPSP "7" reach", a reach effect is performed with a pattern of "7".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach that guarantees a jackpot, and is executed after the normal reach performance. For example, a development effect is executed from a normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and change at a low speed, and "SPSP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. It is designed to have a special reach effect (reach effect that guarantees a jackpot) than "SPSP '7' Reach".

The first feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 5 is that the type of special figure variation pattern to be determined is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing this, it becomes difficult to discern the setting value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

A second feature of the special figure variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 5 is that the selection ratio of each special figure variation pattern is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing this, it becomes difficult to discern the setting value from the special figure fluctuation pattern, and it becomes possible to provide a fair game.

The third feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 5 is that when the number of reserved first special symbols increases to 2 or 3 during a non-time saving state, a shortening variation is determined as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. On the other hand, even if the second special symbol reservation number increases to 2 or 3 during the non-time saving state, the shortening variation is not determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of special symbols when hitting left than when hitting right in a non-time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The fourth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. While the fluctuation is not determined, when the second special symbol reservation number increases from 1 to 3 during the time saving state, the (long) shortening fluctuation becomes easier to be determined as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. By doing this, it is possible to increase the time efficiency (execution efficiency) of the variable display of special symbols when hitting right than when hitting left in the time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

(Pre-judgment table)
FIG. 6(a) is a preliminary judgment table for the non-time-saving state for pre-judging (pre-reading) the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 during the non-time-saving state. , FIG. 6(b) is a preliminary determination table for the time-saving state for pre-judging (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 6, the preliminary determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. , a special figure scheduled variation pattern as a determination result and a prefetch designation command indicating the special figure scheduled variation pattern are associated.

Therefore, the "special pattern scheduled variation pattern" can be said to be able to specify the type of special symbol, the result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern scheduled to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 6, and determines the planned special pattern fluctuation based on the random value for jackpot determination, the random value for special symbol determination, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination. The pattern is determined and a prefetch designation command corresponding to the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern is sent to the production control board 130.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a disables all interrupts in step S1, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and performs startup wait processing for other boards in step S3. Specifically, in order to avoid missing commands from the main control board 110, the CPU waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 to start up.

The main CPU 110a allows access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing to permit the shooting device 26 to shoot the game balls.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that the power has been restored, and the process moves to step S7; if the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that the power is turned on for the first time, and the process moves to step S8.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed in step S8. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process moves to step S9 as a transition to setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process moves to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S9. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a setting value area of the gaming RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. Displays the current setting values saved in and sends a setting change designation command to the production control board 130.

Furthermore, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the setting value is changed (updated) in the range of "1" to "4", the updated setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is When there is a setting confirmation operation that changes the setting from the ON state to the OFF state, the changed (updated) setting value is saved in the setting value area to confirm the setting value, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is ended. At the same time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and processing for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

In addition, in the production control board 130 which received the setting change designation command, processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed will be performed. Specifically, a settings change screen is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 to indicate that the settings are being changed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are displayed in a predetermined manner while the settings are being changed. All the lights are turned on with the same emission color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 9 may output a settings change notification sound (“Settings are being changed”) indicating that settings are being changed.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal in step S10. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), the process moves to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), Assuming that it is not possible to normally return to the control state before power-off, the process moves to step S12.

Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S12. Move.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an irreversible error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the production control board 130. , sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and after clearing the output port, outputs a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the production control board 130 performs a process for notifying an unrecoverable error.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (no transition to game control occurs), and is not canceled unless a setting change process is executed. Therefore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, even if you turn off the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 and then turn on the power switch without changing settings, it will not be canceled and the It is now necessary to turn on the power switch in conjunction with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Note that although the "unrecoverable error" is not cleared unless the setting change process is executed, it may also be cleared when RWM clear is executed without the setting change process.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a notification to make the user aware that an unrecoverable error has occurred. "), the frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 76 are lit in a predetermined color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the audio output device 9. An unrecoverable error sound ("Unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) indicating that the error has occurred is output until the power is turned off.
Note that the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the board illumination device 76 may be collectively referred to as a "production device."

The main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed in step S13. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, it is assumed that RWM clear is to be executed and the process moves to step S14, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S14. Specifically, processing is performed to initialize the gaming control state (initialize the gaming RWM area other than the setting value area).

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command to the payout control board 120 and the power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state). It is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the process moves to step S21. As a result, the production control board 130 performs processing for executing power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135" ), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit up in a predetermined color (for example, red) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), and the RWM area is displayed from the audio output device 9. This means outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) to indicate that the device has been initialized.
Note that in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S17 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was cut off. The process moves to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a setting value area of the gaming RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. Displays the current set values saved in and sends a setting confirmation designation command to the production control board 130.

Furthermore, when there is a confirmation end operation that changes the setting key switch 112a from the ON state to the OFF state, the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is ended, and the state confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is ended, Performs processing to end setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in the production control board 130 which received the setting confirmation designation command, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed will be performed. Specifically, the image display devices 70 and 71 display a setting confirmation screen indicating that the settings are being confirmed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 emit a predetermined light while the settings are being confirmed. Turn on all lights in a color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Setting values are being confirmed”) indicating that the settings are being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the gaming RWM area, and sets the gaming RWM area when the power is restored. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the production control board 130 a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage occurred. As a result, the production control board 130 performs a process for terminating setting confirmation notification, etc., which will be described later, and executing power recovery notification.

"Power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect The frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 are fully illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g. blue) for a predetermined period (e.g. 60 seconds), the audio output device 9 A power restoration notification sound ("power has been restored" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power outage) is output for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds).
Note that in the power restoration notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that the power has been restored may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a executes other commands (a command for specifying the number of reserved special symbols (U1) and a second reserved number of special symbols (U2), and the number of reserved regular symbols (G)). A command for specifying the number of reserved general figures shown) is transmitted to the production control board 130. As a result, the performance control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols and the number of reserved regular symbols, and also perform processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70. It will be done.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the production control board 130 in step S21. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the production control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are transmitted. Furthermore, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time a variable display of special symbols starts, or each time a jackpot game starts.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol determination to determine the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, and in step S25, An initial value random value update process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether a power outage detection signal is input from the power outage detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power outage detection signal is not input, the process moves to step S24, and the power outage detection is performed. If a signal is input, the process moves to step S27.

The main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step S27, clears the output port in step S28, and clears the gaming RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c in step S29. In step S30, a process is performed to save a backup flag in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S31, Processing is performed to prohibit RAM access, and the process waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for setting change operations, it is not possible to change settings easily, which makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts and improve the security of gaming machines. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is greater than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, making it possible to avoid the most fraudulent setting changes. It is possible to increase the security of events where acts are likely to be committed, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, causing the game machine to perform unexpected operations and causing inconvenience to the game parlor and players. This eliminates the need for overtime, making it possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, if the value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, in other words, if the previous power-off may have occurred while changing the settings, irreversible error processing will be executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with setting values that are not intended by the game parlor, thereby improving the reliability of the game machine. Become.

Also, while changing settings (setting change mode) or checking settings (setting confirmation mode), on the front (surface) of gaming machine 1, there are a status confirmation display 68, image display devices 70 and 71, and a frame lighting device. It is possible to recognize that the settings are being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back side (back side). ing. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front) or the back (back) of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the condition for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. By doing so, the number of conditions increases, so fraudulent acts can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

In addition, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is performed. is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the gaming program initializes the gaming RWM area (clears it to 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the setting value area. Then, the process may be moved to step S13.

Additionally, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (power has been restored) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the gaming program initializes the gaming RWM area (clears it to 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the setting value area. , the process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current gaming state, but after transmitting the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the current gaming state Alternatively, a gaming state designation command indicating the game state may be transmitted.

In addition, when the power is turned off or turned on, the gaming program calculates the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c, but the information program calculates the checksum. may be calculated. In this case, it is preferable to save the calculated checksum in the information RWM area.

Also, when the power is turned off or turned on, the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but even if the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may proceed to irreversible error processing.

Additionally, a settings change designation command is sent at the start of the settings change process, and a power-on designation command is sent after the settings change process ends, but instead of the settings change designation command, a settings change start designation command is sent. However, instead of the power-on designation command, a setting change end designation command may be sent. In this case, the settings change end designation command may be sent at the end of the settings change process, or may be sent after the settings change process ends.

Further, when a setting change is made, the RWM clearing process is performed after the setting change is made, but the RWM clearing process may be performed before the setting change is made.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 8. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, updates the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter such as the opening time of special electric accessories, etc. It performs time control processing to update various timer counters such as updating processing of , normal symbol time counter updating processing, and updating processing of opening/closing time of the movable member 48 . Specifically, 1 is subtracted from counters such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting port opening timer counter, and a starting port closing timer counter.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for hit determination, a random value for normal symbol determination, and a regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination. Performs specific random number update processing to update random numbers. Specifically, each random value and random number counter are updated by adding +1. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding The initial value random value is set as a new round initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a, similarly to step S30, sets the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination. Perform initial value random value update processing to be updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the out ball detection switch 52a, etc. It determines whether or not there is an input to each switch, and performs input control processing to set predetermined data if there is an input. The details will be described later using FIG. 9.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a operates a special figure special electric line for determining the number of reserved special figures (judgment of jackpot, etc.), controlling the display of special symbols, controlling opening/closing of the grand prize opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), controlling the gaming state, etc. Performs control processing. The details will be described later using FIG. 11.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a executes a normal pattern and general electric power control process for determining the number of normal patterns stored (hit determination, etc.), controlling the display of normal symbols, controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), etc. conduct.

It should be noted that the type of winning normal symbol and the type of losing normal symbol determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol determination information performed in the ordinary symbol and electric power control process are the same without changing depending on the setting value. By doing so, the gameplay is not too complicated and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various winning ordinary symbols and the selection ratio of various losing ordinary symbols, which are determined as a result of the determination of ordinary symbol determination information performed in ordinary symbols and electric power control processing, do not change depending on the setting value and remain constant. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process to send a payout status confirmation designation command to the payout control board 120 to check the payout status of the payout control board 120, and to send a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning port to the payout control board 120 by referring to the prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) described below. This causes the payout control board 120 to execute control to pay out prize balls from the payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and issues a magnetic abnormality error specification command and a radio wave abnormality error specification command. Performs magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting commands to the production control board 130. In addition, when the production control board 130 receives the error designation command for magnetic abnormality or the error designation command for radio wave abnormality, it performs control to perform magnetic abnormality error notification or radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (gaming information) from the gaming information output terminal board 90, starting opening opening/closing data outputting to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening/closing data, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60 and second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, and performs data creation processing to create data such as special symbol pending display data to be output to the second special symbol pending display 64 and normal symbol pending display data to be output to the normal symbol pending display 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing to output signals such as the external information data, starting opening opening/closing data, and big winning opening opening/closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , a display output process that outputs signals such as special symbol pending display data, normal symbol pending display data, etc., and a payout command transmission process that transmits a command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Also, an output control process is performed to execute a production command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the production control board 130.

The main CPU 110a performs information program call processing in step S800. Specifically, after disabling interrupts, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area, and processing is performed to call the target information program using a CALL instruction.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the number of payouts during normal play, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes (general winning hole, big winning hole, starting hole) during normal gaming state, Processing is performed to count the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, regardless of the gaming state. .

In addition, the total number of outs, the number of payouts during normal play, and the number of outs during normal play are gaming information that is not affected (unrelated to the setting value) even if the setting value is changed, so these By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value to be described later) that excludes the influence of the set value, and it becomes possible to use it for understanding the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((Number of payouts during normal play ÷ Number of outs during normal play) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. Processing is performed to save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is divided into a first area where the normal base value in the current game section is stored, and a one-time storage area. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous gaming section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the two previous gaming sections, and a normal base value in the three previous gaming sections. A fourth area for playing the game is provided, and the base values for four game sections including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base value (performance information) for four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area is displayed on the information display 113 while being switched every 5 seconds. Performs processing to set performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, processing is performed to create test data (test information) to be output to test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing is performed to output signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various indicators, and processing is performed to output signals such as test data created in step S870 above. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing upon returning to the gaming program. Specifically, processing is performed to restore the flag register from the gaming RWM area, enable interrupts, and return to the gaming program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the setting change processing, RWM clear processing, and setting confirmation processing, so it is not possible to count the number of payouts and outs, calculate the performance information of the gaming machine, and perform the processing of the gaming machine. Since the performance information is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board 110.

Although the performance information calculation process was performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Further, the game ball counting process may also be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. In this general winning hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process moves to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, data indicating 5 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (5 prize ball counter) for the general winning hole used for prize balls and updated. Then, after adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole and updating it (D←D+1), the general winning hole detection switch input process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. In this big winning hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the big winning hole detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process moves to step S230.

When the detection signal from the big winning opening detection switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter (15 winning balls counter) for the big winning opening used for winning balls. Update and add "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that entered the winning slot and update (D←D+1) to determine whether the current jackpot game (special game) is in progress. Determine whether If you are currently playing a jackpot game, add "1" to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have entered the big winning hole 50 and update it (C←C+1). Detection switch input processing ends.

If the current gaming state is not a special gaming state, the number of illegal winning balls that have won (balls entered) in the specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, big winning opening 50) outside the winning winning period. Add "1" to the counter (E) and update it (E←E+1), determine whether the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number (for example, 10), and If the value of the ball counter (E) is less than or equal to the specified number, the big winning opening detection switch input process is ended.

If the value of the illegal prize winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, an illegal prize winning (unauthorized winning ball) in which a game ball wins a prize (balls entered) outside the winning period has occurred, and an error for fraudulent prize winning is designated. Set the command to the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, an error specifying command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 issues a fraudulent winning error notification to notify that a fraudulent winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared, and the big winning opening is detected. End switch input processing. As a result, a fraudulent winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to grasp (specify) that a fraudulent winning has occurred.

The main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process in step S230. In this first starting port detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or not. The details will be described later using FIG. 10.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. In this second starting port detection switch input process, substantially the same process as the first starting port detection switch input process shown in FIG. 10, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the regular figure gate 44 or not. If no detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process ends.

When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of regular symbols held, which is the number of regular symbols stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area, is less than four. If the number of reserved general drawings is not less than 4, the input control process is ended.

If the number of reserved symbols is less than 4, the number of reserved symbols is updated by adding "1", and the ordinary symbol judgment information (random value for hit determination, random value for determining ordinary symbols, fluctuation pattern of ordinary symbols) is updated. Random value for determination) is acquired, and the vacant storage sections are searched in order from the first storage section in the normal symbol storage area, and the acquired ordinary symbol determination information is stored in the empty storage section and input. Control processing ends.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process moves to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-prize ball counter used for prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, the main CPU 110a updates the 3-prize ball counter used for prize balls. A random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, a random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process moves to step S230-5, and if the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start The mouth detection switch input process ends.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and updating it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the main CPU 110a performs processing to update the first special symbol pending number (U1). A first special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the figure reservation number (U1) is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special figure reservation number designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the first special figure reservation number.

The main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the first special symbol reservation storage area in step S230-7. Specifically, since the first special symbol holding storage area is divided into the first storage part to the fourth storage part, the empty storage parts are searched in order from the first storage part, and the empty storage part is searched in order. The special figure determination information obtained in the above is stored.

As a result of the above, the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area stores special symbol determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, and special symbol fluctuation pattern determination). A first pending memory consisting of random numbers, etc.) will be stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state. If it is in the non-time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S230-9, and if it is not in the non-time-saving gaming state, the current first starting opening detection switch input process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-9. In this first preliminary determination process, the preliminary determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the currently acquired special symbol determination information (first pending memory) is stored before the special symbol fluctuation display based on the determination information is performed. A planned variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets a first prefetch designation command corresponding to the schedule fluctuation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process in step S230-8 in the performance transmission data storage area, and 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

As a result, the first prefetch designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 starts changing the special symbol corresponding to the first prefetch designation command. It is possible to execute a prefetched preview performance that executes a predetermined preview performance over a plurality of variable displays. Note that the pre-read preview effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the board lighting device 76. This is done using

Regarding the second starting port detection switch input process, the first starting port detection switch 45a, the first starting port 45, the first special symbol reservation storage area, the first reservation memory, the first special symbol reservation number (U1), The first special symbol reservation number designation command, the first preliminary determination process, and the first prefetch designation command are respectively transmitted to the second starting port detection switch 47a, the second starting port 47, the second special symbol pending storage area, the second pending storage, What is necessary is to read it as the second special figure reservation number (U2), the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second preliminary determination process, and the second pre-reading designation command.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric line processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric line processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, The current special map special electric train control process ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the reserved memory (special figure judgment information), the variable time is set, and the variable display is started. Processing and special figure special electric processing data for transmitting accompanying start time commands (special symbol storage designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as start time signal) to the production control board 130 A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) is executed to change the value to "1". The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 1, the variable display of the special symbol will be stopped as the variation time elapses, a stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) will be set, and the stop command (special figure stop as a stop signal) will be executed. Special symbol variation processing (step S320) is executed to perform processing for transmitting a command) to the performance control board 130, processing for changing special symbol special electric processing data to "2", etc.

If the special pattern special electricity processing data = 2, the special pattern special electricity processing data will be changed to "0" if the special symbol is a loss as the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has passed, and if it is a jackpot special symbol, it will be a jackpot. The opening time of the game is set, and processing for transmitting an opening designation command to the performance control board 130 and special symbol stop processing (step S330) for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the round game is started as the opening time of the jackpot game has elapsed, and the jackpot is executed based on the processing for transmitting the round number designation command to the production control board 130 and the end of the final round game. Executes jackpot game processing (step S340) for setting the ending time of the game and transmitting an ending designation command to the production control board 130, processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", etc. do.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process for ending the jackpot game as the ending time passes, and the game state after the jackpot ends (low-accuracy time-saving game state, high-accuracy time-saving game state, high probability number of times, time-saving number) ), a jackpot game end process (step S350) is executed to perform a process to set the special figure special electric line process data to "0", etc.

(Special symbol memory determination processing of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the special symbol is not in the variable display state, the process moves to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process goes to step S310-4. move.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second special figure reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1," and in step S310-6, the second special figure reservation number (U2) corresponds to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after the subtraction. A special symbol storage designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, sets the gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data stored in the storage section, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage sections is shifted to the previous storage section.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage part which is the special figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage part. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process goes to step S319-1. move.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special figure reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the main CPU 110a updates the special figure reservation number (U1) corresponding to the first special figure reservation number (U1) after the subtraction. A symbol storage designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol holding storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) after subtraction is stored in the main RAM 110c. set in a predetermined area. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the second special figure reservation number is However, in the order in which the game balls enter the starting hole, the first special figure judgment information holding storage area or the second special drawing judgment information holding storage area is It may be shifted (subtracting the number of reserved 1st special symbols and the number of reserved 2nd special symbols in the winning order), or the 1st special symbol determination information retention storage area may be prioritized over the 2nd special symbol determination information retention storage area. You may also shift (subtract the first special figure reservation number with priority over the second special figure reservation number).

The main CPU 110a performs jackpot determination processing in step S311. Specifically, the special figure determination information (random value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is checked against the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 3, and a jackpot is determined. Determine whether or not. Also, the special symbol determination information (random value for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is checked against the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 4, and the special symbol to be stopped is determined. Performs processing to determine the type of.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command (first information signal) corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol designation command (first information signal) is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and a process is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable performance.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing in step S313. Specifically, the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is checked against the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. Performs processing to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time).

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sends a special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command (second information signal) corresponding to the type of special pattern fluctuation pattern determined in the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination process to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. set. As a result, a special symbol variation pattern designation command (second information signal) is transmitted to the production control board 130, and processing for determining a variation production pattern, which is a production mode of variation production performed during the variation display of the special symbol, is carried out. It will be done.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , starts changing display of special symbols. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S800, so that the first A variable display of special symbols will be performed on the special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and ends the current special symbol memory determination process. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process moves to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbols are not displayed fluctuating and the special game (jackpot game) is not being executed, but the requirement also includes that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. You can.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is completed. As a result, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demonstration performance to encourage the player to play.

(Main processing of the production control section)
Next, the main processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the production control section 130m.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, flags etc. stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial settings is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupts in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random numbers stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
The timer interrupt process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 14. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the production control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and when there is an input, processing is performed to set predetermined data.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, the process determines whether or not various commands are being transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands are being transmitted. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change/confirmation process in step E170. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if a setting change designation command has been received, the above-mentioned settings are A process for executing change notification is performed, and if a setting confirmation designation command is received, a process for executing the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power-on designation command has been received, processing is performed to execute a power-on notification. More specifically, a power-on notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to output audio. For example, the device 9 may output a power-on sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power restoration designation command has been received, processing is performed to execute a power failure restoration notification. In detail, a power recovery notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 to display a power recovery screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to output audio. For example, the device 9 may output a power restoration sound.

Note that when the power-on process or the power failure recovery process is performed, for example, "135" is displayed as the initial symbol (also referred to as an initial roll) of the effect symbol 70a displayed on the first image display device 70.
The initial symbols (also referred to as initial numbers) may display different combinations of symbols depending on whether the power-on process is performed or the power failure recovery process is performed. For example, "135" may be displayed when power-on processing has been performed, and "357" may be displayed when power failure recovery processing has been performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing in step E300. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and if a command has been received, performs processing to perform a customer waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. conduct. To be more specific, a customer waiting production command is sent to the display control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demonstration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to A customer waiting demo sound is outputted from the output device 9. The details of the customer waiting performance process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a gaming state update process in step E350. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received, and if it has been received, updates the gaming state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs pending information update processing in step E400. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to, and it is determined whether or not a command for specifying the number of special drawings reserved or a command for specifying the number of regular drawings reserved is received, and if the command is received, it is stored (ascertained) in the sub-RAM 130c. ), the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of second reserved special symbols, the number of regular symbols, etc. are updated.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch effect process. Specifically, the receiving buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether a prefetch designation command or a special figure variation pattern designation command is received, and if so, the icon changes as a prefetch-related effect. Performs processing related to production, continuous preview production, and lamp change production. Note that the details of the look-ahead performance processing will be described later.

The "icon change performance" is a type of pre-read preview performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the pending icon and the display mode of the icon. In the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a pending icon may be referred to as a "hold icon change effect" and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect."

The "continuous notice performance" is a type of advance notice performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined performance over one or more variable performances.
The "lamp change performance" is a type of advance notice performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the light emission mode of the winning slot lamp over one or more variable performances.

The sub CPU 130a performs special figure special electric production processing in step E600. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round number designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command are executed. etc., and if so, performs processing to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

In addition, if the special symbol designation command (first information signal) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command (second information signal) as a start command (start time signal) accompanying the start of fluctuation display are successfully received. , a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance symbols (a first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, a second variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol) will be executed. However, there is an abnormality in the special symbol designation command or the special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command (the relationship between loss and jackpot does not match, the type of special symbol indicated by MODE in the command does not match, the DATA side of the command is damaged. (e.g., the content has changed to something that could not have occurred in the first place), the command is invalidated and the variation effect is not executed. Also, the special symbol designation command and the special symbol variation pattern designation command cannot be received normally (the special symbol designation command is not received within a predetermined time after receiving the special symbol designation command, or the special symbol designation command is not received. Even if a special figure variation pattern designation command is received when the special figure variation pattern designation command is not executed, the command is deemed invalid and the variation effect is not executed. In the following explanation, cases where there is an abnormality in the command and cases where the command cannot be received normally are referred to as "command abnormality."

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a performs a general figure and general electric display process. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c and receives a normal symbol designation command, a regular symbol variation pattern designation command, a regular symbol stop designation command, a winning opening designation command, a winning ending designation command, etc. It is determined whether or not the command is received, and if the command is received, processing is performed to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

The sub CPU 130a performs production mode update processing in step E800. Specifically, updating the production mode (production stage) in which production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined. It is determined whether the conditions (changes in the game state, winning of the mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach effects that result in a loss, etc.) are met, and if the update conditions are met, multiple production modes are executed. Perform processing to update to one of the modes.

"Production mode" includes production modes A to C set in the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state), production mode D to E set in the variable probability gaming state (high probability non time saving gaming state), and production mode D to E set in the variable probability gaming state (high probability non time saving gaming state). A performance mode F is provided which is set in the gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). In addition, when the power is turned on and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (for example, after changing settings, clearing RWM, confirming settings, etc.), the first performance mode set is always performance mode A, and when the power is turned on, When the power is turned on, the production mode that is set first is always production mode D, and when the power is turned on and the time-saving gaming state is controlled, the production mode that is first set is always production mode D. is always in production mode F.

In addition, in production modes A to C, the production pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters corresponding to the numbers (decoration part) + design effect images (decoration part) that decorate the backgrounds of the numbers and characters, Numbers and character designs differ between production modes. In the performance modes D to G, the performance pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters), and the design of the numbers is common among the performance modes. Furthermore, in the production modes A to G, the background image corresponding to each production mode scrolls left and right (reciprocating motion).

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if so, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. , or terminate the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it performs processes such as outputting signals such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150.

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting performance processing by the performance control department)
The customer waiting performance process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting performance processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E300-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process moves to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E300-2 until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance. Select the demonstration standby time determination table (see FIG. 16) for determining the standby time of . Note that details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demo standby time and sets it in the demo standby timer. Specifically, with reference to the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 16, one demonstration standby time is determined from among a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and the current state.

Note that a demonstration standby timer is set, and a customer waiting effect is executed until the demonstration standby timer becomes 0. "Customer waiting standby effect" refers to the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, the relevant icon display area 70C, first pending icon display area 70B or second pending icon display area 70D, first special symbol pending number display area 70E, 2 special figure reserved number display area 70F is visible, and in addition to this, the first image (effect button 17), a second image suggesting that the volume can be adjusted by operating the up and down buttons of the four-way controller 18 (an image imitating the four-way controller 18 whose up and down buttons are brightly colored), This is an effect that displays a third image (an image imitating the cross key 18 whose left and right buttons are brightly colored) suggesting that the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons 18.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is on standby for a demonstration. Specifically, it is determined whether a demonstration standby timer is set. If the demo is not on standby, the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated as not to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance, and if the demo is on standby, the demo waiting timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. .

The sub CPU 130a determines whether the demo standby timer=0 in step E300-6. If the demo standby timer is not 0, it is assumed that the customer waiting demonstration performance has not yet been executed, and the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated.If the demo waiting timer = 0, the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed in step E300-7. The command is set in the transmission buffer and the current customer waiting performance process is ended. As a result, a customer waiting demonstration performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a customer waiting demonstration performance that appeals to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demo standby time determination table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table that is referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration production.

In the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 16, the gaming state, the current state, and the selected demo standby time are associated with each other. Four types of demonstration standby times from 30 seconds to 80 seconds are set for the demonstration standby time in the normal gaming state, and four types of demonstration standby times from 35 seconds to 85 seconds are set for the demonstration standby time in the specific gaming state. is set.

The first feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 16 is the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on, and the demonstration symbols are displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is restored. The demonstration waiting time after the is displayed statically, the demonstration waiting time after the fluctuating display of the production symbol ends (the fluctuation time has elapsed) and the production symbol is statically displayed, and the demonstration symbol after the end of the customer waiting demo production. The difference is that the waiting time for the demonstration after it is displayed statically is different. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 16 is that the fluctuating display of the performance symbols ends (variation The point is that the demonstration waiting time is longer after the performance pattern is displayed statically after the time has passed. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration performance can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the demonstration pattern waits for a longer time after the performance symbols are displayed statically on the image display device. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the waiting time for the demonstration after the design is statically displayed is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 16 is that the demonstration standby time is the shortest after the performance symbols are statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance. Therefore, the appeal of the game to players can be effectively increased, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The sixth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 16 is that each demonstration standby time in a specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state) is longer than each demonstration waiting time in the normal gaming state. The point is that it is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Pre-reading performance processing by the performance control unit)
Using FIG. 17, the pre-reading performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process for determining whether or not to perform the icon change effect, the mode of effect of the icon change effect, and the like. Note that details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process in step E520 (changes the already displayed pending icon or the display mode of the icon). Perform execution processing. Note that details of the icon change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance determination process for determining whether to execute the continuous preview performance, the presentation mode of the continuous preview performance, and the like. Note that details of the continuous preview performance determination process will be described later.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance execution process for executing the continuous preview performance determined to be executed in the continuous preview performance determination process. Note that details of the continuous preview performance determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process to execute a lamp change effect (lights up the prize opening lamp NR in a light emission mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed), and The prefetching performance processing ends. The details of the lamp change effect execution process will be described later.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E510-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the performance contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the icon change effect. If it is the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-7.

The "executable period of icon change performance" refers to a case where a jackpot game is not being executed, an icon change performance is not being executed, or an icon change performance is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, if the received prefetch designation command is based on winning at the first starting port 45, it is a normal gaming state, and the received prefetching designation command is based on winning at the second starting port 47. In some cases, it may be provided that the game is in a specific gaming state (a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), or the like.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a obtains a random value for determining the icon display mode for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-5. , selects the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 19) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Note that details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E510-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. One icon final display mode is determined from among the icon final display modes.

In step E510-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) in which an icon change effect is executed. If the display mode is such that an icon change effect is executed, the process moves to step E510-9, and if the display mode is not a display mode that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 17) for determining a change scenario for the icon change effect. Note that details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the pending icon appears until it disappears.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. One change scenario is determined from among the change scenarios.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode initially displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and displays the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination process is completed. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect will be output.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode. The type of notification sound when the icon is generated for each type is described.

The final icon display mode includes a white icon as a normal icon, and a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon as special icons that indicate the possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game will be executed). has been done.

The expectation level of winning a jackpot related to special icons increases in the order of (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon, and the rainbow icon is an icon that is guaranteed to be a jackpot.

When the white icon is displayed on the image display device, the first occurrence alarm sound is output, when the blue icon is displayed, the second occurrence alarm sound is output, and when the red icon is displayed, the second occurrence alarm sound is output. , the third occurrence notification sound is output, and when the rainbow icon is displayed, the fourth occurrence notification sound is set to be output.

Here, the main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19 is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied according to the scheduled variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the planned variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, special icons are selected at a higher rate than when the planned variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in reach. It is supposed to be done.

In addition, in the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19, in the case of a jackpot, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode, but it may be selected. .

In this embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the plurality of icon display modes (4 types), but the notification sound when a white icon is generated, a blue icon, a red icon, and It may be possible to have two types of notification sounds, including a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow icon, or to output the notification sound only when the icon changes to one of the modes without outputting the notification sound when a white icon occurs. You can. Further, for the rainbow icon that is certain to be a jackpot, a dedicated notification sound may be provided and there may be three types.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, and is used as a reference. Preliminary changes in each change scenario and how icons are updated in the changes are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is executed), but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, Scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation and during the execution of the variation (pending icon change effect and the icon change effect is executed) ) scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) is set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of this embodiment, a scenario is determined in which the display mode of the icon is changed regardless of whether or not a reach effect (a reach effect other than a normal reach effect may be performed) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by a change scenario determination table that uses as a determining factor whether or not a reach effect that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed in advance variation is executed. Alternatively, the scenario in which the When using such a change scenario determination table, the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, the display mode of the icon changes during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed, and the pre-variation in which a reach effect is not executed, but the reach effect is lower than during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set in such a way that changes in the display mode of the icon occur at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon change performance execution processing of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing icon change performance execution processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process moves to step E520-2, and if the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon change production execution process is ended.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to change (update) the display mode in the current variable performance. Determine whether there is an icon. If there is a pending icon that changes the display mode, the process moves to step E520-4, and if there is no pending icon that changes the display mode, the process moves to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table for hold icons (see FIG. 22) for determining a change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. Note that details of the change pattern determination table for pending icons will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for pending icons shown in FIG. 22, one of the multiple pending icon change patterns is selected based on the mode of pending icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%). One pending icon change pattern is determined from the following.

In step E520-6, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change production command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and is displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the pending icon will change, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) will be output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) of the icon is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the scenario of the icon is stored, the process moves to step E520-8, and if the scenario of the icon is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the prefetch information storage area during power recovery or startup. This step assumes that a command error has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the pre-read information storage area due to the inability to properly receive the command at the time of winning a prize (the command for specifying the number of special drawings reserved as a signal for winning a prize, the command for specifying pre-reading). Transfer processing to E520-11.

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon change effect execution process is ended.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects from among the change pattern determination tables for a plurality of icons for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed in the current variation performance. A change pattern determination table (see FIG. 23) for the icon is selected according to the change stage at which the icon changes. Note that details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-10. Specifically, the change pattern determination table for the selected icon is referred to, and multiple icons are selected based on the mode of the icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from among the change patterns.

In step E520-11, the sub CPU 130a performs an abnormality process to determine whether or not to execute the icon change effect as compensation for the icon change effect that may not have been executed due to power restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality. 24. Select the icon change pattern determination table (FIG. 24). Note that details of the icon change pattern determination table for abnormal situations will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-12. Specifically, with reference to the icon change pattern determination table for the selected abnormality, based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the current special figure fluctuation pattern designation command and the selection rate (%) of each relevant icon change pattern, One icon change pattern is determined from among the plurality of icon change patterns, and the final icon display mode is also determined.

In step E520-13, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the icon change pattern is a change pattern that changes the display mode of the icon. If it is a change pattern, the process moves to step E520-14, and if it is not a change pattern (non-change pattern), the current icon change effect execution process is ended.

In step E520-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect execution process. As a result, a change production command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the icon will change, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) will be output.

As described above, according to the icon change performance execution process shown in FIG. (change effect) may be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of dissatisfaction caused by the failure of the icon change effect due to power restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the icon change performance execution process shown in FIG. 21, the icon change performance is executed again in the variable performance newly started after the power is restored (the icon had become a special icon due to the pending icon change performance, but the icon changed to normal when the power was restored). Even if the icon change effect is executed for an icon that has returned to an icon, the change scenario before power restoration ( The process will not be executed from the point where it left off (the step that was suggested before the power supply was stopped). Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change performance that matches the content of the current variation performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the power is restored or a command abnormality occurs while the icon change effect is being executed, in the variable effect that is newly started after the power is restored or the command abnormality occurs, the suspended memory (special figure) that triggered the execution of the icon change effect will be saved. The icon change effect is not executed in the variable effect corresponding to the pending memory (special figure judgment information) earlier than the judgment information), and the icon change effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the pending memory that triggered the execution of the icon change effect. It may be executable.

(Change pattern determination table for pending icon)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for hold icons that is referred to when determining a change pattern for hold icons.

The pending icon change pattern determination table is associated with the pending icon change mode in the current variation performance, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the selected pending icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of a pending icon change effect and the change stage in each pending icon change pattern are described.

The hold icon change pattern includes normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shifted and displayed (at the start of variation) in response to the icon disappearing. , normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes while changing with the output of a sound effect, and the display of the icon as a character appears and an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as a starting point is performed. A character action change pattern 01 in which the aspect changes, and a change notification pattern indicating that the display form of the icon changes as a result of the fluctuation effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and an effect effect that acts on the pending icon using the change notification pattern as a starting point. A symbol effect change pattern 01 is set in which the display mode of the pending icon changes as a result of this change.

The timing at which the pending icon change effect occurs is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect: when the variable effect starts (at the start of the change), when the change effect is being executed (during change), and when the change effect occurs during the change effect. There are times when the 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the pending icon includes 1UP, which changes the display mode of the jackpot winning expectation level to one level higher (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, or a change from a blue icon to a red icon), and a jackpot winning expectation level. 2UP (for example, change from a white icon to a red icon) is set to change the display mode to a two-step higher display mode.

Note that, although the change effect generation timing of the pending icon is set to the above three timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that a variable performance is being executed (during variation) until a reach is established, a normal reach is being executed, an SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, etc.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon that is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. This is a table to be referred to, and FIG. 23(b) is a table to be referred to when changing the display mode of the icon in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation performance, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the timing at which the icon change effect occurs and the change stage in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change patterns include normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes at the start of the variation accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes during the variation accompanied by the output of a sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character effect change pattern 01 are set in which a character appears and an action effect is performed that acts on the icon starting from the character and the display mode of the icon changes.

The timing at which the change effect of the icon occurs is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and is classified as when the change effect is started (at the start of change), during the execution of the change effect (during change), and when the change effect is in progress. There are times when the 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the icon includes 1UP, which changes the display mode of the jackpot winning expectation to one level higher (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, a change from a blue icon to a red icon), and a jackpot winning expectation. 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon, a change from a blue icon to a rainbow icon) is set to change the display mode to a higher level by two levels.

In addition, in the change pattern determination table for the icon of this embodiment, the symbol effect change pattern 01 is not selected, but may be selected. For example, in a fluctuating performance that performs a pseudo continuous performance, when the temporary stop display of the performance symbol 70a before the pseudo fluctuation is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Pseudo continuous performance" is a fluctuating display of performance symbols as if multiple times in response to a jackpot determination based on winning (ball landing) in one starting hole (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47). In order to make it appear as if the game has been executed, all prizes will be awarded within the special figure fluctuation time determined for each winning (ball entering) into the starting hole (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47). This is a special form of fluctuating display of the performance symbol in which a re-fluctuation display in which the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops and then starts fluctuating again is performed once or multiple times.

In addition, although the change effect generation timing of the said icon was set to the above-mentioned two timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that a variable performance is being executed (during variation) until a reach is established, a normal reach is being executed, an SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, etc.

(Icon change pattern determination table for abnormal situations)
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the icon change pattern determination table for abnormal situations that is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon.

The icon change pattern determination table for abnormal situations includes the variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, the icon change pattern to be selected, and the icon to be selected. The final display mode of each icon is associated with the final display mode, and the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described for reference.

Note that the icon change pattern includes a non-change pattern in which the icon change effect is not executed, but other icon change patterns, the timing of occurrence of the icon change effect, and the change stage of the icon are as described above. Since it is the same as that explained in the change pattern determination table for icons, the explanation here will be omitted.

(Continuous preview production decision processing by production control unit)
The continuous preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing continuous preview performance determination processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E530-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E530-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current continuous preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the performance contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is an executable period for continuous preview presentation. If it is the executable period for continuous notice performances (pre-read action production, pre-read effect production, pre-read vibration production, pre-read zone production), the process moves to step E530-4, and if it is not the executable period for continuous notice production. , the process moves to step E530-16 assuming that the continuous preview performance based on the currently received prefetch designation command is not to be executed.

The "anticipatory action effect" is an effect that intermittently indicates the likelihood of a special game being played by executing an action effect (preview effect) that operates the second movable member 74 in a predetermined manner immediately after the start of one or more variable effects.

The "look-ahead effect performance" is a special game by executing an effect performance (notice performance) that displays an effect image of a predetermined color around the performance symbol 70a at the timing immediately after the start of the variable performance in one or more variable performances. The performance intermittently hints at the level of expectation that will be carried out.

"Ahead vibration performance" is the expectation level that a special game will be executed by executing a vibration performance (notice performance) that vibrates the performance button 17 in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation performance in one or more variable performances. It is a performance that intermittently suggests that.

"Pre-reading zone effects" is a continuous indication of the level of expectation that a special game will be played by executing a mid-zone effect (notice effect) that displays a zone image from a predetermined timing in one or more variable effects. It is a performance that

The "executable period of continuous notice performance" means that there is no continuous notice performance in advance pending, that the jackpot game is not in progress, and that a prefetch designation command based on winning in the first starting opening 45 is received. In this case, it is a normal gaming state, and when a prefetch designation command based on winning to the second starting port 47 is received, it is a specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), etc. Can be mentioned.

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the continuous notice type determination table (see FIGS. 26 and 27) according to the current production mode, and in step E530-5, refers to the continuous notice type determination table and The type of notice (whether or not to execute a continuous notice performance, and the type of continuous notice performance to be executed) is determined. Note that details of the continuous notice type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type is one that will execute a continuous preview performance. If a continuous preview performance is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-16. If a continuous preview performance is to be executed, in step E530-7, a continuous preview scenario determination table (see Figures 28 and 29) corresponding to the current performance mode is selected. Details of the continuous preview scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for which the prefetch action effect is to be executed has been determined. If the prefetching motion effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-10, and if the prefetching motion effect is to be executed, in step E530-9, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referred to and the preview scenario of the prefetching motion effect is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for which the prefetch effect production is to be executed has been determined. If the look-ahead effect performance is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-12, and if the look-ahead effect performance is to be executed, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referred to in step E530-11, and the preview scenario of the look-ahead effect performance is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous notice type for which the pre-read vibration effect is to be executed has been determined. If the pre-reading vibration effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-14, and if the pre-reading vibration effect is to be executed, in step E530-13, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to and the preview scenario of the pre-read vibration effect is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-14, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for which the look-ahead zone effect is to be executed has been determined. If the pre-reading zone effect is not to be executed, the current continuous notice effect determination processing is ended, and if the pre-reading zone effect is to be executed, in step E530-15, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to and the pre-read zone effect is determined. A preview scenario is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current continuous preview performance determination process is completed.

In step E530-16, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-previous scenario for the continuous preview performance (a preview scenario indicating that the continuous preview performance will not be executed), sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and executes the current continuous preview performance. End the determination process.

Note that the preview scenario or the non-previous scenario set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to in the above-described continuous preview performance execution process of step E540, and the process for executing the continuous preview performance or the continuous preview performance is executed. Steps will be taken to prevent this from happening.

As described above, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 25, in the normal game state, the look-ahead motion performance is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance), so in the normal game state, The second movable member 74 operates (moves) more when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable effect) is executed than when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable effect) is executed. It's getting easier. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable presentation) in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 25, in the normal game state, the pre-reading vibration performance is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance). The vibration performance is easier to perform when the variable display of the first special symbol (variable performance) is performed than when the fluctuating display of the special symbol (fluctuation performance) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable presentation) in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 25, in the specific game state, the pre-reading action performance is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (variable performance), so in the specific game state, the first The second movable member 74 operates (moves) more easily when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable effect) is executed than when the variable display of the special symbol (variable effect) is executed. ing. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) in a specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 25, in a specific game state, the pre-reading vibration performance is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (variable performance), so in the specific game state, the first The vibration performance is easier to perform when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) is performed than when the variable display of the special symbol (fluctuation performance) is performed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) in a specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous notice type determination table)
Figure 26 is a diagram showing a successive preview type determination table that is referenced to determine the type of successive preview in presentation modes A to C (normal game playing state), and Figure 27 is a diagram showing a successive preview presentation determination table that is referenced to determine the type of successive preview in presentation modes D to G (specific game playing state).

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the continuous notice type determination table associates the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each continuous notice type, and the selected continuous notice type. , Continuous notice types include ``non-execution'', which does not execute continuous notice effects, ``pre-read motion effect'', ``pre-read effect effect'', and ``pre-read vibration effect'', in which one type of continuous notice effect is executed. , ``Look-ahead zone performance'', ``Look-ahead effect performance & Look-ahead vibration performance'', and ``Look-ahead motion performance & Look-ahead zone performance'' in which two types of continuous notice performances are performed.

For example, if the prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern) is a loss and the SP reach effect is executed, "non-execution" is determined at 85%, "prefetch effect production" is determined at 5%, At 4%, "look-ahead motion effect" is decided, at 3%, "look-ahead vibration effect" is decided, at 2%, "look-ahead zone effect" is decided, and at 1%, "look-ahead effect performance & look-ahead vibration effect" is decided. be done.

(Continuous preview performance scenario determination table)
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a continuous notice scenario determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a continuous notice scenario determination table for performance modes D to G (specific gaming state). It is a diagram.

The continuous notice scenario determination table is associated with the number of special symbols on hold, the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the selected notice scenario. Preliminary fluctuations (before 4 fluctuations, before 3 fluctuations, before 2 fluctuations, before 1 fluctuation) and the performance mode of continuous preview performance in the fluctuations are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

The presentation mode of "weak notice" differs depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of a look-ahead motion production, the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak motion, and a weak motion sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead effect production, a blue effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and a blue effect sound effect is output, and in the case of a look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating the zone 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the production button 17 flashes white. In the case of a pre-read zone production, a blue zone image is displayed and a zone sound effect is output. It is to be done.

The presentation mode of "strong notice" differs depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of a look-ahead motion production, the second movable member 74 emits red light and performs a strong motion, and a strong motion sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead effect production, a red effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and a red effect sound effect is output, and in the case of a look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds, and the production button 17 flashes red. In the case of pre-read zone production, a red heat zone image is displayed and a heat zone sound effect is displayed. is output.

Continuous notice performance scenarios include scenarios in which weak or strong notices are not executed during advance fluctuations and weak notices or strong notices are executed during the fluctuations (for example, scenario 11), and scenarios where weak notices or strong notices are executed during the fluctuations in advance, A scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which a weak notice or a strong notice is executed is set therein.

The first feature of the various tables related to continuous preview effects shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that they are more effective when multiple types of continuous preview effects are executed than when a single type of continuous preview effect is executed. However, there is a point where the expectation of jackpot is high. Therefore, the expectations of the players can be effectively raised, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The second feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that the performance modes D to G (specific game state) are better than the performance modes A to C (normal game state). One of the points is that continuous preview performances are likely to be executed (execution rate is high), that is, the expectation level of jackpot when continuous preview performances are executed is low. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that instead of differentiating the execution rate of continuous preview performances between production modes A to C and production modes D to G, for example, continuous preview production is executed more in production mode B than in production mode A. For example, the execution rate of continuous preview performances may be made different between production modes A to C, or for example, continuous preview production may be made easier to execute in production mode E than in production mode D. The execution rate of the continuous notice performance may be made different between the performance modes D to G. In this way, the expectation of a jackpot in the continuous preview performance changes between performance modes, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), when the normal reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result), Also, in production modes D to G (specific gaming states), if the normal reach production is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), the continuous notice production (here, pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production) is more likely to be executed. There are several points. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where there are more (super) shortening fluctuations than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

The fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), when the SP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result) In performance modes D to G (specific game states), when SP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result), continuous preview production (here, pre-read effect performance, pre-read movement performance, pre-read zone) One of the points is that it is easy to carry out the performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where there are more (super) shortening fluctuations than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

The fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), if the SPSP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result) In performance modes D to G (specific gaming states), when SPSP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (preread result), it is better to use continuous preview effects (here, prefetch effect performance, prefetch action performance, prefetch zone). One of the points is that it is easy to carry out the performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where super shortening fluctuations tend to occur more frequently than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that the full rotation reach performance is scheduled to be executed in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) (pre-read results). In the production mode D to G (specific game state), the case where the full rotation reach production is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) is better than the continuous preview production (here, pre-reading action production, pre-reading zone production). One point is that it is easy to implement. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where super shortening fluctuations tend to occur more frequently than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The seventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that the performance modes A to C (normal game state) are better than the performance modes D to G (specific game state). The point is that the pre-reading vibration performance (vibration performance without displaying the valid period of the performance button 17 or the operation promotion image) is easily executed (high execution rate = different jackpot expectation level). Therefore, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state) where the stay period is likely to be longer than production modes D to G (specific gaming states), it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the pre-reading vibration production, and increase the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the In addition, in production modes D to G (specific gaming states) where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than production modes A to C (normal gaming states), the pre-reading vibration production can be given rarity, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

Note that the pre-reading vibration performance may be executed more easily (the execution rate may be higher) in the performance modes D to G than in the performance modes A to C. In addition, in the normal gaming state, by making it easier to execute pre-reading continuous effects in production mode A than in production modes B or C, the execution rate of pre-reading vibration effects can be reduced between production modes A to C. In a specific game state, the pre-read vibration effect can be executed more easily in the effect mode D than in the effect modes E-G. The performance execution ratio may be varied. In this way, it is possible to vary the expectation level of a jackpot when the pre-read vibration performance is executed between the performance modes, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the various tables related to continuous notice performances shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), specific reach performances (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, ) is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), a specific reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) is scheduled to be executed in performance modes D to G (specific game state) ( If the result is a pre-read result, the pre-read vibration effect is more difficult to execute (the execution rate is lower). Therefore, in production modes D to G (specific gaming states) where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than production modes A to C (normal gaming states), it is possible to give rarity to the pre-reading vibration production and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

The ninth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that the performance modes D to G (specific game state) are better than the performance modes A to C (normal game state). One of the points is that the look-ahead motion effect is easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, in production modes D to G (specific gaming states) where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than production modes A to C (normal gaming states), it is possible to give rarity to the pre-reading vibration production and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

The tenth feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). In the case where a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in production modes D to G (specific game states), it is better to perform a reach performance (normal reach performance) in a variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance. , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) are difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in performance modes D to G (specific game states). In the case where a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), it is better to perform a reach performance (normal reach performance) in a variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance. , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) are easy to execute. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. In modes A to C (normal game state), a continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed, while in performance modes D to G (specific game state), a continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed. If it is executed, it is difficult to execute the reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) in the variable performance that is the preview target of the continuous preview performance. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 13th feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. , When a continuous preview performance that spans three variable performances is executed in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), the reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance) in the variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance , SPSP reach performance) can be easily executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. , when a continuous preview performance that spans three variable performances is executed in production modes D to G (specific game states), it is better to perform a reach performance with a higher expectation of a jackpot in the variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance (for example, , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) are easy to execute. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that the movable members are the same in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state). (The second movable member 74) can be used to perform the pre-reading action effect, but the pre-reading action effect is not possible in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The difference is that the expected jackpot when executed is different. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 16th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that the pre-read motion performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance mode D to G (specific game state). In this case, the ratio (100%) of operating the second movable member 74 not used in the final performance is higher than the ratio (0%) of operating the first movable member 73 used in the final performance described later. can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an inconvenience in which the player mistakenly assumes that there will be a jackpot just because the look-ahead motion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the first movable member 73 may be operated instead of operating the second movable member 74 at the strong notice of the pre-reading action performance. Even in this case, when performing the pre-reading action performance in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) and performance modes D to G (specific gaming state), the ratio of operating the first movable member 73 is , it is preferable that the rate at which the second movable member 74 is operated becomes higher.

The seventeenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 is that the pre-reading vibration performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance mode D to G (specific game state). In this case, the percentage of the production button 17 in the normal state (0%) is higher than the percentage of the production button 17 in the protruding state (0%). Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the performance button 17 being in the protruding state (it is in the protruding state only in the fixed performance described later), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the strong notice of the pre-read vibration performance, the performance button 17 may not be vibrated in the normal state, but may be vibrated in the protruding state. Even in this case, when executing the pre-reading vibration performance in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state), the ratio of the performance button 17 to the protruding state is , it is preferable to set the ratio of the normal state to be higher.

The 18th feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in FIGS. During the high-speed fluctuation period), a weak preview of the look-ahead motion performance (weak motion of the first movable member 73 + blue light emission) and a weak notice of the look-ahead effect performance (display of a blue effect image around the performance pattern 70a) are executed. The point is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a weak preview of the pre-reading vibration effect (weak vibration of the effect button 17 for 1 second) is executed without displaying an operation promotion image than when the operation promotion image is displayed. can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations by using the operating means that the player can operate, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 19th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. During the high-speed fluctuation period), a strong notice of the look-ahead action performance (strong action of the first movable member 73 + red light emission) and a strong notice of the look-ahead effect performance (display of a red effect image around the performance pattern 70a) are executed. One point is that the expectation level of a jackpot is higher when a strong preview of the pre-reading vibration performance (3 seconds of strong vibration of the performance button 17) is executed than when the pre-reading vibration performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations by using the operating means that the player can operate, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous preview performance execution processing by the performance control unit)
The continuous notice performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing continuous preview performance execution processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E540-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process moves to step E540-2, and if the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current continuous notice performance execution process is ended.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the preview scenario of the continuous preview effects (prefetch action effects, prefetch effect effects, prefetch vibration effects, and prefetch zone effects) stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and executes the step E540-2. At E540-3, it is determined whether a preview scenario for continuous preview performance is stored. If the preview scenario is stored, the process moves to step E540-4, and if the preview scenario is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the prefetch information storage area or the winning command (winning command) is executed. It is assumed that a command abnormality has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the pre-reading information storage area due to the inability to normally receive the command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings as a time signal, the pre-reading specifying command), and processing proceeds to step E540-6.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines the preview pattern (type of continuous preview performance, weak preview, strong preview) to be executed in the current variable performance according to the preview scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Then, in step E540-5, a continuous preview presentation command corresponding to the determined preview pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a continuous notice performance command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a continuous notice performance according to the determined notice pattern is executed. When this process is finished, the current continuous notice performance execution process is finished.

In step E540-6, the sub CPU 130a creates an alternative notice pattern for determining whether to execute an alternative notice performance as compensation for a continuous notice performance that may not be executed due to power restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality. Select the determination table (see FIG. 31) and determine the notice pattern. Specifically, with reference to the selected alternative notice pattern determination table, one alternative notice pattern is selected from among the plurality of alternative notice patterns based on the current variable performance pattern and the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern. decide. Note that details of the alternative notice pattern determination table will be described later.

"Alternative preview performance" is a performance to compensate for a continuous preview performance that may not be executed due to power restoration or command abnormality, and is a performance that is used to compensate for a continuous preview performance that may not be executed due to power restoration or command abnormality. This is a type of preview effect that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by displaying the following.

In step E540-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined alternative notice pattern is one for executing an alternative notice effect. If the alternative preview performance is to be executed, the process moves to step E540-8, and if the alternative preview performance is not to be executed, the current continuous preview performance execution process is ended.

In step E540-8, the sub CPU 130a sets an alternative preview effect command corresponding to the alternative preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the alternative preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the alternative preview performance is executed.

According to the continuous preview performance execution process shown in FIG. 30, if the performance scenario of the continuous preview performance is not stored in the prefetch information storage area due to power restoration or a command abnormality (missing of a prefetch specified command, etc.), the continuous preview performance execution process will start from now. It is possible to perform an alternative preview performance different from the continuous preview performance without executing the continuous preview performance in the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of dissatisfaction caused by the continuous preview performance not being executed due to power restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the continuous notice performance execution process shown in FIG. 30, if the power is restored (power outage) while the continuous notice performance is being executed, the continuous notice performance will not be restarted in the variable performance that starts after the power is restored. Additionally, it is possible to perform an alternative preview performance that is different from the continuous preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous preview performance due to the occurrence of power restoration (power outage), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an alternative notice pattern determination table that is referred to when determining an alternative notice pattern.

In the alternative notice pattern determination table, the type of variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, and the selected alternative notice pattern are associated. The presentation mode of the alternative notice pattern is described.

The alternative preview patterns include pattern 00 in which the alternative preview effect is not executed, pattern 01 in which mini character A is displayed on the image display device, pattern 02 in which mini character B is displayed on the image display device, and pattern 02 in which mini character C is displayed on the image display device. A pattern 03 in which the mini-character D is displayed on the image display device, and a pattern 04 in which the mini-character D is displayed on the image display device are set.

The jackpot winning expectation for the mini-characters increases in the order of mini-character A<mini-character B<mini-character C<mini-character D, and mini-character D is a mini-character that is guaranteed to win the jackpot.

The first feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 31 is that a variation pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is more likely to be used as an alternative notice effect than a variation pattern with a low expectation of winning a jackpot. One point is that the pattern is easy to determine. Therefore, the more likely it is that the continuous preview performance was being executed before the power is restored or the command abnormality occurs, the more likely the alternative preview performance will be executed, reducing the feeling of dissatisfaction caused by the end of the continuous preview performance. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second characteristic of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that an alternative notice pattern in which an alternative notice performance is executed is easier to be determined than when a variable performance corresponding to a hold that has not triggered the execution of a continuous notice performance before the hold is executed. Therefore, after the power is restored or a command abnormality occurs, it becomes easier to understand which variable performance corresponds to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, in the variable performance that is executed after the power is restored or a command abnormality occurs, it is decided whether or not to execute the jackpot preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance, etc.) described later. Alternatively, the execution probability of the jackpot preview performance may be made higher than usual so that the alternative preview performance is not executed.

Even in this case, if the variable performance corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous preview performance is executed, it is better to perform the execution trigger of the continuous preview performance before the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous preview performance. It is preferable to make it easier to execute a jackpot preview performance than when a variable performance corresponding to a hold that has not been achieved is executed. In this way, after the power is restored or a command abnormality occurs, it becomes easier to understand which variable effect corresponds to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

(Lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether an icon change scenario is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, it is assumed that an icon change effect is to be executed and the process moves to step E550-2; if the icon change scenario is not stored, the change scenario is stored from the sub-RAM 130c. It is assumed that a command abnormality has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the pre-read information storage area due to the power supply being cleared or the command at the time of winning a prize (special drawing reservation number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) being unable to be received normally. The process moves to step E550-6.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether it is time for the icon to change. If it is the icon change timing, the process moves to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is ended.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp effect command is sent to the lamp control unit 150, and a lamp change effect is executed by changing the lighting mode (emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning slot lamp NR in accordance with the color change of the icon. It turns out.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a lamp changing flag indicating that a lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp change performance execution process ends; if the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set, and the current lamp change performance is executed. End the execution process.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process moves to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current lamp changing effect execution process is ended.

In step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, and in step E550-8, sets a lamp effect end command in the transmission buffer, and executes the current lamp change effect execution process. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control section 150, and the lamp change effect that was being executed is ended.

In this way, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 32, the lamp change is performed by changing the light emitting mode (light emitting color, lighting/flashing) of the winning opening lamp NR in response to the change of the icon in the icon change effect. It is designed to perform a performance. Therefore, the presentation effect can be enhanced by the synergistic effect with the icon change presentation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 32, unlike the icon change effect or the continuous notice effect, even if the power is restored while the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect is executed again. The system is designed to prevent users from playing the game or performing alternative preview effects. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the lamp change performance while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that when power is restored, such as in the icon change performance, the lamp change performance may be executed again in the variable performance that is started after the power is restored. In this case, it is preferable to perform the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that is started after the power is restored.

In addition, instead of executing the lamp change effect in response to the icon change effect, the final lighting mode of the prize opening lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the preliminary change to the relevant change, etc. are determined by lottery and the lamp change effect is executed. You can do it like this.

(Fluctuating performance pattern determination processing of the performance control unit)
The variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 33.

First, in step E610-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E610-2, determines whether each command can be received. If each command has been received, the process moves to step E610-3; if each command has not been received, the process moves to step E610-9.

In step E610-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether each command is damaged. If each command is not damaged, the process moves to step E610-4, and if each command is damaged, the process moves to step E610-9.

In step E610-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the types of special symbols of each command match. For example, in the start commands (first special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), one corresponds to the first special symbol, and the other corresponds to the second special symbol. If there is a mixture of special symbols, it is determined that the types of special symbols of each command do not match. If the types of special symbols of each command match, the process moves to step E610-5, and if the types of special symbols of each command do not match, the process moves to step E610-9.

In step E610-5, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the success or failure of each command matches. For example, in the start commands (the first special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, the special symbol designation command, and the special symbol variation pattern designation command), the special symbol designation command corresponds to a jackpot, but the special symbol designation command corresponds to a jackpot, If the variation pattern designation command corresponds to a loss, it is determined that the wins and losses of each command do not match. If the success or failure of each command matches, the process moves to step E610-6, and if the success or failure of each command does not match, the process moves to step E610-9.

In step E610-6, the sub CPU 130a selects a variable performance pattern determination table (FIGS. 34 and 35) according to the current performance mode. The details of the variable effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E610-7, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from among the plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E610-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, a variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a process of discarding the special symbol designation command and the special symbol variation pattern designation command in step E610-9. In other words, if each command is not received normally, if each command is damaged, if the type of special symbol of each command does not match, or if the winning or losing of each command does not match, the fluctuating production pattern is not determined, and since the variable effect pattern instruction command is not set, the variable effect will not be executed on the effect control board 130 side.

(Fluctuating performance pattern judgment table)
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C that is referred to in order to determine a variable performance pattern in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. It is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states) that is referred to in order to determine a variable performance pattern in D to G.

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the variable effect pattern determination table associates the special figure variable pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variable effect pattern, and the selected variable effect pattern. The performance configuration for each variable performance pattern is described as follows.

"Variation" in the performance configuration column indicates that a normal fluctuation display in which no ready-to-win state is formed by the performance symbol 70a is executed.
"Short variation" indicates that a shortened variation display in which a reach state is not formed is executed for a shorter time than a normal variation display.
"L fluctuation" indicates that a long fluctuation display in which a reach state is not formed for a longer time than a normal fluctuation display is executed.

"Pseudo-failure" refers to a pseudo-successful performance after the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the fluctuating display of one special symbol, and then a pseudo-sequential performance is performed to determine whether or not a pseudo-sequential performance will be executed. This indicates that a pseudo consecutive failure effect is executed, which results in the failure of the sequence.
"Pseudo-success" indicates that, after performing a performance that incites whether or not the pseudo-successful performance will be executed, a pseudo-successful performance that results in the pseudo-successful performance is performed.
"(Fluctuation → Pseudo Success) x 2" means a performance in which a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance is performed after an inciting performance that incites whether or not the pseudo consecutive performance will be executed. This shows that two sets of effects will be performed, with 1 set being 1 set.
"(Fluctuation → pseudo-success) x 3" is a performance in which a pseudo-successful performance that results in a pseudo-successful performance is performed after an inciting performance that incites whether or not the pseudo-successful performance will be executed. This shows that three sets of performances will be performed, with 1 set being 1 set.

"N reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed.
"N '7'reach" indicates that the normal reach effect described above is executed in a state where the reach state is formed by the effect pattern 70a of "7".
"SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SP reach effect is executed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned special SP reach effect is executed.
"SPSP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach effect is executed.
"Full rotation reach" indicates that the above-mentioned full rotation reach effect is executed.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that a full rotation reach is executed is executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in performances with different jackpot expectation levels will be executed in accordance with the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Decision" indicates that a determination performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot game will be executed is executed in accordance with the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Failure" indicates that as a result of the deciding performance, a deciding failure performance indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed is executed.
"Success" indicates that as a result of the winning performance, a successful winning performance that suggests that a jackpot game will be executed is executed.

"Loss" indicates that a temporary stop is made by forming a losing number (a losing display mode such as "358" or "948", which is different from the initial number) by the production pattern 70a consisting only of numbers and no characters. ing.
"c pattern loss" refers to the formation of a loss result (a loss display form such as ``358'' or ``948'', which is different from the initial appearance) by the performance pattern 70a of the display form including the character, and a temporary stop. It shows.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is displayed on the image display device.
"Symbol alignment" indicates that a jackpot is formed (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a that does not include characters and includes only numbers, and the game is temporarily stopped.
"C symbols aligned" indicates that a jackpot is formed (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") by the production symbol 70a in a display mode including characters, and the game is temporarily stopped.

"Re-lottery" refers to whether or not the performance symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped at a jackpot (jackpot display mode) will become a jackpot that is advantageous for the player (from an even-numbered performance symbol that normally results in a jackpot, it will become a probability-variable jackpot). (Whether it will be an odd-numbered production symbol or not, or whether it will be a "7" production symbol where the most advantageous jackpot game will be executed), a promotion success production will be performed that will result in an advantageous jackpot. , indicates that a re-lottery performance is executed, such as a promotion failure performance that does not result in an advantageous jackpot.

"Strong vibration 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmed vibration performance) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 4 seconds.
"Strong vibration for 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second.

In the variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) shown in FIG. In this case, the ratio of the ready-to-win performance is performed with the even-numbered performance symbols 70a is 70%, and the ratio of the ready-to-reach performance with the odd-numbered performance symbols 70a other than "7" is 30%.
In the case of special symbol 00 (loss) and variable performance patterns 07 to 11 (SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 65%, and odd numbers other than "7" The rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 30%, and the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed by the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 5%.

In the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and variable performance patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%. .
In the case of special symbol 02 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 18 to 19 (SP reach production), the ratio of reach production with even number production symbols 70a is 60%, and odd number production patterns other than "7" The rate at which reach effects are performed in 70a is 40%.

In the case of special symbol 02 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance patterns 20 to 22 (SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 6%, and with odd numbered performance symbols other than "7" The rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with 70a is 4%, and the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 90%.
In the case of special symbol 03 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance patterns 12 to 17 (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 60%, and “7 ” The proportion of reach effects performed with odd-numbered effect symbols 70a is 40%.

In the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and in the case of special symbol 03 (probable variable jackpot), reach production is performed with even numbered production symbols 70a, and the main stop is made with the combination of even numbered production symbols 70a (for example, 444). In both cases, a variable mission presentation (a bonus acquisition presentation), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 78, is executed.

In other words, in any case, the main stop will be made at the combination of even numbered performance symbols 70a (for example, 444) and the game will proceed to the jackpot game, so from the stop mode of the production symbols 70a, the special symbol 01 (normal jackpot), the special symbol It is difficult to know which of the 03 (probable and variable jackpots) the jackpot is.

In addition, in either case, a jackpot game is played six times in the round game, so it is possible to determine whether the jackpot is special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) or special symbol 03 (probable jackpot) from the number of round games. That is difficult.

Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game, by executing the variable mission performance shown in FIG. We are trying to inform you which jackpot (probable and variable jackpot) it is.

In addition, in the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot), the result of executing the variable probability mission performance is "failure", and in the case of special symbol 03 (probable variable jackpot), the result of executing the variable probability mission production is "success".
Thereby, it is possible to improve the game interest during execution of the jackpot game.

Note that FIG. 78 shows, as an example, a variable mission performance in a jackpot game where the round game is 10 times, but in the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and special symbol 03 (probable variable jackpot), It is sufficient to execute FIG. 78(f) in the fourth round game, FIG. 78(g) in the fifth round game, and FIG. 78(g) in the sixth round game.

In the case of special symbol 10 (loss) and variable performance patterns 26 to 27 (special SP ready-to-win performance), the rate at which the ready-to-win performance is performed with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%.
In the case of special symbols 04 (normal jackpot) & 05 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance pattern 27 (special SP ready-to-win performance), the ratio of ready-to-win performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%.

In the variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states) shown in FIG. The rate at which reach effects are performed is 100%.
In the case of special symbols 01 (normal jackpot), 02 (probable variable jackpot), 03 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production pattern 33 (special SP reach production), the ratio of reach production performed with even numbered production symbols 70a is 100%. It becomes.

In the case of special symbol 10 (loss) and variable performance pattern 36 (normal reach performance), 38 to 42 (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 60%, The rate at which the reach effect is performed with odd numbered effect symbols 70a other than "7" is 40%.
In the case of special symbol 04 (normal jackpot) and variable performance patterns 43 to 48 (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the rate at which reach performance is performed with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 100%. .

In the case of special symbol 05 (probable variable jackpot) and variable performance patterns 49 to 50 (SP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 60%, and with odd numbered performance symbols other than "7" The rate at which reach effects are performed in 70a is 40%.
In the case of special symbol 05 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 51 to 53 (SPSP reach production), the ratio of reach production with even number production symbols 70a is 3%, and odd number production patterns other than "7" The rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with 70a is 2%, and the rate at which the ready-to-reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a of "7" is 95%.
In the case of special symbol 05 (probable variable jackpot) and variable production patterns 54 to 55 (full rotation reach production), the ratio of reach production with even number production symbols 70a is 20%, and odd number production other than "7" The rate at which a ready-to-reach effect is performed with the symbol 70a is 30%, and the rate at which a reach-to-reach effect is performed by the effect symbol 70a of "7" is 50%.

In the case of special symbol 06 (probable jackpot) and variable performance patterns 43 to 48 (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance), the ratio of reach performance with even numbered performance symbols 70a is 60%, and “7 ” The proportion of reach effects performed with odd-numbered effect symbols 70a is 40%.
In addition, in the case of special symbol 04 (normal jackpot), in the case of special symbol 06 (probable variable jackpot), in the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot) and special symbol 03 (probable variable jackpot), the jackpot game A variable mission performance will be executed while the game is running.

In addition, in the case of special symbol 01 (normal jackpot), in the case of special symbol 03 (probable variable jackpot), in the case of special symbol 04 (normal jackpot), and in the case of special symbol 06 (probable variable jackpot), the Although the probability-variable mission performance is executed, the performance executed during the jackpot game with these special symbols is not limited to the probability-variable mission performance, but may be another production.

For example, special symbol 01 (a round game of "6" times) and special symbol 04 (a round game of "6" times), whereas special symbol 03 (a round game of "10" times), special symbol 06 (“10” round game), a “MAX round acquisition mission performance” (privilege acquisition performance) may be executed during the jackpot game.
Specifically, in the scene corresponding to FIG. 78(b), a display such as "Maximum round by defeating the enemy" is displayed, and in the case of special symbol 03 and special symbol 06, FIG. 78(d) and FIG. 78(e) are displayed. ), it is assumed that an effect indicating "success" is performed, and in the case of special symbols 01 and 03, an effect indicating "failure" is performed.

The first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the eye catch effect that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is After execution, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel strange due to the change in the display mode of the performance symbols 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the performance symbols 70a will be stopped and displayed, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The second feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that in the case of a jackpot, there are variable performance patterns in which the symbols are aligned after the winning success effect is executed, and variable performance patterns in which the symbols are aligned and the symbols are aligned and the pattern is successful. One point is that there is a variable performance pattern in which the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the case of a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that in the variable effect pattern that results in a jackpot, when the effect patterns 70a that do not include characters are aligned, the effect button 17 is pressed for 4 seconds. One point is that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is performed in which the machine vibrates strongly. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second when the effect patterns 70a including characters are aligned (c patterns aligned). One point is that a performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that the reach performance (normal reach The point is that the proportion of reach effects performed with even-numbered effect symbols 70a (the effect symbols that usually result in a jackpot when a jackpot roll is made) is higher than the proportion of effects that are performed (performance, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when a jackpot is achieved with an odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that the rate at which reach effects are performed with even-numbered effect symbols 70a (effect symbols that normally result in a jackpot when the result is a jackpot) is The point is that the percentage of reach effects (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) being performed is lower with the production pattern 70a of "7" (the production pattern that is the most advantageous probability variable jackpot by getting a jackpot). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when the player hits a jackpot with the performance symbol 70a of "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that the reach performance (normal reach Direction, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) One point to note is that the ratio of "reach performance" and "SPSP reach performance" is lower. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when the player hits a jackpot with the performance symbol 70a of "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As the eighth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, when the ready-to-win performance is executed with an even-numbered performance symbol 70a or an odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7", "7" When the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect pattern 70a, the expectation of a jackpot is higher. Therefore, it is possible for the player to increase his or her expectations as to which type of performance symbol will be used to perform the ready-to-win performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are the most advantageous than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). In the case of a probability variable jackpot, a reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is likely to be executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7" (the performance symbol which becomes the most advantageous probability variable jackpot when the jackpot roll is made). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effects in performance modes D to G (specific game states), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is that in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), even if the reach effect is executed with the effect symbol 70a of "7", the jackpot is guaranteed. However, in performance modes D to G (specific game states), if the ready-to-win performance is executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7", a jackpot is guaranteed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effects in performance modes D to G (specific game states), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance is always performed, but a variable performance pattern may be provided in which the ready-to-win performance is not performed even if the pseudo-continuous performance is performed.

In addition, if you stop temporarily due to a loss after a cut-in performance or a failed decision performance, it is guaranteed to be a loss, but a resurrection performance that is guaranteed to be a jackpot after a cut-in performance or a failed decision performance. may also be executed.

(Jackpot preview production decision process by production control department)
The jackpot preview performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a jackpot preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process includes a variable performance pattern determination process (a variable performance pattern (determining process).

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern to be executed in the current variable performance, and in step E650-2, determines that the jackpot game will be executed in the performance period (high-speed fluctuation period) before reach. A ready-to-reach pre-notice determination table (FIG. 37) for determining a notice pattern for a ready-to-reach pre-notice performance that the player expects is selected, and a notice pattern is determined. Note that the details of the pre-reach notice determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the ready-to-reach preview performance is one for executing a dialogue preview performance. If the dialogue preview performance is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-4, and if the dialogue preview performance is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-6.

"Speech preview performance" means that a valid period occurs during a variable performance (high-speed fluctuation period), and according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid time, the image display device indicates the expectation of a jackpot. This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which a dialogue image is displayed and a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue preview pattern determination table (see FIG. 38) for determining a dialogue preview pattern for the dialogue preview performance, and determines a dialogue preview pattern. Set a dialogue preview production command according to the preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a line preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a line preview performance according to the line preview pattern is executed during the fluctuating performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Note that details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the ready-to-reach preview performance is one for executing a step-up preview performance. If the step-up preview effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-7, and if the step-up preview effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-9.

"Step-up notice performance" means multiple steps from the 1st step (first stage) to the 5th step (final stage) without causing the effective period of the performance button 17 during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which step performances are executed in a predetermined order until reaching one of the steps.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 39) for determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice performance, determines the step-up notice pattern, and executes the step-up notice pattern in step E650-7. At step 8, a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a step-up notice performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a step-up notice performance according to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Note that details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-10, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that does not perform a pseudo continuous effect, the process moves to step E650-12.

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 40) for determining the pseudo continuous effect pattern of the pseudo continuous effect, and determines the pseudo continuous effect pattern, and in step E650-11. At , a pseudo continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a pseudo continuous performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pseudo continuous performance according to the pseudo continuous performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation performance pattern is a variation performance pattern that executes a development performance (SP development performance, SPSP development performance, full rotation development performance). If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a developed effect, the process moves to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a developed effect, the process moves to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub CPU 130a selects the development performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 41) for determining the development performance pattern of the development performance and determines the development performance pattern, and in step E650-14, the development performance pattern is determined. Set the advanced production command according to the pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the development effect according to the development effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Note that details of the advanced performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern for executing a reach performance (post-reach performance). If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a ready-to-win performance, the process moves to step E650-16, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that executes a ready-to-win performance, the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E650-16, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-17, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-19.

In step E650-17, the sub CPU 130a selects the cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 42) for determining the cut-in effect pattern of the cut-in effect, and determines the cut-in effect pattern, and in step E650-18. At , a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a cut-in effect command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a cut-in effect according to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Note that details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern for executing a fixed performance. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process moves to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process moves to step E650-22.

In step E650-20, the sub CPU 130a selects the deciding performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 43) for determining the deciding performance pattern of the deciding performance, and determines the deciding performance pattern. Set the determined production command according to the pattern in the sending buffer. As a result, a fixed performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a fixed performance according to the fixed performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. Note that details of the fixed performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a re-lottery effect, the process moves to step E650-23, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a re-lottery effect, the process moves to step E650-25.

In step E650-23, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 44) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern of the re-lottery effect, and determines the re-lottery effect pattern, and in step E650-24 At , a re-lottery performance command corresponding to the re-lottery performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a re-lottery performance command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a re-lottery performance according to the re-lottery performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the re-lottery performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-25, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that allows execution of a confirmed performance (results in a jackpot). If the variable performance pattern is such that a confirmed performance can be executed, the process moves to step E650-26, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that allows a confirmed performance to be executed, the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E650-26, the sub CPU 130a selects the final performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 45) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance and determines the final performance pattern, and in step E650-27, the final performance pattern is determined. A confirmed performance command corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer, and the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended. As a result, a confirmed performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a confirmed performance according to the confirmed performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the confirmed performance pattern determination table will be described later.

Incidentally, the jackpot preview performance is not limited to the one listed in FIG. 36. For example, a jackpot preview performance (background preview performance) using a background image (for example, Mode A background) may be provided. Specifically, when a special character image is displayed in the background image, the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed may be higher than when a special character image is not displayed.

Furthermore, when a special background image (for example, a secret base background image) is displayed, the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed may be made higher than when it is not displayed.
In addition, when switching from the first background image to the second background image (background change), if a special switching image different from the normal switching image is displayed, it is expected that a jackpot game will be executed compared to when it is not displayed. The degree may be increased.

In addition, in these background preview performances, the expectation that the jackpot game will be executed may be high, or it may be that the execution of the jackpot game is confirmed, or that the execution of the jackpot game is not confirmed but the expectation level is high. You can also use it as

(Pre-reach notice determination table)
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a ready-to-reach pre-notice determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for a ready-to-reach pre-notice performance.

As shown in FIG. 37, the pre-reach notice determination table associates the production mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable production pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the selected notice pattern.

There are three pre-reach preview patterns: ``No notice'' in which the pre-reach preview is not executed, ``Speech preview'' in which the dialogue preview is executed, and ``Step-up notice'' in which the step-up notice is executed. The types are set, and the expectation level for the jackpot game to be executed (the rate at which the vibrating effects associated with the alignment of the symbols described above are executed) is as follows: no advance notice < dialogue advance notice performance < step-up advance notice performance.

The first feature of the pre-reach preview determination table shown in FIG. 37 is that the pre-reach preview performance is more likely to be executed when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot than when the jackpot determination result is a loss, and the expectation level of the jackpot is lower. The point is that the pre-reach preview performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of jackpot is determined than when a variable performance pattern is determined. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pre-reach advance notice determination table shown in FIG. The pre-announcement performance (both the line preview performance that allows the vibration performance to be executed with the validity period of the performance button 17 and the step-up preview performance that allows the vibration performance to be executed without the validity period of the performance button 17) is executed. The problem is that it is difficult (the execution rate is low). Therefore, in performance modes D to G (specific game states) in which the variable time tends to be short, wasteful pre-reach preview performances are less likely to be executed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the reach pre-notice determination table shown in FIG. However, when the variable performance pattern is a pattern for performing a normal reach performance and a pattern for performing a SP ready-to-reach performance, it is difficult to execute the ready-to-reach advance notice performance (the execution rate is low). Therefore, in performance modes D to G (specific game states) in which the variable time tends to be short, wasteful pre-reach preview performances are less likely to be executed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIG. When it is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot (the rate at which the vibrating effects associated with the alignment of the symbols described above are executed, the rate at which the vibrating effects are executed in the deciding effects described below, etc.) is higher. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when the step-up notice performance is executed, the jackpot expectation level (the rate at which the vibration performance associated with the alignment of symbols mentioned above is performed, and the success performance described later) is higher when the dialogue preview performance is executed. (e.g., the rate at which accompanying vibration effects are performed) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Serif notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a dialogue preview pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a preview pattern for a dialogue preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 38, the dialogue announcement pattern determination table is associated with the production mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each dialogue announcement pattern, and selected dialogue announcement pattern. For reference, the production structure (effective suggestive production, validity period, content of production) of each line preview pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the dialogue preview performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that encourages the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 is displayed at a specific position, and The effect is to display a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" in the button state column indicates a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the dialogue production mode column indicates that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black letters, and that the normal dialogue is output as audio. It shows.
"Chance speech (black)" indicates that a chance speech that has a possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in black letters, and that the chance speech is outputted as voice.
"Reach line (black)" indicates that the reach line that confirms the execution of the reach effect is displayed in black letters, and that the reach line is output as audio.
"Reach line (red)" indicates that the reach line that confirms the execution of the reach effect is displayed in red letters, and that the reach line is output as audio.

"Heat dialogue (red)" indicates that a heat dialogue that has a high possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in red letters, and that the heat dialogue is outputted as a voice.
The term "hot line (gold)" indicates that a line with a very high probability of winning a jackpot game is displayed in golden letters, and at the same time, the line is outputted as a voice.
The "confirmed line (rainbow)" indicates that the confirmed line that confirms the execution of the jackpot game is displayed in rainbow-colored characters, and that the confirmed line is outputted as voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 starts from the time the lines start to be displayed (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly for seconds is to be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is strong for 1 second from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the production button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). This indicates that a strong vibrating effect will be executed.

The expected jackpot for each dialogue production mode is: "Normal dialogue" < "Chance dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (red)" < "Heat dialogue (red)" < "Extreme heat" ``Serif (gold)'' < ``Confirmed line (rainbow)''. In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

The first feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38 is that when a line with high expectation of jackpot (hot line or higher) is displayed, a vibration effect can be executed in which the effect button 17 is vibrated. There are several points. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38 is that the line preview performance of the hot line, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the hot line, is executed, compared to the case where the line preview performance of the hot line is executed. In this case, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the dialogue preview effect of the heat dialogue is executed. One point is that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when it is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the dialogue preview effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 38 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a dialogue with a high probability of winning a jackpot (hot dialogue or higher) is displayed has a relatively short duration. Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are several types of points. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects performed during the dialogue preview production, but it is also possible to use only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects, or the vibration effects may be stronger than the vibration duration of the weak vibration effects. The vibration time may be increased.

Furthermore, the expected level of jackpot when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the dialogue preview effect is the same in effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect mode D to G (specific game state). However, the expectation level of jackpot may be higher in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), or the expectation level of jackpot may be higher in production modes D to G (specific gaming state). You can also do this. In this way, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is also possible to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the player, and improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the effective period ends and the dialogue preview performance is executed by operating the performance button 17 or by elapse of the effective time, but if the effective period ends due to the elapse of the effective time, the dialogue preview performance is executed. You may choose not to execute it.

In addition, although the dialogue preview performance is executed with a valid period, it is also possible to execute the dialogue preview performance without generating a valid period. It is also possible to perform only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or only a strong vibration effect for 1 second.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for the step-up notice performance.

As shown in FIG. 39, the step-up notice pattern determination table associates the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and selected step-up notice pattern. For reference, the performance structure of each step-up notice pattern (step-up (SU) performance mode, button vibration) is described.

"1→2" in the step-up effect mode column indicates that the first to second step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the first to third step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the first to fourth step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the first to fifth step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the first to third step effects are executed in order, the fourth step effect is skipped and the fifth step effect is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the last step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the last step performance is 3 seconds.

"Weak vibration (1 second) at '5'" in the button vibration column means a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the start of the 5th step effect. indicates that it will be executed.

The jackpot expectation for each step-up production mode is "1 → 2" < "1 → 2 → 3" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 4" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 5".

The first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it is possible to perform a vibration effect that vibrates 17. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 is that the vibration effect that is executed when the step effect with high expectation of jackpot (fifth step effect) is displayed is for a relatively short time. There are several points that can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39 is the vibration mode (vibration intensity, vibration One point is that there is only one predetermined type of time (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up preview performance in which the player does not operate the performance button 17 and it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration performance, it is possible to suppress the performance form from becoming complicated, and improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

The fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , Step-up preview performances with low expectations are difficult to execute (execution rate is low). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the weak vibration effects are easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the expectation of a jackpot is high when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 without a valid period (display of an operation promotion image) is executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, performance modes A to C (normal game state) are better than performance modes D to G (specific game state) when the performance button 17 does not have a valid period (display of an operation promotion image) in the step-up notice performance. The expectation level of a jackpot may be increased when the vibration effect is executed. Even in this case, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G that are advantageous to the players, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

(pseudo continuous performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a performance pattern for a pseudo-continuous performance.

As shown in FIG. 40, the pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, jackpot determination result, variable effect pattern type, selection rate (%) of each pseudo continuous effect pattern, and selected pseudo continuous effect pattern. The performance structure (effective suggestive performance, effective period, performance content) of each pseudo-continuous performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the pseudo continuous performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that encourages the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 is displayed at a specific position, and The effect is to display a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Protruding button white" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits white light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protruding" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"Pseudo-failure" in the pseudo-sequence production mode column means that the normal production pattern 70a temporarily stops without the pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of a pseudo-sequence as the central production pattern 70a, and the failure sound effect is emitted. This indicates that the outputted pseudo consecutive failure performance will be executed.
"Pseudo success" means that the pseudo symbol 70a in the center that suggests the execution of a pseudo series temporarily stops, a success sound effect is output, the second movable member 74 moves weakly, and the pseudo series is executed. This indicates that a pseudo consecutive success performance will be executed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 starts when the pseudo pattern temporarily stops (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly for one second will be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed.

The jackpot expectation level of each promotional performance is "normal button white" < "protruding button white". Moreover, the jackpot expectation level of each button state is "normal" < "prominent". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

The first feature of the pseudo consecutive effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a vibration effect that causes the button 17 to vibrate may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are several points that can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pseudo consecutive effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on the situation. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 40 is that the same performance device (performance button vibration Although it is possible to execute a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the motor, second movable member 74, etc., it is possible to execute a pseudo continuous performance using the performance modes D to G (specific gaming state) rather than performance modes A to C (normal gaming state). ) has a higher expectation of a jackpot when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the pseudo-sequence performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are cases in which a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) is executed using a button vibration motor that vibrates. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the performance button 17 may be in a protruding state during the valid period when a pseudo consecutive success performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot, but it may not be in a protruding state.

Further, although there are a weak vibration performance and a strong vibration performance as the vibration performance executed in the pseudo consecutive success performance, only the weak vibration performance or only the strong vibration performance may be used.

In addition, although a valid period is generated to execute a pseudo consecutive success effect or a pseudo consecutive failure effect, it is also possible to execute a pseudo continuous success effect or a pseudo continuous failure effect without generating a valid period. The vibration performance that is often performed during the pseudo consecutive success performance may be only a 3-second weak vibration performance or only a 3-second strong vibration performance, or only a 1-second weak vibration performance or only a 1-second strong vibration performance. You can also do this.

Furthermore, performance modes A to C (normal game state) are better than performance modes D to G (specific game state) because they are simulated using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). The expectation level of a jackpot when a consecutive performance (pseudo successive success performance) is executed may be set higher, and performance modes B or C may be higher than performance mode A using the same performance device (performance button vibration). The expectation level of a jackpot when a pseudo successive performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using a motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed may be set higher, and performance mode D ~ may be set higher than performance mode G. Even if F is made to have a higher jackpot expectation when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. good.

Further, in the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance), the motion performance using the second movable member 74 is performed, but the motion performance using the first movable member 73 may be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the execution rate of the motion performance using the second movable member 74 is higher than that of the motion performance using the first movable member 73.

(Development performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an advanced performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a performance pattern for advanced performance.

As shown in FIG. 41, the advanced performance pattern determination table includes the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, advanced performance type to be determined for the advanced performance pattern, selection rate (%) of each advanced performance pattern, The selected advanced performance patterns are associated with each other, and the performance configuration (effective suggestive performance, valid period, and performance content) of each advanced performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
``None'' in the effective suggestion effect column indicates that the effective suggestion effect is not executed, and ``Yes (gase)'' indicates that the effective suggestion effect is executed but the validity period does not occur after that. This indicates that this is an effective suggestion effect, and "present" indicates that the effective suggestion effect will be executed and then a valid period will occur.

"Valid period (long press for 4 seconds)" indicates that the developing performance progresses gradually by pressing and holding the performance button 17, and that the valid period of the developing performance ends when 4 seconds have elapsed.
The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period; specifically, as a result of multiple translucent effect button images gathering at a specific position, an opaque effect button image is displayed at the specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Normal button red" means that, as the opaque effect button image described above, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding in its normal state and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 also emits red light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protruding" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"SP notification" in the column of development performance mode means that as a result of the development performance, an SP development design that suggests development to SP reach performance is derived and displayed, and an SP development performance that outputs the first development sound effect is executed. Which indicates that.
"SPSP notification" indicates that as a result of the development performance, an SPSP development design is derived and displayed that suggests development to the SPSP reach performance, and a SPSP development performance is executed that outputs a second development sound effect. .
"Full rotation notification" refers to the execution of a full rotation development effect that derives and displays a full rotation development symbol that suggests development to a full rotation reach effect as a result of the development effect, and outputs a third development sound effect. It shows.

The "weak motion" in the accessory motion column is a weak motion effect in which the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak motion with a small motion range when displaying various symbols (= at the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.
"Strong motion" means that a strong motion effect is executed in which the second movable member 74 emits red light and performs a strong motion with a large swing width when various symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). It shows.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is weak for 1 second from the time when various advanced symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). This indicates that a weak vibration effect will be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" is a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the time when various symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.

The jackpot expectation level of each action performance is "weak action" < "strong action". In addition, the jackpot expectation level of each vibration performance is "weak vibration" < "strong vibration".

The first feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a vibration effect may be executed in which the effect period of the button 17 is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the development performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and when the SPSP development effect is executed, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed. One point is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect is executed. Therefore, when the SPSP development effect is executed, the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed can be increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the points is that the vibration performance is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the advanced effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 is the vibration of the vibration effect that is executed when an advanced effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed in a variable effect pattern with a high expectation of jackpot. There are two types of strength depending on the degree of jackpot expectation. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 41 is that the same performance device (performance button vibration motor , second movable member 74, etc.), but the performance modes D to G (specific game state) are more effective than the performance modes A to C (normal game state). On the other hand, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when an advanced performance is executed using a performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects executed in the advanced effect, only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects may be used.

In addition, production modes A to C (normal gaming state) are more advanced than production modes D to G (specific gaming states) using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). The expectation level of a jackpot when a performance (SPSP advanced performance, etc.) is executed may be set higher, and performance mode B or C may be set higher than performance mode A using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, etc.). , the second movable member 74, etc.), the expectation level of a jackpot may be higher when an advanced effect is executed using the second movable member 74, etc. The expectation level of a jackpot may be increased when an advanced presentation is performed using the device (the presentation button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.).

(Cut-in production pattern determination table)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 42, the cut-in effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, jackpot determination result, variable effect pattern type, selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and selected cut-in effect pattern. The production structure (effective suggestive production, effective period, content of production) of each cut-in production pattern is listed for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the cut-in performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or when 4 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestion performance without performing the effective suggestion performance, An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 also emits a rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" indicates a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protruding" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"Blue cut-in" in the cut-in effect mode column means that a blue cut-in effect is executed in which a blue frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a first cut-in sound effect is output. It shows that it will be done.
“Green cut-in” indicates that a green cut-in effect is executed in which a green frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a second cut-in sound effect is output. .
“Red cut-in” indicates that a red cut-in effect is executed in which a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a third cut-in sound effect is output. .

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 starts displaying the cut-in image (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the validity period ends) This indicates that a weak vibration performance in which weak vibrations are produced for 3 seconds is to be executed.
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates for 3 seconds from the start of displaying the cut-in image (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a strong vibration effect in which the camera vibrates strongly will be executed.

The expected jackpot for each cut-in is "Blue Cut-in" < "Green Cut-in" < "Red Cut-in". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

The first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 42 is that when a cut-in image with high expectation of jackpot is displayed (cut-in effect is executed), the validity period of the effect button 17 is generated. One point is that a vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are some points that have been made. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on the degree. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects executed in the cut-in effect, only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects may be used.

Also, although the cut-in effect is executed with a valid period, it is also possible to execute the cut-in effect without generating a valid period. It may be possible to have only a weak vibration performance for 3 seconds or only a strong vibration performance for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration performance for 1 second or only a strong vibration performance for 1 second.

(Decision production pattern determination table)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a fixed effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the fixed effect.

As shown in FIG. 43, the fixed effect pattern determination table associates the effect mode, jackpot determination result, variable effect pattern type, selection rate (%) of each fixed effect pattern, and selected effect pattern. For reference, the production structure (effective suggestion production, validity period, production content) of each fixed production pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which button images are moved and displayed at 70, and button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the final performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or when 5 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestion performance without performing the effective suggestion performance, An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 also emits a rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" indicates a normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Protruding" indicates that the production button 17 is in a protruding state.

"Failure" in the column of winning presentation mode refers to a failed presentation indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed because the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color. indicates that it will be executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and emits rainbow-colored light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. This indicates that a successful performance will be executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column is determined by the button vibration motor to vibrate the performance button 17 and is determined by the start of a successful performance (= when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period ends. This shows that a strong vibration performance (decision success vibration performance) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds from the time of 10 minutes, and then the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the button light emission column is determined by the effect button LED for causing the effect button 17 to emit light and starts from the start of a successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This shows that rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 17).

The jackpot expectation of each promotional performance is ``normal button white'' < ``protruding button red'' < ``protruding button rainbow.'' Moreover, the jackpot expectation level of each button state is "normal" < "prominent".

The first feature of the final effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that when a successful successful effect is executed, a vibration effect that generates a valid period and vibrates the effect button 17 is executed. . Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the valid period of the performance button 17 that occurs during the variable performance is the longest period. Therefore, inconveniences such as the player missing the operation of the performance button 17 can be suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the performance button 17 vibrates for the longest period as a strong vibration performance that occurs during a variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of successful performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17. Therefore, even after the vibration of the performance button 17 ends, the player's feeling of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the decision performance (decision success performance), the motion performance using the first movable member 73 is performed, but the motion performance using the second movable member 74 may also be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the execution rate of the motion performance using the first movable member 73 is higher than that of the motion performance using the second movable member 74.

(Re-lottery performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 44, the re-lottery effect pattern determination table includes the effect mode, the presence or absence of promotion (promotion is planned), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery effect pattern, and the selected re-lottery effect pattern. They are associated with each other, and the performance structure (effective suggestion performance, validity period, performance content) of each re-lottery performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the re-lottery performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is a effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and specifically, displays an opaque effect button image at a specific position without executing the effective suggestion effect. At the same time, a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Normal button red" means that as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is not protruding in its normal state and emits red light is displayed, and the effect button 17 also emits red light. It is shown that.
"Normal button rainbow" means that as the opaque button image described above, a button image that imitates the button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting rainbow light is displayed, and the button image 17 also emits a rainbow light. It is shown that.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "normal" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. It shows.

"Promotion failure performance" in the re-lottery performance mode column refers to non-promoted symbols that do not result in a design that is advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery performance (for example, even number design → even number design, odd number design other than "7" → This indicates that odd number symbols other than "7" are derived and displayed (temporarily stopped) and a non-promoted sound effect is output.
"Successful promotion performance" means that promotion symbols that are advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery production (for example, even numbered symbols → odd numbered symbols, odd numbered symbols other than "7" → "7" symbols) are derived and displayed. (temporary stop) and a promotion sound effect is output.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time the promotion symbol is derived (= the end of the valid period). This indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed.

"Rainbow light emission (4 seconds)" in the button light emission column means that the production button LED for causing the production button 17 to emit light is activated for 4 seconds (when the production button 17 is activated) from the time when the promotion symbol is derived (= the end of the valid period). This shows that rainbow light is emitted over a period longer than the period of strong vibration.

The expected jackpot for each promotional performance is ``normal button white'' < ``normal button red'' < ``normal button rainbow.''

The first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 is that when a promotion success effect is executed, a vibration effect is executed that generates a valid period and vibrates the effect button 17. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the effect symbol has been promoted to an advantageous effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 44 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, even after the strong vibration effect ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that although the re-lottery effect (promotion failure effect, promotion success effect) is executed by generating a valid period, the re-lottery effect may be executed without generating a valid term.

(Fixed performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a confirmed performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the performance pattern of the confirmed performance.

As shown in FIG. 45, the confirmed performance pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each confirmed performance pattern, and confirmed performance pattern to be selected. The performance structure (execution timing, performance content) of each confirmed performance pattern is described.

"-" in the execution timing column indicates that the confirmed performance is not executed, and "○" indicates that the confirmed performance is executed.
The "confirmation sound" in the audio column indicates that a confirmation sound indicating that a jackpot game will be executed is output.
"Handle rainbow light emission" in the light emission column means that the handle LED for making the firing handle 15 emit light will emit rainbow colors from the time the final sound is output until the variation stops (for more than 4 seconds until the production pattern stops displaying). It shows that.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time the final sound is output. It shows.

The first feature of the confirmed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that when a confirmed effect is executed, a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 without generating a valid period is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the confirmed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 15 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, even after the strong vibration effect ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Summary of various tables shown in Figures 34 to 45)
Here, the first feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that a vibration effect (weak vibration for 1 second or strong vibration for 1 second) is executed in a dialogue preview effect with a validity period of the effect button 17. When the vibration performance (weak vibration 1 second) is executed as a step-up notice performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, the jackpot expectation level (vibration performance associated with pattern alignment (strong vibration 4) The high rate of performance (seconds) and the high rate of vibration performance (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) in the final performance, etc. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is more effective in a dialogue preview effect with a valid period of the effect button 17 than when the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed in a step-up preview effect without the effect period of the effect button 17. 2 seconds or strong vibration 1 second) is executed, the jackpot expectation level (rate of execution of the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the alignment of the symbols mentioned above, the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) with the deciding effect described later) 4 seconds → 5 seconds) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the vibration performance that is executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a first vibration performance with a relatively short vibration period (during the dialogue preview performance, step-up Vibration performance (1 second) during preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, etc.) and second vibration performance (during cut-in performance, decisive success performance) with a longer vibration period (performance period) than the first vibration performance There is a vibration performance (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second, such as during the time and confirmed performance, and after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), there is a second performance period (normal reach performance). ) and a variable performance with a third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance), the first vibration performance is more likely to be executed during the first performance period (higher execution rate) than during the second performance period. There are several points. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player without making him or her mistake that he or she will win the jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, regarding the look-ahead vibration performance, the first vibration performance has a relatively short vibration period, but even if the look-ahead vibration performance is included, the second performance will start after the first performance period (pre-reach performance). In a variable performance that has a period (normal reach performance) and a third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance), the first vibration performance is easier to be executed (performed) during the first performance period than during the second performance period. The ratio is high). Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player without making him or her mistake that he or she will win the jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

A third feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the second performance period (normal reach performance), and the third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance). In a fluctuating performance in which there is a vibration performance (direction), the first vibration performance (during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, etc.) is more likely to occur during the first performance period than during the third performance period. An example of this is that the performance (1 second) is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player without making him or her mistake that he or she will win the jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a first vibration performance with a short vibration period (during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance). , a vibration performance (1 second) during a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance with a longer vibration period than the first vibration performance (such as during a cut-in performance, a successful decision performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) There are vibration effects that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), there is a second effect period (normal reach effect) and a third effect period ( In a variable performance with SP/SPSP reach performance), the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) during the second performance period than during the first performance period. Therefore, the expectations of the players can be effectively raised, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the second performance period (normal reach performance), and the third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance). In a variable performance that has a second vibration performance (vibration performance that is longer than 1 second, such as during cut-in performance, successful decision performance, confirmed performance, etc.), the third performance period is longer than the first performance period. (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) is easy to execute (has a high execution rate). Therefore, the expectations of the players can be effectively raised, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that in the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the rate at which the first vibration performance (1 second) is executed with the performance button 17 in the normal state is This is higher than the rate of executing the first vibration performance with the performance button 17 in the protruding state. Therefore, the expectations of the players are not excessively aroused during the first performance period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A seventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that during the third performance period (during SP/SPSP reach performance), the performance button 17 is in the protruding state and the second vibration performance (for 3 seconds or more) is activated. The point is that the rate of execution is higher than the rate of execution of the second vibration performance with the performance button 17 in the normal state. Therefore, the expectations of the players are not excessively aroused during the first performance period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a first vibration performance with a short vibration period (during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) , vibration effects (1 second) during pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, etc.), and second vibration effects (during cut-in effects, successful performance, etc.) that have a longer vibration period (effect period) than the first vibration effects. There are vibration performances that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and a continuous performance (pseudo continuous performance) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). In a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed, the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed when the first vibration performance is executed than when the first vibration performance is not executed (the rate of execution is high) ) points can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding whether or not the first vibration effect will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a second vibration performance (performance period) that has a longer vibration period (performance period) than the first vibration performance. There are vibration effects that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) during cut-in effects, successful decision effects, confirmation effects, etc., and during production modes A to C (normal gaming state). In the fluctuating performance, the reach performance using the second type of performance symbols (even numbered symbols) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than the reach performance using the first type of production symbols (odd numbered symbols other than "7"). ), the reach effect is more difficult to execute with the third type of effect symbol (the “7” effect symbol) than the reach effect with the second type of effect symbol (the rate of execution is lower), The point is that the second vibration performance is easier to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when the ready-to-reach effect is executed using the third type of effect pattern than when the ready-to-reach effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of effect symbols used to execute the ready-to-reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A tenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that in the jackpot fluctuation performance in which the reach performance is executed, the vibration performance (display of the operation promotion image) without the validity period (display of the operation promotion image) during the pre-reach performance Vibration effects without a valid period (display of operation promotion images) during post-reach effects (development effect, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation effect) are more effective than the number of executions of pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmed effects). ) is likely to be executed more often. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation during the post-reach performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that a specific reach performance (SP reach performance) is more effective than a jackpot variable performance in which a predetermined reach performance (normal reach performance, full rotation reach performance) is executed. , SPSP reach effect) is executed more frequently than the jackpot fluctuation effect in which vibration effects without a validity period (development effect, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, fixed effect) are more likely to be executed during the post-reach effect. can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that in the loss variation performance in which the reach performance is executed, the vibration performance (development performance, pattern alignment, C The point is that the number of executions of vibration effects without a validity period (pre-read vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmed effect) during the pre-reach effect tends to be greater than the number of executions of patterns matching, confirmed effect). . Therefore, the expectation level of a jackpot can be suggested by the vibration performance without a validity period, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that when a pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) is executed in a variable performance, When a post-reach preview performance (cut-in performance) with high expectations for a jackpot is executed, the vibration performance of the production button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and a pre-reach preview performance When the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the vibrating effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the pre-reach preview effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the post-reach preview performance is better in performance modes D to G (specific game state) than in performance modes A to C (normal game state). In this case, the expectation level of a jackpot increases when a vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of an operation promotion image) is executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state) than in production modes D to G (specific gaming states), vibrations accompanying the validity period of the production button 17 (display of operation promotion image) in the post-reach preview production are more effective than in production modes D to G (specific gaming states). The expectation level of a jackpot when the performance is performed may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to vary the gameplay depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the players, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

A fifteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that during the first performance period (before reach) in the fluctuating performance, the vibration of the performance button 17 is lower than when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed. The jackpot expectation level is higher when the performance is executed, and in the jackpot fluctuating performance, regardless of whether the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed during the pre-reach performance, the after-reach performance (decision success performance) In the later period), the vibration performance of the performance button 17 (vibration performance when the symbols are aligned or the C symbols are aligned) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the fact that he/she has won a jackpot through the vibration effect, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 16th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is a vibration performance (during dialogue preview performance, pseudo One of the vibration performances such as continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) is executed in one of multiple types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different jackpot expectations, A vibration performance that does not involve the valid period of the performance button 17 (display of an operation promotion image) that is executed during a variable performance (one of the vibration performances during a step-up notice performance, when the symbols are aligned, when the C symbols are aligned, etc.) is executed in one predetermined vibration mode. Therefore, in the case where it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode because there is no validity period, it is possible to suppress the presentation mode of the vibration performance from becoming complicated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventeenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that during the pre-reach performance period in the jackpot fluctuating performance, the vibration performance (line preview performance) with the valid period of the performance button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) After that, ( Vibration performances (vibration performances for 3 seconds or more such as successful execution, when the symbols are aligned, when the C symbols are aligned, etc.) are executed at different rates during the post-reach performance period) and are not accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17. (Vibration performance during step-up notice performance) is easier to execute (execution rate is higher) during normal game states (performance modes A to C) than during specific game states (performance modes D to G). can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 18th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed, the types of jackpot effect symbols (even numbered symbols, "7") that match the symbols (including the C symbols) It is possible to change the execution mode of the vibration effect (execution or non-execution, execution timing, etc.) in the jackpot notice effect depending on odd number symbols other than "7" symbol, but depending on the execution of the winning effect or confirmed effect. When performing the vibration effect, the vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of jackpot effect symbols that match the symbols (including the C symbols). Therefore, while increasing the expectation of a jackpot through the vibration performance, it is possible to uniformly celebrate the jackpot, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 19th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that after a vibration performance (decision success performance, etc.) with a validity period (display of an operation promotion image) is executed in a jackpot fluctuation performance, the validity period ( It is possible to perform vibration effects (symbol alignment, C pattern alignment, etc.) that are not accompanied by operation promotion images (display of operation promotion images), and vibration effects (decision effects, etc.) that involve a valid period (display of operation promotion images) can be performed by operating the effect button 17. The point is that while the timing to start the vibration varies depending on the timing, the timing to start the vibration is predetermined for vibration performances (symbol alignment, C pattern alignment, etc.) that do not have a validity period (display of operation promotion images). It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to perform the vibration effect at an appropriate timing depending on whether or not the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) is involved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twentieth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the same movable member (second Although it is possible to perform specific performances (pseudo continuous performances, advanced performances, etc.) using the movable member 74), specific performances can be executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state). The difference is that the expected jackpot is different when executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 21st feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) and the performance modes D to G (specific gaming state) have multiple tables with different jackpot expectations. It is possible to perform stage performances (step-up preview performances, pseudo-continuation performances, etc.) that progress to any of the stages, but in production modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state). If the stage effects (step-up preview effects, pseudo continuous effects, etc.) are the same stage (if the step-up preview effects are any of the 3rd step effects, 4th step effects, or 5th step effects; if the pseudo continuous effects are the same, One point is that the expected level of jackpot is different if the game progresses to 1 or 2 times. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) and the performance modes D to G (specific gaming state) have multiple tables with different jackpot expectations. In addition to being able to execute any of the operation promotion effects, it is also possible to execute operation effects (any of the development effects, cut-in effects, and final effects) according to the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect modes A to C (normal The expected level of jackpot when the same operation promotion effect (for example, normal button white) is executed is different between production modes D to G (specific gaming states) and production modes A to C (normal gaming state). ) and performance modes D to G (specific game states), when the operation performance is executed, the effective suggestion performance is executed and the operation is promoted more than when the operation promotion performance is executed without the effective suggestion performance. One point to note is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the effective suggestion performance will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 45 is that the vibration performance with a relatively short vibration period (for example, 1 second) that is executed in conjunction with the jackpot preview performance is There are cases in which it is executed with a validity period and cases in which it is executed without a validity period, but vibration performances with a relatively long vibration period (more than 3 seconds) that are executed in conjunction with jackpot preview performances. is executed with a validity period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect for the operation of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the general control unit)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be explained using FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the central CPU 141a.

First, the supervising CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, the initial settings of the CPU such as the settings of built-in registers, permission to access the general RAM 141c, initialization (clearing to 0) of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, and CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating timer interrupts are performed. ), and in step T3, all interrupts are permitted.

The overall CPU 141a performs adjustment mode switching processing in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 70, Adjustment of the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the image display device 71), and adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and light intensity (whether the volume can be adjusted, whether the light amount can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any one from 0 to 5) ), the initial value of the light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the adjustment range of the light intensity value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)). Perform processing.

Note that setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value using the changeover switch 22 can be performed at any time as long as the gaming machine 1 is in a power-on state (after activation of the general control unit 141).

The supervising CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, the sound is output from the audio output device 9 based on a detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Performs processing to adjust the volume (value) of the performance sound.

The supervising CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, the display device (the first image display A process for adjusting the amount of light (value) of the backlight of the device 70 and the second image display device 71 is performed.

In addition, the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key 19 is regulated (limited) at the start of the variable effect and at the end of the variable effect (stopping of the effect pattern 70a). . In addition, during the period from power ON to the start of game progress control (specifically, during setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, initial operation of various drive sources of board unit 500, etc.) (until a timer interrupt is started on the main control board 110), important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power restoration, unauthorized prize winning) that should be notified with priority over tray full errors and payout abnormalities , abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) are also restricted (restricted) during notification (output of notification sound).

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various performance sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered than the previous volume, and when the abnormality notification sound output ends, the volume of various performance sounds is returned to the volume before the drop.

The overall CPU 141a performs eco-mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, processing is performed to control the start and end of an eco mode that reduces power consumption by reducing the amount of backlight of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71).

In step T8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the production instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m has been received. If the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process moves to step T11, and if the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process moves to step T9.

The supervising CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, a process is performed in which an animation pattern is determined from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command, and is set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c.

The supervising CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process is performed in which a sound pattern is determined from the type of sound group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command, and is set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether a frame switching flag is set in the supervising RAM 141c, indicating that it is frame update timing to update the display image of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). Determine whether or not. If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is a V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 seconds (the scheduled time when drawing and displaying one frame of effect images is completed) to the general control unit 141. It is set in the V blank interrupt processing that is executed every time a blank is received. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The supervisory CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the supervisory RAM 141c in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, with reference to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter that are updated in the V blank interrupt processing described above, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9 above. , performs a process of updating the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The supervising CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a group of drawing control commands based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the anime scene at the updated address, according to the priority order (drawing order) of the anime group to which the anime scene belongs. It generates a display list, outputs this display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and performs a process of instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws a display image based on the display list on the drawing frame buffer, and also transfers the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn on the display frame buffer to the display device ( Processing for displaying on the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71) will be performed. In other words, the frame update timing is the start timing of various effects performed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 (image display and sound output such as pending display, variable effect, jackpot preview effect, look-ahead effect, etc.) The timing has come to end.

In addition, performances that are directly controlled by the performance control unit 130m and the lamp control unit 150 (a reservation display by the sub-first reservation display 83 and the sub-second reservation display 84, performances by the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) (Operation) may match the frame update timing or may not match the frame update timing.

The overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process is performed in which a voice control command is generated from the sound information at the updated address, and this voice control command is output to the voice control unit 148 (audio LSI).

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs a process of outputting various performance sounds and notification sounds from the audio output device 9 based on the audio control command. When this process is finished, the process moves to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the variable presentation and at the end of the variable presentation (stopping of the presentation pattern 70a), it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, but Volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are regulated (limited). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power restoration, unrecoverable error, unauthorized prize winning, abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, During notification (output of notification sound) of a door opening error, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by a game store clerk, but it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. has come to be regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment on the game parlor side, while avoiding the inconvenience that a player who is trying to adjust the volume and light intensity does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various performance sounds output from the audio output device 9 When the volume of BGM (BGM, etc.) is lowered than the previous volume and the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of various performance sounds is returned to the volume before the drop. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing abnormality notification sounds due to various performance sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

Note that during abnormality notification (output of notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the volume value and light intensity value may be disabled. may be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of accessories in the lamp control section)
Accessory initial processing by the lamp control unit 150 will be described using FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing accessory initial processing by the lamp control section 150, and this processing is executed within a timer interrupt process executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the lamp control section 150.

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110. If the power-on command has been received, the process moves to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process moves to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes the return-to-origin process for the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) at the initial processing number updated in each process of the accessory initialization process. Set "1".

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial process number is not "1", it is assumed that the origin return process of the accessory is not executed and the process moves to step R105, and if the initial process number is "1", the origin return process is executed in step R104. and complete the initial processing of this accessory. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) is returned to its original position, and the initial processing number is Perform processing such as setting it to "2". Note that the details of the origin return process will be described later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial processing for the accessory is not performed and the current initial processing for the accessory is terminated, and if the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , this time the accessory initial processing ends. Specifically, processing is performed such as performing an initial operation and initial light emission to check whether the accessory works normally or not, and setting the initial processing number to "0". Note that details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the movement of returning various accessories to their origin positions and the initial movements and initial light emission of various objects do not coexist, and it becomes possible to separate and check the return movement, initial movement, and initial light emission. .

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 47, the origin return processing is executed before the initial movement processing. Therefore, the various accessory objects will initially move from the origin position, making it easier to understand whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessory objects.

(Lamp control unit return-to-origin processing)
The origin return process of the lamp control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control section 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the drive target to be returned to the origin is set to the first point. 1 movable member 73, and the process moves to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the drive target to be returned to the origin is The second movable member 74 is set, and the process moves to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the original position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, the movable member moves for a predetermined time. The board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the board does not return to the original position within a certain period of time is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). When the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-9, and when the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, the process is moved to step R105-9. , the process moves to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets return error information (first movable member return error information, second movable member return error information) indicating that a return error has occurred in the movable member to be driven, in the lamp RAM 150c. , In step R105-10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to make the second movable member 74 the drive target, and the board accessory processing number is changed to "1". If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

In step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (production button 17) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R105-13, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R105-20.

In step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the production button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. When the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-14, and when the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives a button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-15, the effect button 17 is moved within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, and the process moves to step R105-17. If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, the current The return-to-origin process ends.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18, clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (performance button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, sets the above-mentioned initial processing number to the initial operation processing of the accessory. Set "2" and end the current return-to-origin process.

As described above, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. (in the order of member 73→second movable member 74), the movable member 73 is returned to the original position. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether the various board accessories have returned to their original positions. Furthermore, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other in a manner that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to prevent both movable members from applying loads to each other, and to prevent both movable members from being damaged at the same time. This makes it possible to suppress such inconveniences.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 48, the return operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (direction button 17) It is possible to perform the return operation at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the return operation of various accessories can be shortened, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 48, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory object to return to its origin position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories does not end forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the various accessories are performing return operations even during the variable performance and the performance operation is not performed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 48, the return operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (direction button 17) When both of the return operations are completed, processing for transitioning to initial operation processing is performed. Therefore, the return movement of various accessories to their origin positions and the initial movements of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it becomes possible to separately check the return movements and initial movements of various accessories. .

Note that the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed to return to the origin position in a predetermined order (first movable member 73 → second movable member 74), but at the same time, the origin position It may also be possible to start an operation to return to . In this way, the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 can be shortened, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial motion of various accessories to be executed next. becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process of the lamp control section 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operating status of the board accessory is "0". If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether return abnormality information for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the process moves to step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2", assuming that the initial movement of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, one initial operation pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command and the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information by referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. do.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-8. The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether all the initial operations of the board accessories have been completed. If all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have not been completed, the process moves to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have been completed, in step R107-10, the process moves to step R107-11. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (production button 17) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether return abnormality information for the production button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-14 assuming that the initial movement of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, in step R107-13, the frame Assuming that the initial movement of the accessory is not performed, the frame accessory processing number is set to "2", and the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the initial movement pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (performance button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power-on command with reference to the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-18. The initial motion of the frame accessory is executed in accordance with the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether all steps of the initial motion of the frame accessory have been completed. If the initial motion of the frame accessory has not completed all steps, the process moves to step R107-21, and if the initial motion of the frame accessory has completed all steps, in step R107-20, the frame accessory Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the current initial operation processing. .

In this way, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. They can be executed at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the initial movements of various accessories can be shortened, and it is possible to prevent the performance operations of various accessories during the game from being inhibited.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 49, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board accessory, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movable member from completely failing or being damaged by forcing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred to undergo initial operation.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 49, if there is a return abnormality in the effect button 17 forming the frame accessory, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as complete malfunction or damage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which a return abnormality has occurred.

Furthermore, according to the initial motion process shown in FIG. 49, even if the initial motion of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial motion of the frame accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed, and the return abnormality is executed. Even if the initial motion of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial motion of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the operation of the accessory object in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 49, both the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (production button 17) are completed. In this case, the initial operation process ends. Therefore, even though one of the board and frame accessories is performing an initial action, the other may perform a production action, where it is unclear whether it is an initial action or a production action. It disappears.

(Specific example when the connection status of various detection means changes)
FIGS. 50(a) and 50(b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection states of various detection means change during the customer waiting state.

Here, the wiring from the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. shall be.

First, FIG. 50(a) will be explained.
FIG. 50(a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at timing T1. At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). .

At timing T2, for example, if the connector connected to the main control board 110 becomes half-plugged and only the first starting port detection switch 45a becomes unconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error. Then, connection error notification is executed by the production control board 130.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG including the words "Connection error detected" indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 outputs an alarm and a message "Connection error detected." A connection error notification sound consisting of the voice is output.

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first starting port detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been released. However, the connection error notification continues until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Next, FIG. 50(b) will be explained.
FIG. 50(b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection states of the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at timing T1. At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). .

At timing T2, for example, if the connector connected to the main control board 110 is in a half-plugged state and the first starting port detection switch 45a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, and radio wave detection sensor 54a are in an unconnected state, The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, a radio wave error, and a connection error, and the production control board 130 executes a magnetic error notification, a radio wave error notification, and a connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays the words "Magnetic error detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the words "Radio wave error detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the words "Connection error detected" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. An error notification image EG including the words ``Detection'' is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a magnetic error notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying ``Magnetic error.''

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first starting port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board 110, it is detected that the magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error have been canceled, but various error notifications continue until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Note that if the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, the main control board 110 will not detect the occurrence of a connection error and will not issue an error. Notification is not executed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 50, specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from a connected state to a disconnected state, an error notification is performed. Therefore, the occurrence of an abnormality (partially inserted connector, wire breakage, fraudulent activity) can be detected, and prompt response can be taken.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 50, specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) is non-operating. Even when the connected state is restored from the connected state, error notification of magnetic errors and radio wave errors continues until the gaming machine 1 is powered off. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts against the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 50, even if the payout control board 120 changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, no error notification is performed. Therefore, in cases where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, the game can be continued as is, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

Note that this also applies when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected. , various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, in the same notification mode as in FIG. Radio wave error notification) may also be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues, but the first starting port detection switch 45a The connection error notification may be canceled when the state changes from the unconnected state to the connected state. In this way, the game can be continued as is in cases where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, the radio wave error notification sound related to a radio wave error that has a lower priority (importance) than a magnetic error, and the connection error notification sound related to a connection error that has a lower priority (importance) than a radio wave error, are considered to be magnetic errors. Although the notification sounds are not output when they occur simultaneously, the notification sounds related to the errors that have occurred may be output in order.

Furthermore, in magnetic error notification, radio error notification, and connection error notification, an error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or an error notification sound may be output while the error notification image EG is displayed. You may also choose not to output it.

In addition, when the first starting port detection switch 45a changes from the unconnected state to the connected state, it is assumed that a starting winning has occurred and special symbol determination information is acquired, and the first special symbol pending number (U1) is increased, thereby causing the special symbol A variable display or a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol) may be executed.

In addition, if the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, the main control board 110 will not detect the occurrence of a connection error, and the error will occur. Although it has been described that the notification is not executed, the occurrence of an error may be detected and the error notification may be executed.

For example, if there are multiple signal lines for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120, and the first signal line changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, or When the main power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on while the line changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, it is detected that a certain payout abnormality has occurred (for example, some abnormality has occurred in the payout control board). ), the abnormality may be notified.
The notification is assumed to be, for example, a display or audio notification such as "Please check the payout control board."

In addition, if the second signal line among the plurality of signal lines goes from a connected state to an unconnected state, or when the second signal line goes from a connected state to an unconnected state, the main power supply of the gaming machine 1 When turned on, it may be possible to detect that a radio wave abnormality has occurred and notify that there is a radio wave error.

In addition, if the third signal line among the plurality of signal lines goes from a connected state to an unconnected state, or when the third signal line goes from a connected state to an unconnected state, the main power supply of the gaming machine 1 When turned on, the occurrence of an unrecoverable error may be detected and a notification may be made that the error is an unrecoverable error.
The notification is assumed to be, for example, a display or audio notification such as "Setting error, please change settings."

(Specific example of operating the operation panel while waiting for a customer)
Using FIG. 51, a specific example will be described in which the operation section (production button 17, cross key 18) is operated while waiting for a customer.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), when the state shifts to a customer waiting state in which variable effects and jackpot effects are not executed, effective suggestion effects (introductory effects) indicating that the validity period may occur are not executed. Valid period while waiting for a customer during which the operations of the production button 17 and cross key 18 are valid (since the valid period while waiting for a customer is maintained until the fluctuating performance starts, it is longer than the various valid periods that occur during the fluctuating performance. (which can occur over a long period of time) is initiated.

At this time, a guide image AG (operation promotion image) is displayed on the lower right side of the first image display device 70 to guide the game assistance function started by operating the effect button 17 and the cross key 18. Specifically, a first image (an image imitating the effect button 17) suggesting that a menu is displayed by operating the effect button 17, and a volume adjustment possible by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key 18. A second image suggesting that the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 18 (an image that imitates the cross key 18 with bright up and down buttons) and a third image (an image that imitates the cross key 18 with bright colored up and down buttons) and a third image that suggests that the light amount can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the A light-colored image imitating the cross key 18) is displayed.

When the production button 17 is operated in this state, the menu image MG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the production pattern 70a without the production button 17 vibrating, and the menu image MG The display sound is output.

The menu image MG includes an "end" item for ending the menu display, a "model explanation" item for explaining the model, a "performance customization" item for setting the appearance rate of a predetermined effect (for example, confirmed effect, etc.), A "Pachilog" item has been set up to manage gaming history in conjunction with a mobile device (smartphone, etc.), and currently selected items are displayed in bright colors, while currently unselected items are displayed in dark colors. It is now displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated with the "end" item selected, the menu image MG is erased without the effect button 17 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 51(c). Further, a sound for erasing the menu image MG is output, and the guide image AG is displayed again.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated in this state, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed without the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 51(d). At the same time, a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 vibrating. Then, the volume value image OG is updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

If a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) passes without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the volume value image OG is erased and the guide image AG is displayed again, as shown in FIG. 51(f). .

Note that while it is possible to adjust the volume value (adjust the light intensity value) while the volume value image OG remains displayed while waiting for a customer, while the variable display is being executed, It is possible to adjust the volume value (adjust the light amount value) without displaying the volume value image OG except for a part of the period. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an image corresponding to the variation effect from becoming difficult to see when displayed on the volume value image OG.

On the other hand, the confirmation sound at a volume corresponding to the current volume value is output while the variable display is being executed, as well as during the customer waiting state. This makes it possible to audibly recognize that the volume has been adjusted even while the variable display is being performed.
Note that while the variable display is being performed, the confirmation sound does not have to be output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value. This allows the player to concentrate on the variable performance sound.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 51, the production buttons 17 related to various preview productions (line preview production, pseudo continuous production, development production, cut-in production, final production, etc.) that occur during the variable production are Even if the effect button 17 or cross key 18 is operated during the customer waiting period, which can occur for a period longer than the valid period, a vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate (because the effect button 17 vibrates) (including indirect vibrations of the cross key 18 that are transmitted) are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the production button 17 or cross key 18 is operated while waiting for a customer, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player. becomes.

In addition, the valid period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occur during the fluctuating performance (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot performance (jackpot game) also differs depending on the various preview performances (speech lines) that occur during the fluctuating performance. This can occur over a period longer than the validity period of the preview performance, pseudo-sequence performance, development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, etc.), but during the validity period of the cross key 18 related to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment. Even if the cross key 18 is operated, the vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 18 transmitted by the vibration of the effect button 17) is not executed. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised during the variable performance or the jackpot performance, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 51, regarding the validity period while waiting for a customer, the validity suggesting effect (introductory performance) indicating that the validity period may occur before the validity period occurs is not executed. It looks like this. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though information useful to the player (effects that make the player expect a jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as

In addition, regarding the valid period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occur during variable effects (variable display of special symbols) and jackpot effects (jackpot games), effective suggestion effects (introduced) before the effective period occurs. (direction) will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though information useful to the player (effects that make the player expect a jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 51, during the customer waiting period that can occur for a period longer than the period of validity of the performance button 17 (the display period of the operation promotion image) that occurs during the variable performance, The effective period (operation) of the production button 17 related to various preview productions (line preview production, pseudo-continuation production, development production, cut-in production, final production, etc.) that occur during variable production is more important than when the production button 17 is operated. When the effect button 17 is operated during the display of the promotion image, the vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate is more likely to be executed. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 51, the effective period of the effect button 17 related to various preview effects that occur during variable effects includes a relatively short first effective period (operation promotion related to dialogue preview effects, etc.). There is a relatively long second validity period (validity period accompanied by the display of images) and a relatively long second validity period (validity period accompanied by the display of operation promotion images related to fixed performances, etc.), but the validity period of the production button 17 that occurs during variable production When the performance button 17 is operated during the second valid period, the performance button 17 will be It is easier to perform a vibrating effect. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period while waiting for a customer, a vibration effect may be executed in which the effect button 17 vibrates at a predetermined rate. At a lower rate than when the production button 17 is operated during the effective period of the production button 17 related to various preview productions (line preview production, pseudo-continuation production, development production, cut-in production, decisive production, etc.) that occur during the period. It is best to perform a vibration effect.

(Specific example when variable performance starts from customer waiting state)
A specific example of when a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state will be explained using FIGS. 52 to 54. FIG. 52 is a timing chart in which the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 53(a) to 53(f) and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance corresponding to.

First, the timing T0 is the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are in a stopped display state. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the reservation icon and the icon TI are not displayed. .

The timing of T1 is the timing when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (4th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, a non-animated increase display of the first special figure reservation number and a non-animation increase display of the first reservation icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first occurrence, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, is performed. The output of the notification sound starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". ", and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display section 70B1. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a first occurrence notification sound (picot).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved special symbols (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) based on the normal variable pattern starts (start of customer waiting state). 5th frame). At this timing, the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, and the first pending icon is displayed as an animated change (decrease display). will be started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". ”, and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display section 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Moreover, the special symbol TZ starts scrolling at the same time that the performance symbol 70a starts to be reduced in size (preparation operation) in a state where it is not scrolled (updated to another performance symbol).

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the output of the first notification sound starts (the 14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first pending icon (white icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the presentation The reduced display (preparation operation) of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame after the change display (decreasing display) of the first hold icon starts (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the changing display of the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 that has moved from the first display section 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C and When the icon becomes TI, the reduced display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area, the center variable display Scroll (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(g), in the first image display device 70, following scrolling (downward movement) of the performance pattern 70a in the central variable display area, scrolling (downward movement) of the performance pattern 70a in the right variable display area begins, resulting in a state in which the performance pattern 70a is scrolling in all variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the 225th frame from the start of the variable effect (230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(h), in the first image display device 70, the "3" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the left variable display area, and The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the center and right side variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(i), in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the right-hand variable display area, and The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(j), in the first image display device 70, the "6" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the central variable display area, and the result is a loss. A state is reached in which a combination of effect patterns 70a indicating a certain thing is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been temporarily stopped in the left-center right variable display area is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is displayed as a effect. It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special drawings increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, the number of reserved numbers and the non-animated increase of the reserved icon will be displayed for the shortest time, 1 frame. Since it ends in a period (hour) of minutes, it is possible to immediately shift to a variable effect (displaying a decrease in the pending number and displaying a change in the pending icon) to avoid delays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending digits and the pending icon is a frame after the timing (frame update) at which the increasing display of the pending digits and the pending icon ends (frame update). Since this continues until the update timing, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special drawings decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), a non-animated reduction display of the reserved number and an animated change display of the reserved icon to the corresponding icon are performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the display of the decrease in the number of pending numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed (frame update), the special figure is pending. While presenting the effect that the number changes, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased due to the reserved numbers, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed, the effect pattern will not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern will be changed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update). Since the scrolling (updating to the next effect symbol) starts, it becomes easier to understand the progress of the game, in which the variable effect starts after the pending memory decreases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of special drawings on hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, instead of displaying an increase in the number of hold icons without animation, it is displayed instead of increasing the number on hold. The animation may be executed over multiple frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand the increase in the number of reserved special drawings, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the display of a decrease in the pending number and the display of the change of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (decrease display) at the same timing (frame update), the display of the decrease in the pending number is completed (frame update). You can start either one first, if it's faster. By doing this, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has decreased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the scrolling of the effect symbols (updating to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed than usual), the change display of the pending icon is It may be possible to start scrolling (updating to the next effect pattern) of the effect pattern at a timing slightly before completion (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during variable performance)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during a variable performance will be explained using FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance, and FIGS. 56(a) to 56(c) are diagrams showing performance examples corresponding to (a) to (c) in FIG. 55.

First, the timing T1 is the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the corresponding icon (white icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number and the animated increasing display of the first pending icon are started, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, is started. Ru.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". '', and the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display section 70B1, and enlarged display starts. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a first occurrence notification sound (picot).

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (70th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display section 70B1 is completed and the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special drawings on hold increases, the number on hold is displayed non-animated and the number on hold is displayed as an animation. This makes it possible to make the game more interesting.

In addition, the number of reserved special drawings changes because the timing at which the increase in the number of pending numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase in the number of pending icons is completed (frame update). While presenting this effect, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has increased based on the reserved numbers, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Additionally, if the number of special drawings on hold increases during the execution of a variable effect, the increased display of the holding icon will be executed for a longer period of time compared to the case where the number of special drawings on hold increases while waiting for a customer. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reserved special figures has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon ends in synchronization with the timing when the increasing display of the pending icon ends (frame update), the special figure pending It is possible to effectively represent the increase in the number of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons (10 frames) is shorter than the period for displaying a change in the pending icon to the relevant icon (20 frames), so it is difficult to predict that the variable effect will start. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending digits and the increasing display of the pending icon at the same timing (frame update), if the timing for the increasing display of the pending digits to complete (frame updating) is earlier, which one? may be started first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special drawings has increased, while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, instead of making the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons, the period for displaying an increasing number of pending icons may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special drawings has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, instead of making the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons, both periods may be made to have the same length.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 58(a) to 58(f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG. 57.

First, the timing T0 is the fifth frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(a), on the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a of "4", "6", "8" indicating a loss, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state. It becomes. Further, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1, a first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display section 70B2, and the icon TI is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing at which the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) based on the normal variation pattern is started (the 20th frame after the performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, the first pending icon is displayed as an animated change to the corresponding icon, and the first pending icon is displayed as a non-animated change. Animated display of decrease starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". ”. Further, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display section 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 that was displayed on the second display section 70B2 1 hold icon (white icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display section 70B1. Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be reduced in size (preparation operation) without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (30th frame after the production symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number starts, but since the first pending icon is changing and decreasing, the first pending icon is increasing and the icon The output of the occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound at the time of occurrence, is put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". ”, and the reduced display (preparatory action) of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 20th frame after the change display of the first pending icon and the start of the decrease display (40th frame after the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first pending icon end. Further, the animation of the first pending icon that has been on standby starts to be displayed in increasing numbers, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 that has moved from the first display section 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C and When the icon becomes TI, the first pending icon H12 that has moved from the second display section 70B2 is located at the center of the first display section 70B1, and the reduced display (preparation operation) of the performance symbol 70a stops. Further, the first hold icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display section 70B2 and starts to be enlarged, and at the same time, the output of the first occurrence notification sound (picot) from the audio output device 9 is started. Ru.

The timing of T4 is the 5th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (45th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increasing number of the first hold icons and the output of the first occurrence notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display section 70B2, and the enlarged display continues. At the same time, the output of the first occurrence notification sound (pico) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the 10th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (50th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display section 70B1 is finished, and the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, if the number of special drawings on hold increases while displaying a change in the pending icon to the corresponding icon and displaying a decrease in the number of pending icons, this change display and decrease display will be completed. (Frame update) Even before the timing, the number on hold will start to increase, so even if the number on hold icon is changing and displaying a decrease, the player will be able to see that the number on hold has increased. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special drawings on hold increases while displaying a change in the hold icon to the corresponding icon and displaying a decrease in the number of hold icons, the display of an increase in the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound will be on standby ( (restriction), and at the timing when the change display and decrease display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are started, so the change in the number of special drawings held It is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to grasp, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon that is executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. Good too.

In addition, instead of starting to display an increase in the number of pending icons and outputting the occurrence notification sound at the timing when the display of the pending icon changes and decreasing display is completed (frame update), (the start is delayed from normal), The increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started at a timing (frame update) slightly before the changing display of the pending icon and the decreasing display are completed (frame update). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the change in the number of reserved special drawings from becoming difficult to grasp, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special drawings on hold increases while the number of hold icons is increasing, the display of the number of hold icons will increase and the output of the occurrence notification sound will be on standby in the same way as when the number of hold icons is changing or decreasing. On the other hand, it is sufficient to start displaying an increasing number of pending digits, and to start displaying an increasing number of pending icons and outputting an occurrence notification sound at the timing when displaying an increasing number of pending icons is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach effect, and FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG. 59. .

First, the timing T1 is the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the center variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Furthermore, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1, and the icon (white icon) TH is also displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development performance for developing into the SP reach performance is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect pattern 70a scrolling in the center variable display area are displayed on the screen. The movement to the upper left and the reduced display are started, and the effect pattern 70a changes to a simple display mode in which only the numbers are enlarged.

The timing of T3 is the 15th frame after the start of the development effect (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development performance for developing into the SP reach performance is continuing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60(b), in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the "5" effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and The scrolling performance pattern 70a is displayed at a position close to the upper left of the screen, and is also displayed in a smaller size than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the 30th frame after the start of the development effect (460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, while the development performance ends, the SP reach performance starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a in the variable display area at the center left is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and at the center of the screen A confrontation performance in which an ally character C2 and an enemy character C3 confront each other begins. In addition, the pending icons (here, (only the first hold icon) is hidden together with the hold icon display area. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ becomes a ready-to-reach state with the same "7" symbol as the performance symbol 70a.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (820th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number starts, but since the SP reach effect (showdown effect) is being executed, the first pending icon increases and the icon occurs at this timing. The output of the occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound of the time, will not be performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60(d), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". ”, and the final performance of the showdown performance (a decisive performance to notify whether or not it is a jackpot) is executed.

The timing of T6 is the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final performance (decisive performance) of the confrontation performance is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60(e), on the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 wins against the enemy character C3, and the effect pattern 70a which is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is displayed. The game will temporarily stop (it will be in an oscillating state) at the combination ("555") that indicates a jackpot.

The timing of T7 is the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the first pending icon is returned to the non-animated state and is displayed in an increased manner.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been displayed in a reduced size at the top left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state). become). Further, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display section 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed in normal size on the second display section 70B2.

Then, the effect pattern 70a, which had been temporarily stopped in the left-center right variable display area, returns to the display mode consisting of characters and numbers, and finally, the effect pattern 70a stops displaying, and the special pattern TZ It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "555" as the production pattern 70a. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of a specific production (SP reach production), even before the timing when this specific production ends (frame update), the number of pending numbers will increase. Since the increase display starts, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special drawings increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), the execution of the increase display of the pending icon is put on standby (restricted), and the specific performance ends (the display is reduced). Since the number of pending icons starts to be displayed at the same time as the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is enlarged (frame updated), it is possible to prevent the change in the number of reserved special symbols from becoming difficult to grasp, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, when starting to display an increase in the number of pending icons at the timing when a specific performance (SP reach performance) ends, the number of pending icons is increased by non-animation that can be completed in one frame, so the timing when the number of reserved special drawings increases Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of displaying an increased number of pending icons and the timing of displaying an increased number of pending icons, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of pending icons at the timing when a specific performance (SP reach performance) ends, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbols on hold increases at the timing when the specific performance ends due to the occurrence notification sound. This makes it difficult for players to misunderstand that they have played the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special drawings on hold increases multiple times during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), while displaying an increase in the number of reservations, the system waits for the display of an increase on the reservation icon to be executed (restriction). It is preferable to display the increased number of pending icons in one frame at the timing when the specific effect is finished (frame update).

In addition, if the number of special symbols on hold increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), instead of not outputting the occurrence notification sound, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the number of reservations. Good too.

Moreover, although the SP reach-to-reach performance has been illustrated as the specific performance, the specific performance may include the SPSP reach-to-reach performance or may include the full-rotation reach-to-reach performance.

(Specific example of when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state)
A specific example in which the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state will be explained using FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG. 61 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state, and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance corresponding to (i).

First, the timing T1 is the 400th frame after the last (100th) variable performance in the specific gaming state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62(a), "1" is displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. ing. In addition, the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, and second pending icons (white icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively. and the icon TI is displayed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, the number of variable effects that can be performed in a specific gaming state (here, "0 times remaining") is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, the game ball is displayed toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU is displayed that encourages firing.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (415th frame after the start of the variable production). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number starts, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the notification sound when the icon occurs Therefore, the output of the occurrence notification sound will not be performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". ”, and the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 430th frame after the start of the variable effect. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left-center-right variable display area temporarily stop at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the variable display area at the center left, and A state is reached in which a combination of performance symbols 70a indicating a loss is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the 15th frame after the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops (445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display is started showing the results of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG becomes dark, and "Special Time End" indicating the end of the specific gaming state and a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. The characters "Jackpot x 1" are displayed, indicating the number of jackpot games played during the game. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the 15th frame after the start of the result display (460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62(e), the first image display device 70 displays the words "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period. Additional information will be displayed.

The timing of T6 is the 30th frame after the start of the result display (475th frame from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is stopped, and the special pattern TZ It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "285" as the production pattern 70a. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing when the last (100th) variable performance in the specific gaming state ends and the first variable performance in the normal gaming state starts (490th frame from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the second pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, the second pending icon changes to the corresponding icon through animation, and the second pending icon is decreased due to animation. display, non-animated return display of the first pending icon, and non-animated increased display of the first pending icon.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(g), in the first image display device 70, the second reservation number in the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3", The second hold icon (white icon) H21 displayed on the first display section 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display section 70D2 to fourth display section 70D4. The second pending icons (white icons) H22 to H24 that have been displayed start moving (shifting) toward the next adjacent display section.

In addition, the first pending icon display area returns and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display section 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display section 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be reduced in size (preparation operation) without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. Further, a left-handed hitting image HU is displayed at the upper left of the screen, which prompts the user to shoot the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon (510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(h), in the first image display device 70, the second pending icon H21 that has moved from the first display section 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C, and As soon as the icon becomes TI, the second pending icons H22 to H24 that have been moved from the second display section 70D2 to the fourth display section 70D4 are located at the center of the adjacent display section, and the reduced display (preparation operation) of the performance symbol 70a is Stop.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame after the end of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon (520th frame from the start of the previous fluctuating effect). At this timing, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled in the center variable display area. Scrolling (downward movement) is started.

In this way, when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during a specific gaming state, while waiting (restricting) the increasing display of the first pending icon, the increasing display of the first special figure pending number is Therefore, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of a specific performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during a specific gaming state, an increase in the first pending icon will be displayed at the timing when the specific gaming state (the last variable effect) ends (frame update). Even if you miss the display of an increase in the number of reserved first special drawings that was executed before, you can recognize that the number of reserved first special drawings has increased, increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of first pending icons at the timing when a specific gaming state (the last variable effect in) ends, the number of pending icons is increased by non-animation that can be completed in one frame, so the special figure pending Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing at which the number increases and the timing at which the display of an increased number of pending icons is executed, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of pending icons at the timing when a specific gaming state (the last variable effect) ends, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the special image is displayed at the timing when the specific gaming state ends due to the occurrence notification sound. This makes it difficult to mislead people into thinking that the number of reservations has increased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed, the effect pattern will not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern will be displayed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update). Since the scrolling (updating to the next performance symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the performance during the variable performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of first special figures on hold increases by multiple numbers during a specific gaming state, while displaying an increase in the number of pending numbers, the display of an increase in the number of pending icons is on standby (restricted). It is only necessary to display an increase in the number of pending icons in one frame at the timing when the specific game state (the last variable effect) ends (frame update).

Further, when the number of first special symbols on hold increases during a specific gaming state, instead of not outputting the occurrence notification sound, the occurrence notification sound may be output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the number on hold.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are set (displayed), but the second pending icon display area 70D is set (displayed). ), only the first pending icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) is being executed during the variable performance. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of a specific effect, or the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of a specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reserved number display area 70E and the second special figure reserved number display area 70F were set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but the second image display device 71 It may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display different from the image display device (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.). If a dedicated LED is used, the number of reserved special symbols may be displayed by the lighting color and lighting/blinking mode of the LED.

(Example of performance when pre-reading action performance and step-up notice performance are executed)
With reference to FIGS. 64 and 65, an example of a performance when a prefetch action performance and a step-up notice performance are executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 64(a), on the first image display device 70, the production symbol 70a of "468" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped state. Further, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the fluctuation performance (corresponding to advance fluctuation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. The two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the first performance of the look-ahead motion performance that spans three variable performances is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits blue light, performs a weak motion of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion sound effect. be done.

After that, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon (the left end in the figure) that is the target of the prefetch action effect changes to a blue icon, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 64(c). (Preparation operation) is completed, a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size is started, and then the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position and the first performance of the pre-reading action performance is completed. In addition, the prize opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and a lamp change effect is started.

Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 64(d), the performance symbol 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "365", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production symbol has elapsed and the next variable production (corresponding to advance variation) is started, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is set to "2" as shown in FIG. 64(e). to "1", and the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the second performance of the look-ahead motion performance is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits blue light, performs a weak motion of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion sound effect. be done.

After that, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon that is the preview target of the look-ahead action performance changes to a red icon, the reduced display (preparation action) of the performance symbol 70a is After finishing, a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size is started, and then the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the second performance of the look-ahead motion performance is completed. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect continues.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 65(g), the production pattern 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "635", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production symbol has elapsed and the variation production (corresponding to the variation) that is the subject of advance notice of the look-ahead motion production is started, as shown in FIG. 65(h), the number of reserved special symbols is displayed. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the production pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the third performance of the look-ahead motion performance is started. Specifically, as a strong preview of the look-ahead motion performance, the second movable member 74 emits red light, performs a strong motion of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a strong motion sound effect. be done.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 65(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a ends and the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size starts, and then The second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the third performance of the pre-reading motion performance is completed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the performance symbol 70a, the first step performance of the step-up preview performance is started, as shown in FIG. 65(j). Specifically, the first step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the first step sound effect is output. After that, the second to fourth step effects are sequentially executed.

Furthermore, when the fourth step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 65(k), the fifth step effect is started, the fifth step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the fifth step sound effect is is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second while the effect button 17 remains off. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) at the time of the game is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

When one second passes, as shown in FIG. 65(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends, and two seconds after that, the fifth step effect ends. After that, according to the variable performance pattern, the SP ready-to-reach performance is executed after the normal ready-to-reach performance is performed, or the SPSP ready-to-reach performance is performed after the normal reach performance is performed.

As described above, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, after the number of reserved special symbols displayed in the special symbol reserved number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (the production pattern 70a starts the preparation operation). The pre-reading operation effect (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started before the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 70a is started. Therefore, while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the pre-read motion performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable production, but before the movement of the pending icon is completed, the look-ahead motion production is performed. (Light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started. Therefore, while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the pre-read motion performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the vibration production is not performed during the first to fourth step production of the step-up notice production, but the vibration production is performed during the fifth step production, which has the highest expectation level. It is set to run. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production performed during the 5th step production is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the 5th step production of the step-up notice production. seconds) is shorter. Therefore, the vibration effect does not surpass the appearance of the fifth step effect, and it is possible to improve the effect of the step-up notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, since the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image ( The sound effect when displaying the opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound effect, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) are no longer output. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, even during the vibration production of the production button 17, the production light emission and lamp change production by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue. Therefore, by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the effect light emission or lamp change effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect can be maintained and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production executed during the fifth step production in the step-up notice production, but the production button 17 can be held in a predetermined mode (for confirmation of jackpot) during the execution period of the vibration production. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the rainbow color that is the emitted light color, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.). In this way, it becomes easier to understand that the vibration effect is being executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during a vibration effect that does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, it is possible to draw attention to the effect button 17 by the lighting mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emitting light toward the effect button 17, etc.). It is also possible to perform a dramatic light emission.

(Example of production when pre-reading vibration production and dialogue preview production are executed)
An example of a performance when a pre-read vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67.

First, as shown in FIG. 66(a), on the first image display device 70, the production symbol 70a of "468" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped state. Further, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the change effect (corresponding to a pre-change) starts from this state, as shown in FIG. 66(b), the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2," and the three reserved icons HI start to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Also, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the first performance of the pre-reading vibration performance that spans three variable performances is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the pre-read vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the effect button 17 flashes white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues.

Thereafter, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon (left end in the figure) that is the preview target of the pre-read vibration effect changes to a blue icon, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 66(c). (Preparation operation) is completed, a scroll display in normal size (high-speed fluctuation) is started, and then the weak vibration and white blinking of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the first performance of the pre-read vibration performance is completed. In addition, the prize opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and a lamp change effect is started.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66(d), the effect pattern 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "365", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production symbol has elapsed and the next variable production (corresponding to advance variation) is started, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is set to "2" as shown in FIG. 66(e). to "1", and the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the second performance of the pre-read vibration performance is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the pre-read vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the effect button 17 flashes white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon that is the preview target of the pre-reading vibration effect changes to a red icon, the reduced display (preparation action) of the effect pattern 70a is displayed as shown in FIG. 66(f). After the end, a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, and then the weak vibration and white blinking of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the second performance of the pre-reading vibration performance is completed. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect continues.

Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 67(g), the production pattern 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "635", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance symbol has elapsed and the fluctuation performance (corresponding to the fluctuation) that is the preview target of the pre-read vibration performance is started, as shown in FIG. 67(h), the number of reserved special symbols is displayed. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the third performance of the pre-reading vibration performance is started. Specifically, as a strong preview of the pre-read vibration performance, the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds, and the performance button 17 flashes in red for 3 seconds. However, since the execution of this strong vibration does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the sound effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 67(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a ends and the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) starts, but the pre-reading vibration effect The strong warning will remain in place. Thereafter, the strong vibration and white flashing of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the third performance of the pre-read vibration performance is completed.

Then, when the third performance of the pre-reading vibration performance is completed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. be done. Specifically, an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed in the dialogue window image SW, and the operation promotion image SG is At the same time as the display sound effect is output, the effect button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the heat line "What is this!? It's hot!!" is displayed in red letters, as shown in FIG. 67(k). , a sound (direction sound) corresponding to the heated dialogue is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second while the effect button 17 is turned off, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and The lamp change performance continues.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 67(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, a pseudo continuous effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, a normal reach effect is executed, an SP reach effect is executed after a normal reach effect, or an SP SP reach effect is executed after a normal reach effect. It will be executed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, after the number of reserved symbols displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (the production pattern 70a moves to prepare) The pre-reading vibration effect (vibration of the effect button 17, flashing white) is started before the start of the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation). Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the pre-read vibration performance is being executed while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the pre-reading vibration production is performed after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable production, but before the movement of the pending icon is completed. (Vibration of production button 17, flashing white) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the pre-read vibration performance is being executed while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, when performing the pre-read vibration effect, the effect button 17 is made to flash white, although the effect period of the effect button 17 is not accompanied. Therefore, even when the performance button 17 is not operated, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the pre-read vibration performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the lighting mode of the production button 17 in the pre-reading vibration production is different from that of the preview production with the occurrence of the valid period (line preview production, pseudo continuous production, development production, cut-in production). This is different from the lighting mode of the performance button 17 during the valid period in (performance, fixed performance, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of causing the player to misunderstand that the effective period of the performance button 17 has expired in the pre-read vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) is not executed until the pre-read vibration performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to notice due to the pre-ready notice performance that a pre-read vibration performance that is difficult to judge visually is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed until the pre-reading vibration effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to notice that a pre-reading vibration performance that is difficult to judge visually is being executed due to the pseudo-continuous performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production performed during the dialogue preview production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the speech preview production. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the dialogue preview performance without the vibration performance being superior to the appearance of the dialogue preview performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the vibration production performed during the pre-reading vibration production does not involve the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). The display sound effect when displaying the production button image, gauge image) and the production sound when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound effect, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) are no longer output. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the vibration production performed during the dialogue preview production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque production A display sound effect when displaying a button image, a gauge image) and a production sound (operation sound effect, dialogue voice, etc.) when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the dialogue preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the speech preview production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the timing of the operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the validity period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission and lamp change effect by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue. There is. Therefore, by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the effect light emission or lamp change effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect can be maintained and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production that is executed during the dialogue preview production, but the production button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color, which is the emitting color that guarantees a jackpot) for the duration of the vibration production. It is also possible to emit light in a color other than the above, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.).

Furthermore, regarding the vibration performance that is executed during the dialogue preview performance, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated) The vibration effect may be executed until 0.5 seconds after (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, during a vibration effect that does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, it is possible to draw attention to the effect button 17 by the lighting mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emitting light toward the effect button 17, etc.). It is also possible to perform a dramatic light emission.

(Example of performance when pseudo continuous performance is executed before reach performance)
With reference to FIG. 68, an example of a performance in a case where a pseudo continuous performance is executed before a ready-to-reach performance will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 68(a), in the first image display device 70, a "6" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area, a "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the right area, In the middle area, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues. At this time, the pseudo consecutive success performance is started without the validity period of the performance button 17 occurring. Specifically, an inciting effect is executed in the middle area to incite whether or not a pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of a pseudo continuous effect will be temporarily stopped. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when the inciting effect ends, the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area and a success sound effect is output, as shown in FIG. 68(b). In addition, as shown in FIG. 68(c), the second movable member 74 emits blue light and makes a weak movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again. “×2” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations (the progress of the production stage) is displayed in blue.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 68(d), in the first image display device 70, the "6" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area, and the "5" effect pattern is temporarily stopped in the right area. 70a is temporarily stopped, the fluctuating display of the performance pattern 70a continues in the middle area, and a pseudo-inciting performance is executed in the medium area to incite whether or not the pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo series is temporarily stopped. At this time, the validity period of the production button 17 occurs, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and the operation promotion image SG is displayed. The display sound effect of the promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 68(e), the pseudo symbols are temporarily stopped in the middle area as a pseudo continuous success effect, and a success sound effect is output. . In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 68(f), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light and makes a strong movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo changes (the stage of the effect progresses). ``x3'' indicating what has been done) is displayed in red.

Thereafter, when the strong operation time (1 second) of the second movable member 74 has elapsed, the pseudo consecutive success effect ends, and as shown in FIG. is temporarily stopped and a normal reach effect is executed, and then, depending on the variable effect pattern, a normal reach effect is executed and then an SP reach effect is executed, or a normal reach effect is executed and then an SP SP reach effect is executed. It turns out.

(Example of a performance when a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a reach performance)
With reference to FIG. 69, an example of a performance when a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a ready-to-reach performance will be described. Note that FIGS. 69(a) to 69(c) are the same as FIGS. 68(a) to 68(c), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 69(c), as shown in FIG. 69(d), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(e), when the pseudo-continuation effect is started, a pseudo-inciting effect is executed in which the pseudo-symbols suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuation are incited to determine whether or not to temporarily stop in the middle area. At this time, the validity period of the production button 17 occurs, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and the production promotion image SG is displayed. Button 17 emits white light. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 69(f), the pseudo symbols are temporarily stopped in the middle area as a pseudo continuous success effect, and a success sound effect is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 69(g), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light and makes a strong movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo changes (the stage of the effect progresses). ``x3'' indicating what has been done) is displayed in red.

After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 69(h), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed, and after that, according to the variable effect pattern. After the normal reach effect is executed, the SP reach effect is executed, or after the normal reach effect is executed, the SPSP reach effect is executed.

In this manner, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the vibration effect can be executed when the pseudo continuous effect is executed when the effective period of the effect button 17 occurs in the pseudo continuous effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the pseudo consecutive success production is longer than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo consecutive success production. It's shorter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive success performance without the vibration performance being superior to the appearance of the pseudo consecutive success performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, since the vibration production executed during the pseudo-continuous production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production Display sound effects when displaying a button image, gauge image) and performance sounds (operation sound effects, success sound effects, etc.) when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo continuous performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, the execution period of the vibration production performed in the pseudo-sequence production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the timing of the operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, in the case where the pseudo-continuous production is executed after the ready-to-reach production, the type of production symbol that forms the ready-to-win state after the execution of the pseudo-continuous production is the pseudo-continuous production. Downgrade from the type of production symbol that formed the reach state before execution (downgrade from reach with odd numbered symbols to reach with even numbered symbols, reach from reach with "7" symbol to reach with even numbered symbols or odd numbered symbols other than "7") (downgrade to 1). Therefore, the player will not feel dissatisfied with the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance, and the interest in the game will not be improved.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission due to the vibration performance accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production executed during the pseudo continuous production, but the production button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color, which is the emitting color that guarantees a jackpot) over the execution period of the vibration production. It is also possible to emit light in a color other than the above, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.).

In addition, regarding the vibration performance executed during the pseudo continuous performance, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated) The vibration effect may be executed until 0.5 seconds after (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Furthermore, although the effective period of the effect button 17 is generated during the pseudo continuous effect and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed, the effective period of the effect button 17 is not generated during the pseudo continuous effect. The vibration effect may be executed, or the effect period of the effect button 17 may be made to occur, but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SP reach production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 70, an example of a performance in a case where the development performance is executed and the SP ready-to-reach performance is executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the performance symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach performance is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(b), when the SP development effect is started, the SPSP development symbol that suggests the development to the SPSP reach effect, the SP development symbol that suggests the development to the SP reach effect, the pseudo continuous effect A roulette performance is performed in which a plurality of special performance symbols, such as a pseudo symbol that suggests the execution of the ``game'' and a waste symbol that suggests that the performance will not develop (a loss), are displayed in a diagonal direction at low speed. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(c), an effect is performed in which SPSP development symbols, SP development symbols, pseudo symbols, and waste symbols are displayed in a high-speed variable manner. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 70(d), it is reported that the SP development symbol temporarily stops in the middle area and develops into an SP ready-to-reach effect. In addition, in the roulette performance, the type of special performance symbols that are variably displayed changes depending on the fluctuation performance pattern, so the special performance symbols that are variably displayed (special performance symbols that are not ultimately temporarily stopped and special performance symbols that are temporarily stopped) Depending on the type of performance, it suggests whether or not it will develop into a production with high expectations for jackpots (expectation level for jackpots).

After that, the screen whites out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. It will be displayed in a reduced size in the corner and the SP reach effect will start. It should be noted that the icon becomes hidden with the start of the SP reach effect.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SPSP reach production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 71, an example of a performance in a case where the development performance is executed and the SPSP ready-to-reach performance is executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the performance symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach performance is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the SPSP development effect is started, the SP development symbol that suggests development to SP reach effect, the SPSP development symbol that suggests development to SPSP reach effect, and the full rotation reach effect. A roulette performance is performed in which a plurality of special performance symbols, such as full rotation symbols that suggest the development of a performance, are displayed diagonally and at low speed. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

After that, as shown in FIG. 71(c), an effect is performed in which the SP development symbol, the SPSP development symbol, and the full rotation symbol are displayed in a high-speed variable manner, and the operation of the production button 17 may become effective. An effective suggestive performance that suggests that is started. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position at the lower right of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position at the bottom right of the screen, the effective period of the effect button 17 (long press for 4 seconds) occurs, as shown in FIG. An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. , the production button 17 emits red light. Note that the words "long press" are displayed on the opaque effect button image.

After that, when the production button 17 is pressed and held for a long time, a production is performed in which the speed of the variable display of various development symbols is gradually slowed down, and the time of the long press reaches a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) or the valid period has passed. Then, as shown in FIG. 71(e), the SPSP development pattern temporarily stops in the middle area, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and moves. be done. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has passed, the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, the screen whites out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 71(f), the effect pattern 70a in the middle area changes again, and the three effect patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen. SPSP reach performance starts. It should be noted that with the start of the SPSP reach effect, the pending icon and the icon are hidden.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, depending on the type of special performance symbols (special performance symbols that are not temporarily stopped, special performance symbols that are temporarily stopped) that are displayed in a variable manner in the roulette performance, , suggests whether or not the performance will develop into a production with high expectations for jackpots (jackpot expectations). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the types of special effect symbols that are variably displayed in the roulette effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, effective suggestion production may be executed in the development production, thereby increasing the player's expectations for the development of the reach production with high expectations for a jackpot. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the development production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development production. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the development performance without the vibration performance being superior to the appearance of the development performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, since the vibration production executed during the advanced production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production button Display sound effects when displaying images (images, gauge images) and performance sounds (operation sound effects, temporary stop sound effects, etc.) when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the development performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the advanced production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. There is. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on the operation timing of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission due to the vibration performance accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production executed during the advanced production, but the production button 17 can be set in a predetermined mode (other than rainbow color, which is the emitting color that guarantees a jackpot) over the execution period of the vibration production. The light may be emitted in a different color from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.

In addition, the vibration performance that is executed during the development performance will be performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and regardless of the operation timing (for example, from the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated). The vibration effect may be executed until after 0.5 seconds (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Furthermore, during the development performance, the valid period of the performance button 17 is generated and the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed, but during the development performance, the vibration performance is performed without generating the validity period of the performance button 17. Alternatively, the vibration effect may be generated during the effective period of the effect button 17, but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of performance when cut-in performance is executed during SP reach performance and becomes a jackpot)
An example of a performance in which a cut-in performance is executed during the SP ready-to-win performance in variable performance pattern 13 and results in a jackpot will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73.

First, as shown in FIG. 72(a), the effect symbols 70a in the left and right areas are reduced and displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the SP ready-to-reach effect is being executed. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the SP reach effect approaches the final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. Begins. Specifically, an effect is performed in which two translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are brought together from the left and right lower portions of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. At the same time, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the red cut-in effect is started as shown in FIG. 72(d). Specifically, a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a third cut-in sound effect is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for 3 seconds, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After that, when one second passes after the output of the third cut-in sound effect ends, the cut-in effect and the weak vibration effect end, and as shown in FIG. 72(e), the effect of "5" in the middle area is An effect is performed in which the symbol 70a stops or the effect symbol 70a of "6" stops.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 72(f), it is temporarily stopped with three "5" production symbols 70a aligned (symbols aligned), and the production button 17 is pressed strongly for 4 seconds. At the same time as a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is started, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

After 4 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 73(g), the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect buttons 17 continue to emit light in rainbow colors. Furthermore, when one second has passed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume emitting light for effect, and the effect button 17 turns off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(h), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, when three "5" production symbols 70a are aligned (designs aligned), they are moved to the back direction and displayed in a reduced size, and the validity period of the production button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) occurs, An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is displayed. is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a promotion failure effect is started as shown in FIG. 73(i). Specifically, when three of the "5" production symbols 70a, which had been displayed in a reduced size, are aligned (designs aligned), they are moved to the front of the screen and enlarged, and a non-promoted sound effect is output, but multiple The effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the game board decoration LED continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73(j), the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the normal size, and the promotion failure performance ends. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 73(k), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance symbols 70a.

Thereafter, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and becomes temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 73(l), and the first special image If there is a pending number, the pending icon will be redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (jackpot confirmation vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 are activated. It glows in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

When one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 73(m), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are completed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555", and the special The symbol TZ is also stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without any accompanying movement is started, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, in the case of a variable performance pattern in which the re-lottery performance is not executed, the process moves to FIG. 73(k) after FIG. 73(g), and the eye-catching performance is executed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, effective suggestion production may be executed in the cut-in production, so in addition to the occurrence of the validity period, the expectation of jackpot is high. This can be suggested to the player, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the execution period (3 seconds) of the cut-in production is the same as the execution period (3 seconds) of the vibration production performed during the cut-in production. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the cut-in production. In addition, the vibration effect can suggest to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the vibration production executed during the cut-in production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque production) is Display sound effects when displaying a button image, gauge image) and performance sounds (operation sound effects, cut-in sound effects, etc.) when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, the effect of the cut-in performance can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, when the production patterns 70a in the display mode that does not include characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (designs aligned), the vibration during the cut-in production Since the strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed for a longer period of time than the performance, it is possible to effectively inform the player that a jackpot has been won, increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, when the production symbols 70a in the display mode including characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (C symbols aligned), a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation (vibration effect) is now executed. Therefore, the player can reconfirm that he or she has won the jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration production, jackpot confirmation vibration production, jackpot confirmation vibration production, Vibration effects, opening vibration effects) do not involve the validity period of the production button 17 (display of operation promotion images), so the display sound effects and validity period when displaying operation promotion images (opaque production button images, gauge images) During the operation, the effect sound (operation sound effect, other sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the examples of effects shown in Figures 72 and 73, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and regardless of the timing of operation. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the timing of operation of the effect button 17, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, when a jackpot occurs as a result of the SP reach production, while the vibration production is executed while the production symbol 70a that becomes the jackpot is temporarily stopped, The vibration effect is not executed during the main stop. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the fluctuating performance is still continuing due to the vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission due to the vibration performance accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light during the vibration production executed during the cut-in production, but the production button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color, which is the luminous color that guarantees a jackpot) over the execution period of the vibration production. It is also possible to emit light in a color other than the above, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.).

In addition, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs were designed to continue emitting light during the validity period related to the cut-in performance, but if the performance button 17 is operated immediately before or from the start of the validity period, the validity period will expire. Until the elapse of time, some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs may be turned off, and then the effect light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be restarted. In this way, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when executing the promotion success effect, multiple game board decoration LEDs and the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 were started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first, and then the multiple game board decoration LEDs were started simultaneously. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

Moreover, when the SP reach effect is executed, the effect of the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, and then the effect pattern 70a is stopped. If the result of the reach effect is a loss, the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, and then the effect pattern 70a is stopped. Alternatively, the performance pattern 70a may be stopped in the display mode of only numbers without performing the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including characters.

In addition, the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect will be performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period expires when the effect button 17 is not operated) The vibration effect may be executed until 2 seconds after the start (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Furthermore, although the vibration effect is executed during the cut-in effect or promotion success effect, it is also possible to execute the vibration effect during the cut-in effect, but not to perform the vibration effect during the promotion success effect. The reverse may be done, or the vibration effect may not be performed during the cut-in effect and promotion success effect.

In addition, the vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a containing only numbers, or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a including a character. While the vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped, the vibration effect may not be executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a including a character, or vice versa, or only numbers The vibration effect may not be executed when the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped for a jackpot and when the effect pattern 70a including a character is temporarily stopped for a jackpot effect.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a stops (even during the cut-in effect, the winning port lamp NR will emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the icon), but it may also be set to emit light and turn off in conjunction with the light emission mode of multiple game board decorative LEDs.

(Example 1 of the effect when the decisive effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect and results in a jackpot)
With reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, performance example 1 in which a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance in the variable performance pattern 20 and results in a jackpot will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 74(a), the three effect symbols 70a form a ready-to-win state and are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, thereby executing the SPSP ready-to-reach effect. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the SPSP reach performance reaches its final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. Begins. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, the effective period (single click 5 seconds) of the effect button 17 occurs, as shown in FIG. An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. At the same time, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a success effect is started as shown in FIG. 74(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after strongly vibrating the production button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration production (decision success vibration production) is started in which the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between, and at the top left of the screen. It temporarily stops when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the winning success effect and strong vibration effect are completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect buttons 17 are displayed in rainbow colors, as shown in FIG. A celebration performance will begin to celebrate the jackpot while the light continues to emit light. Then, when the blessing performance ends, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restarts the performance light emission, and the performance button 17 turns off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74(f), a temporary stop is made when the three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned (designs aligned), and a strong vibration performance (a strong vibration of the performance button 17 for 4 seconds) is performed. At the same time as the jackpot confirmation vibration performance is started, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

After 4 seconds have elapsed, the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit light in rainbow colors. Further, when one second has elapsed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume emitting light for effect, and the effect button 17 turns off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(g), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, when three "5" production symbols 70a are aligned (designs aligned), they are moved to the back direction and displayed in a reduced size, and the validity period of the production button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) occurs, An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is displayed. is output, and the production button emits red light.

Thereafter, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a promotion success performance is started as shown in FIG. 75(h). Specifically, the "7" production symbol 70a, which has been switched from the "5" production symbol 70a that had been displayed in a reduced size, is moved to the front of the screen in a state where three of the "7" production symbols 70a are aligned (designs are aligned) and is enlarged and displayed. , a promotion sound effect is output. Further, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors, and a strong vibration performance (promotion vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for 3 seconds is started.

Then, when the strong vibration effect ends and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at the normal size, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs will emit effect light (other than rainbow light). At the same time, the effect button 17 turns off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 75(j), an eye-catching effect that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance symbols 70a.

Thereafter, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and becomes temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 75(k), and the icon is displayed again. At the same time as being displayed, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the effect period of the effect button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are activated. It glows in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

When one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 75(l), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are completed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "777", and the special The symbol TZ is also stopped at "777".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without any accompanying movement is started, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the first round game is started.

(Example 2 of the performance when the decisive performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance and it becomes a jackpot)
With reference to FIGS. 76 and 77, performance example 2 will be described in which a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance in the variable performance pattern 16 and a jackpot is achieved. Note that FIGS. 76(a) to 76(c) are the same as FIGS. 74(a) to 74(c), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

When the production button 17 is operated from the state shown in FIG. 76(c) or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 76(d), a state where three "5" production symbols 70a are aligned (symbols aligned) A temporary stop is performed at , and a jackpot is notified by the performance symbol 70a, but no strong vibration performance is performed at this point. At this time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board illumination device) continue to emit light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, a success effect is started as shown in FIG. 76(e). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after strongly vibrating the production button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration production (decision success vibration production) is started in which the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between. It temporarily stops when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the winning success effect and strong vibration effect are completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect buttons 17 are displayed in rainbow colors, as shown in FIG. A celebration performance will begin to celebrate the jackpot while the light continues to emit light. Then, when the blessing performance ends, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restarts the performance light emission, and the performance button 17 turns off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 77(g), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance symbols 70a.

Then, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and becomes temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 77(h), and the icon is displayed again. At the same time as being displayed, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the effect period of the effect button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are activated. It glows in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

When one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 77(i), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are completed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555", and the special The symbol TZ is also stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without any accompanying movement is started, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, if the performance button 17 is operated during the validity period related to the winning performance, or if the validity period has elapsed and a failure performance is performed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate. A failure effect image is displayed on the single-image display device 70, and a failure sound effect is output. Furthermore, part or all of the performance button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off, and then the three performance symbols are temporarily stopped when the number of reach misses (for example, "565") is rolled. After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an eye-catching effect that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is to be displayed in a stopped state is executed, and when the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and is temporarily stopped. Then, the icon is re-displayed, and if there is a number of reserved first special symbols, the reserved icon is re-displayed. When one second has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is permanently stopped when the reach is missed, and the special symbol TZ is also permanently stopped when the reach is missed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, effective suggestion production may be executed in the deciding production, so in addition to the occurrence of the validity period, the expectation level of jackpot is high. It is possible to suggest this to the player, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, there is a determined success effect in which the first movable member 73 operates before the symbols are aligned, and a successful effect in which the first movable member 73 operates after the symbols are aligned. Since there is a winning success performance, it is possible to effectively improve the performance effect of the winning performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, there is a determined success effect in which the first movable member 73 operates before the symbols are aligned, and a successful effect in which the first movable member 73 operates after the symbols are aligned. The period from when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period to when the vibration effect (successful vibration effect) is executed is different between the success effect and effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of elation from the beginning, or to give the player a feeling of elation after stirring up the player's anxiety, and the contrasting effect can effectively improve the interest in the game. .

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, the operation period (10 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the successful decision production and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration production executed at the successful decision production. are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the performance effect of the success performance. In addition, the vibration effect can indicate to the player that he has won a jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, the vibration production (successful vibration production) that is executed at the time of the final production is accompanied by the valid period (display of the operation promotion image) of the production button 17, Display sound effects when displaying promotion images (opaque effect button images, gauge images) and effect sounds when the effect button 17 is operated during the validity period (operation sound effects, success sound effects, operation sound effects of movable members, etc.) ) is now output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the winning success performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, when the production patterns 70a in the display mode that does not include characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (designs aligned), a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration) Since the player can effectively notify the player that he or she has won a jackpot, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, when the production symbols 70a of the display mode including characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (C symbols aligned), a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration) performance) is now executed. Therefore, the player can reconfirm that he or she has won the jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, the vibration production (opening vibration production) that is executed at the time of a temporary stop when three production symbols 70a are aligned or at the opening of a jackpot game can be performed by pressing the production button 17 does not have a valid period (display of operation promotion image), so the display sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. Sounds (operation sound effects, other sound effects, etc.) are not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 74 to 77, the execution period of the vibration production that is executed at the time of a successful decision production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs were configured to continue emitting light during the validity period related to the fixed performance, but if the performance button 17 is operated immediately before the validity period occurs or from the start of the occurrence, or the validity period changes. Until the time elapses, some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off, and when a successful performance is determined by operating the performance button 17 or by elapse of the valid time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. It may also be made to emit light. In this way, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 were configured to emit rainbow light when the game board was successfully executed. Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light, while the production button 17 and some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off. You can.

When executing the successful decision effect, the first movable member 73, the multiple game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 are set to start emitting rainbow light at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may start first and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the multiple game board decoration LEDs, or the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 may start first and then the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17, or the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may start first and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the multiple game board decoration LEDs.

In addition, after the blessing performance ended, the multiple game board decoration LEDs resumed their light emission and the performance button 17 turned off, but even after the blessing performance ended, the game board decoration LEDs continued to emit rainbow light. The effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the re-lottery effect, or the effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the eye-catching effect, or the rainbow emission may be restarted until the main stop of the effect pattern 70a. may be continued.

In addition, when executing the promotion success effect, multiple game board decoration LEDs and the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 were started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first, and then the multiple game board decoration LEDs were started simultaneously. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

In addition, when the SPSP reach effect is executed, the effect of the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, and then the effect pattern 70a is stopped. If the result of the reach effect is a loss, the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, and then the effect pattern 70a is stopped. Alternatively, the performance pattern 70a may be stopped in the display mode of only numbers without performing the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including characters.

In addition, regarding the vibration performance that is executed at the time of successful decision performance, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated) (The execution period of the vibration effect may be varied) until 3 seconds later.

In addition, although the vibration effect is executed when a successful decision is made or when a promotion is successful, the vibration effect may be executed when a successful decision is made, but not when the promotion is successful. The reverse may be done, or the vibration presentation may not be performed during the successful decision presentation and the promotion successful presentation.

Further, a vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a containing only numbers after a blessing effect, or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a including a character after an eye-catching effect. However, when a jackpot roll is temporarily stopped by the number-only performance pattern 70a after the blessing performance, a vibration performance is executed, while a vibration performance is executed when a jackpot roll is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including a character after an eye-catching performance. You may choose not to do so, or vice versa, or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the number-only performance pattern 70a after the blessing performance, and a jackpot by the performance pattern 70a including characters after the eye-catching performance. The vibration effect may not be performed during the temporary stop.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a stops displaying (even during the deciding effect, the icon before the winning opening lamp NR is hidden) Although the light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display mode, the light may be emitted and turned off in conjunction with the light emission mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Example of production when a fixed mission production is executed during a jackpot)
With reference to FIG. 78, an example of a performance in the case where a variable probability mission performance is executed to determine whether or not a variable probability game state will be entered during a jackpot (round game) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), when the opening performance of the jackpot game starts, a strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started. ) is started, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration performance ends, the opening performance of the jackpot game ends, and the first round game begins.

After that, when the interval period after the first round game ends and the second round game starts, as shown in FIG. is started, and the words ``You are guaranteed to defeat the enemy'' are displayed until the second round game ends.

Then, when the interval period after the second round game ends and the third round game starts, the effective period (single press for 5 seconds) of the production button 17 occurs, as shown in FIG. 78(c). The mission performance will begin. Specifically, the words "Destroy" are displayed, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed. , the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 emits white light. At this time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board illumination device) continue to emit light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a mission success effect is started as shown in FIG. 78(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. Further, a strong vibration performance (promotional vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds is started, and a part or all of the performance button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit rainbow light.

After that, when the mission success effect ends, as shown in FIG. The effect light emission of the decorative LED is restarted, and when the third round game ends, the word "defeat" is erased and the round effect is restarted.

Then, when the ninth round game is started, as shown in FIG. A time period of at least 11 seconds (from the start until 5 seconds has elapsed) occurs, and mode selection performance for selecting the performance mode in the variable probability game state is started. Specifically, the option image for production mode D and the option image for production mode E are displayed, and the text ``Please select the mode that is currently changing with the cross key and confirm with the button!'' appears in white as an operation promotion image. An opaque effect button image imitating the emitting effect button 17 is displayed.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 18 is operated, as shown in FIG. 78(g), the option image of production mode D is selected (the option image of production mode E is displayed in dark color). A state is reached in which the option image of presentation mode E is selected (the option image of presentation mode D is displayed in dark color).

Then, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the selection image of the performance mode E is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. E is notified and the mode selection performance ends. Thereafter, when the 10th round game ends, an ending performance is executed, and when the ending performance ends, a variable probability game state is started.

Note that when the mission failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the first image display device 70 displays a failure effect image and outputs a failure sound effect. . Furthermore, the mode selection effect is not executed and the ending effect is shifted to.

As described above, according to the production example shown in FIG. 78, the operation period (5 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the mission success production and the execution period of the vibration production (promotion vibration production) executed during the mission success production. (5 seconds) are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the presentation effect of the mission success presentation. Further, the vibration effect can suggest to the player that the result is advantageous to the player, that is, that a probability change state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 78, since the vibration production (promotion vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17, the operation promotion images (opaque production button image, gauge image ) when displaying the effect and the effect sound (success sound effect) when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the winning success performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 78, the execution period of the vibration production (promotion vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 78, even if the production button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the mode selection production, the vibration production is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences in which players are misled into thinking that the jackpot expectation is higher in the selected presentation mode than in the unselected presentation mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

In addition, multiple game board decoration LEDs were designed to continue emitting light during the validity period related to the variable mission production, but if the production button 17 is operated immediately before or from the start of the validity period, the validity period will change. Until the elapse of time, some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off, and when performing a mission success effect by operating the effect button 17 or by elapse of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. It may be possible to emit rainbow light. In this way, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Furthermore, during the mission success presentation, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the presentation button 17 were configured to emit rainbow light; Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light, while the production button 17 and some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off. You can.

In addition, when executing the mission success effect, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 were started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start emitting rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start emitting rainbow light, and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs start emitting rainbow light. And the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first, and then the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs is started. You can.

In addition, the vibration effect that is executed during the mission success effect will be performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period expires if the effect button 17 is not operated) (The execution period of the vibration effect may be varied) until 3 seconds later.

Further, although the vibration effect is executed when the mission is successful, the vibration effect may not be executed when the mission is successful.

(Example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during the execution of the icon change performance and lamp change performance)
An example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change performance and the lamp change performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), when the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, "728 ” is displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the section 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, thereby starting the icon change effect, and accordingly, the winning opening lamp NR changes from the off state to blinking red. When the state changes, the lamp change effect starts.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79(c), the effect pattern 70a of "3" is stopped displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, and the center variable display area is A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed variably is executed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 79(d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased together with the pending icon.

Thereafter, when the SPSP reaches reach, as shown in FIG. 79(e), the SPSP reach effect is started and the icon display area 70C in which the icon is displayed is erased together with the icon. At this time, the winning a prize opening lamp NR does not turn off as the icon disappears, and the lamp change performance in the winning a prize opening lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, as shown in FIG. 79(f), the image display device becomes non-display and the winning slot lamp NR is turned off.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 80(g), an initial screen including the words "Loading" is displayed on the image display device, but the winning slot lamp NR is turned off. maintain the condition.

Then, when the production control board 130 receives the second power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. The returning screen including is displayed for the duration of the SPSP reach effect (including the execution period of the re-lottery effect to determine whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect symbol will be promoted to a jackpot effect symbol with higher value for the player). However, the winning opening lamp NR remains in the off state here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that results in a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. 80(i), a temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a ( A stop screen (second standby screen) is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display) without any shaking fluctuation). , the variable effect ends without restarting the lamp change effect.

At this time, the same white icon as before the power supply was stopped is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but a rectangular icon is displayed. By displaying the area image, a display space (display area) for the icon is secured in a state where an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 80(j), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started and is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2. The first pending icon (white icon) shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special pattern stop designation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 80(k), a temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a ( The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "777" (which formed the reach state before the power cutoff) indicates the type of the current jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing any swing fluctuation/swing display). A combination of performance symbols different from the reach combination according to the production symbol "3↓3") and a stop screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) will be displayed, and a lamp change effect will be displayed with the winning opening lamp NR. The variable performance ends without restarting.

In addition to the variation production in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variation productions (variation production in which a normal variation is executed, variation production in which a shortened variation is executed, variation production in which a normal reach production is executed, SP reach production) Regarding the fluctuating performance), when the power supply that was stopped during the execution is restarted and the execution period of the performance ends, the temporary stop display (swinging fluctuation/swinging display) of the performance pattern 70a is not performed and " 753'' loss effect pattern 70a, or a jackpot effect pattern that is the same combination of effect patterns or a combination of different effect patterns as the reach combination based on the effect patterns that formed the reach state before the power cut-off is displayed in a stopped state (static display). will be done.

In addition, regarding the special symbol TZ, it depends on whether the game control state is initialized or restored, whether the subsequent state is the normal gaming state, or the specific gaming state (low accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state). Regardless of whether there is a special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ has the same display mode (shape, design) and is statically displayed (statically displayed) with numbers that are the same combination as the performance symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 80(l), the image display device displays information indicating the type of jackpot game ("MAX jackpot" indicating that it is the first jackpot game). The opening performance including the first pending icon display area 70B, the second pending icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

Although the winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or returning screen is displayed, the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot) ) may turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, the power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating production in which the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking variation) and then stopped is restarted. After the control state of the game is restored, the special symbol stop designation command is issued after the special symbol fluctuation time has passed (if the special symbol stop designation command is missed and the state then shifts to the customer waiting state, the customer waiting state When a state designation command) is received, the performance pattern 70a is not temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation/swinging display) but is displayed stopped (still display). Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, the production symbols 70a are displayed in a stopped state (static display) after the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the loss variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the combination of performance symbols that are the initial symbols when the power is restored is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) instead of the normal loss performance symbols. Therefore, there is no need to perform complicated processing such as determining by lottery the performance symbols to be displayed statically, and the power restoration restores the control state of the game, and is executed when the power supply stops. It becomes possible to understand that the fluctuating performance that was being performed has ended.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, the production symbols are displayed in a stopped state (static display) after the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the jackpot effect symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state (static display). Therefore, it is possible to understand that the control state of the game is restored due to the power supply restoration, and that the fluctuating performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped was a jackpot fluctuating performance.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, when the combination of jackpot production symbols is displayed in a stopped state (static display) after the control state of the game is restored, a reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (still display) a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is different from the reach combination based on the effect patterns that were previously used. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of the jackpot effect symbols that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, if the fluctuating production that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped includes the execution period of the promotion production described above, the power supply is resumed and the control is performed. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect symbols are stopped and displayed (stationary display) without executing the promotion effect. Therefore, since no unnecessary effects are performed before the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (statically displayed), the player is immediately informed that the variable effect that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped was a jackpot variable effect. It becomes possible to understand the

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, there are two cases in which the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the loss variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and a case in which the power supply stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation production is restored. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after power supply is restarted is the same as when power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it is possible to perform simple display control without being aware of whether a loss fluctuation effect or a jackpot fluctuation effect is being executed, and the processing load associated with display control after power supply is resumed. It becomes possible to reduce the

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, for the special symbol TZ, after the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display mode is the same as before the power supply was stopped. Then, numbers that are in the same combination as the effect pattern 70a are displayed in a stopped state (statically displayed). Therefore, it becomes easier to understand that the fluctuating performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, if the power supply that was stopped while the icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next screen is displayed after the display of the returning screen is finished. Until the fluctuation effect (scrolling of the effect pattern 70a) starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is changed to a background image, etc. The effect image is secured in a state where it can be displayed, but the icon is not displayed. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, if the power supply that was stopped while the pending icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next Until the fluctuation effect starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the hold icon display area, so that the display space (display area) of the hold icon is in a state where it is possible to display a effect image such as a background image. It is now reserved and a pending icon is displayed. Therefore, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to know that the suspended variable performance has not disappeared, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, the variable production (winning opening lamp NR) corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production is changed to the lighting color (blue, red, etc.) with high expectation of winning the jackpot. If the power supply that was stopped during the memorization of the special figure judgment information that will change to , rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR will be hit as a jackpot without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (lights off or lit in white) does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as the lamp change performance being restarted even though the fluctuating performance has not been executed.

In addition, after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect ends, a stop screen with the jackpot effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ stopped is displayed, but as in the case of a loss, when the power is restored, A second standby screen may be displayed in which the initial symbol "753" production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

In addition, after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuating effect ends, a stop screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed, but the jackpot effect pattern 70a is displayed without displaying the stop screen. It is also possible to start an opening performance of a jackpot game in which the is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed in the opening performance, a jackpot special symbol TZ of "777" may be displayed, or a special symbol "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. TZ may also be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the loss fluctuation performance ends, the performance symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation performance ends, the jackpot The opening performance of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the performance symbols 70a and the special symbols TZ are stopped and displayed.

In addition, if it is possible to perform a specific performance that incites whether or not a jackpot game will be executed without displaying the production symbol 70a in a reach state in a variable production (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed), the specification After the power supply that was stopped during execution of the performance is resumed and the control state is restored, if it is a loss, the performance symbol 70a which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration is stopped (statically displayed), and if it is a jackpot, the performance symbol 70a is displayed in a stopped state (static display). The jackpot effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display).

In addition, when the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) after the control state of the game is restored, one of the combinations of jackpot effect symbols corresponding to the type of jackpot game to be executed thereafter. may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is "333" and "777", and the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is "222" and " 444'', ``666'', and ``888'', and the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is ``111'', ``555'', and ``999''.

If the reach combination before the power supply is stopped is "1↓1" which constitutes a part of the jackpot effect symbol combination that suggests the execution of the third jackpot game, then the jackpot game to be executed after that is the first jackpot game. In the case of a jackpot game, either "333" or "777" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is different from the reach combination based on the effect symbols that formed the reach state) is stopped and displayed, and then the game is executed. If the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, any one of "111", "555", and "999" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is the same as or different from the reach combination of the effect symbols that formed the reach state) It is a good idea to stop and display the .

In addition, regarding the special symbol TZ, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, instead of being displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) with numbers that are the same combination as the production symbol 70a, it becomes a combination different from the production symbol 70a. The display may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) using numbers.

In addition, if the normal gaming state and the customer waiting state occur after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (stationary display), while the power supply is stopped. After restarting and restoring the control state, if the specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state) and customer waiting state, the production pattern 70a is not displayed in a stopped state (static display), The special symbol TZ may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display).

(Example of effects when restarting after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during execution of look-ahead effect effect, pending icon change effect, and lamp change effect)
FIGS. 81 and 82 are diagrams illustrating an example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the prefetch effect performance, the pending icon change performance, and the lamp change performance.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1, second display section 70B2, and third display section 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the loss effect pattern 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed when the player is in the game.

After that, when the pre-variation variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 81(b), the variation display of the production pattern 70a is started, and the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and The first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the third display section 70B3 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C, the first display section 70B1, and the second display section 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, thereby starting the first effect of the look-ahead effect, and the first pending icon ( When the display mode of the final icon display mode (red icon) changes to a blue icon, the pending icon change effect starts, and accordingly, the winning slot lamp NR changes from an off state to a blinking blue state, and the lamp changes to a blue icon. The change production begins.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81(c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect pattern 70a is erased, and the effect image 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 81(d), after the performance symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss performance symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. .

After that, when the pre-variation variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. The displayed first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, by displaying the effect image EF around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, the second look-ahead effect effect is started, and the pending icon change effect and lamp change effect continue. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81(f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect pattern 70a is erased, and the effect image 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, as shown in FIG. 81(g), the image display device becomes non-display and the winning slot lamp NR is turned off.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. To maintain a state where the lights are turned off without restarting the change performance.

Then, when the production control board 130 receives the second power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. A returning screen including the above is displayed during the execution period of the advance variation, but the winning a prize opening lamp NR remains in the off state here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the advance variation ends (the production control board 130 receives a special symbol stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. Without doing so, a stop screen with the initial symbol 753, the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (statically displayed), and the lamp change effect does not restart. The fluctuation ends.

At this time, the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B displays a white icon instead of the blue icon before the power supply is stopped, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. By displaying a rectangular area image, a display space (display area) for the icon is secured in a state where an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 82(k), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the 1 pending icon (white icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, if a lottery regarding the newly executed icon change performance is won, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a blue icon according to the result, and the icon changes. The performance begins. On the other hand, since the lottery related to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the prize opening lamp NR remains in the off state and the lamp change effect is not restarted.

In addition, if you win the lottery regarding the alternative preview performance that will be held when the power supply is resumed, the mini character MCB will be displayed on the image display device according to the result, and the mini character MCB will move out of the frame and replace it. A preview performance is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 82(l), the lines uttered by ally A are displayed in the lines window displayed on the image display device, and the audio output device 9 emits a voice corresponding to the lines, "Your chance has arrived!" When the is displayed, the dialogue preview performance is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 82(m), the effect pattern 70a of "3" is stopped displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, and the center variable display area is A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed variably is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 82(n), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when the SPSP reach is reached, as shown in FIG. 82(o), the SPSP reach effect is started and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 82(p), the current jackpot game (here, the first The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "333" indicating the type of one jackpot game (1 jackpot game) and the special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (fluctuation fluctuation) and then stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation performance ends.

Although the winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or returning screen is displayed, the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the expectation of winning a jackpot) ) may turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

In addition, if the special figure stop designation command cannot be received during the fluctuation performance (temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) of the performance pattern 70a), the performance pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped displaying (shaking fluctuation) will not be displayed stop. , the temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) will continue.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the look-ahead effect production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure that was stored at the time of restoration is restored. In the variable performance corresponding to the determination information, an alternative preview performance different from the continuous preview performance can be executed without restarting the continuous preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player caused by the termination of the continuous notice performance due to the stoppage of power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The same applies to the case where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of another continuous notice performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when the icon is displayed as a special icon (including cases where the final display mode has not changed and cases where the final display mode has changed) When the power supply that was stopped while the icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the pending icon that was displayed as a special icon is displayed as a normal icon. Therefore, the user does not need to be aware of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the icon change production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information that was stored at the time of recovery In the variable performance corresponding to , the pending icon change performance is not executed, but the icon change performance can be executed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the icon change effect due to the stop of power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, even when the icon change production is executed again while the variation production corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration is being executed, The process will no longer continue from the stage that was suggested before the power supply was cut off. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change performance that matches the content of the current variation performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the variable production (winning opening lamp NR) corresponding to the pending icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production is changed to the lighting color (blue, red, etc.) with high expectation of winning the jackpot. Even if the power supply that was stopped during the memorization of the special figure judgment information that will cause the lamp to change to a rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the winning slot will not restart without restarting the lamp change effect. The lamp NR is set in a notification mode (unlit or lit white) that does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as the lamp change performance being restarted even though the fluctuating performance has not been executed.

(Specific example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 1 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. FIG. 83 is a timing chart 1 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 84(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 1 of FIG. 83. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode. ", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. will be displayed as . In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). In addition, the icon TI is in a state where it is performing a rotating action (acting action).

In addition, the "specific update mode" when switching the special figure reservation number (corresponding to the second reservation display) displayed on the first reservation number display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is the reservation icon This display mode is different from the display mode when additionally displaying (corresponding to the first pending display) (increasing display) or shifting display (decrease display). Specifically, the display mode is such that the display contents are switched using one frame of non-animation.

Further, the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ is performed by blinking the LED of the sub-first variable display 81, but since blinking cannot be expressed in the drawing, the variable display is expressed by double circles. It shall be. Further, the LED of the sub-first hold display 83 is also indicated by a double circle to indicate that it is blinking.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "2" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a normal additional manner at the second position in the pending icon display area 70B, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output (see FIG. 84(a)).

In addition, the "normal addition mode" when additionally displaying the pending icon refers to the "normal addition mode" when additionally displaying the pending icon HI when a winning command (winning signal) that increases the pending number by one is received. This is the display mode. Specifically, the display mode is such that only one pending icon HI is additionally displayed in an area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures in an animation of 10 frames so that the pending icon HI gradually increases from a very small size.

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Also, the reserved icon HI and the icon TI are rotating (performance motion) (see Figure 84 (b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 84(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 84(d)). .

Thereafter, at timing T5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons was completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 84(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 84(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation accordingly (see FIG. 84(f)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 84(g)).

Then, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 84) g)).

Then, at timing T9, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 84(h)).

Next, at timing T10, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("962"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the icon TI continues to rotate (actual effect) (see FIG. 84(i)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. (See FIG. 84(i)).

Then, at timing T12, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is "0", so the state is set to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). to move to. When the performance control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the variable performance.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (actual stop), and the special symbols TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ comes to a real stop in a losing mode (extinguished) (see FIG. 84(j)).

In addition, at the timing of T7, although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot receive the commands normally (command abnormality has occurred), the production control unit 130m will receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as in the case where the command cannot be received normally (command error has occurred) will be performed.

Here, specific example 1 has been described in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state) Even when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

In addition, if the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed, but the main control In the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the connector of the command line for communication between the board 110 and the production control board 130, no abnormality notification is performed.

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A second specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85 is a timing chart 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 86(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. 85. This is example 1 of the performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbols starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "4" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a normal additional manner at the fourth position in the pending icon display area 70B, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output (see FIG. 86(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 86(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 86(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 86(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the icon shift display is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 86(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 86(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Furthermore, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect continues (see FIG. 86(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 86(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 86(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the stop time of the special symbol passes, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The surplus hold icon HI displayed third in the hold icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (past fluctuations) including the effect pattern 70a that is shifted from the stop position are erased. The performance pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the performance is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 86(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). (See FIG. 86(h)).

Note that when the surplus reservation icons are deleted and the necessary reservation icons are displayed in a shifted manner, the surplus reservation icons may be left as they are and the necessary reservation icons are displayed in a shifted manner.

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 86(i)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is able to normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable performance is executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first special symbol pending number becomes “0”. Also in (target of expectation level suggestion by look-ahead zone effect), normal zone effects (display of look-ahead zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are executed according to the preview scenario, and the effect pattern 70a is the main one. The look-ahead zone effect ends when it stops.

Note that at timings T7 to T9, the production control unit 130m successfully received the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T10, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "1". 4" to "2", and when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number grasped by the production control unit 130m. If the deviation from the current number of reservations is "2", the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In addition, here, specific example 2 was explained where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (a command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A third specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 87. FIG. 85 is a timing chart 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 87(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. 85. This is a second example of a performance.

Note that FIG. 86 and FIG. 87 differ in that a look-ahead effect performance is performed instead of a look-ahead zone performance as a continuous preview performance, and an icon change performance is also performed, so a description of the common parts will be omitted here. However, only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI (FIG. 87). d)).

Further, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound effect is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 87(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is started. Specifically, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 87(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI continue (see FIG. 87(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Furthermore, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 87(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 87(g) is maintained without performing the prefetch effect production (displaying the effect image EF, outputting the effect sound effect).

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 87(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The surplus hold icon HI displayed second in the hold icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and the third hold icon HI displayed is erased with one frame of non-animation. Displayed second. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 87(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Moreover, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the pre-read effect production is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a according to the preview scenario, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 87(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the completion of the shift display of the icon, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, the icon change production is executed, and the production pattern 70a is moved at high speed. will be in a scrolled state. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a red icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 87(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation that is executed during the variation display of the special symbol where the first special symbol pending number becomes “0” Also in the performance (the object of which the expectation level is suggested by the pre-read preview performance), the pre-read effect performance (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change performance (the icon change performance) are executed. Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a stops displaying, and the icon change performance ends.

Note that at timings T7 to T9, the production control unit 130m successfully received the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T10, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "1". 4" to "2", and when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number grasped by the production control unit 130m. If the deviation from the current number of reservations is "2", the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In addition, here, specific example 3 was explained in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (first hold information), if the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number, the surplus reserved icons out of the specific number of reserved icons are displayed. (For example, the third pending icon) is not shifted and displayed, but the required number of pending icons (for example, the first and second pending icons) are displayed in a shifted manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) (first hold information) If the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number while displaying the number, the production control unit 130m displays a number of reserved icons that are one less than the specific number. A predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 85 to 87, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, one) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. For example, if the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a predetermined number while displaying the number of pending special drawings (for example, 3), the number is one less than the specific number. Instead of displaying the number of pending items, a predetermined number of pending items is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 4 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A fourth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. FIG. 88 is a timing chart 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 89(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. 88. This is example 1 of the performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbols starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "4" in a specific update mode, and A hold icon HI is additionally displayed in the fourth place of the hold icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output (see FIG. 89(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 89(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 89(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 89(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the icon shift display is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 89(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 89(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Further, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect continues (see FIG. 89(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 89(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 89(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 89(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to normally receive the stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality has occurred), the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 89 (g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "0" in a specific update mode, and The surplus hold icons HI displayed in the second and third positions of the hold icon display area 70B are erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (including the effect pattern 70a that is shifted from the stop position) are erased. The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 89(h)).

Then, one necessary hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). (See FIG. 89(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T13, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 89(i)).

Thereafter, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the look-ahead zone performance ends when the performance symbol 70a comes to a final stop.

In addition, at the timing of T7 to T11, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T12, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". If the difference between the number of reservations known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations known by the production control unit 130m is ``3'', the basic flow changes from ``4'' to ``1''. is the same as the explanation above.

In addition, here, specific example 4 has been described in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 5 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 90. FIG. 88 is a timing chart 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 90(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. 88. This is a second example of a performance.

Note that FIG. 89 and FIG. 90 differ in that a look-ahead effect performance is performed instead of a look-ahead zone performance as a continuous preview performance, and an icon change performance is also performed, so a description of the common parts will be omitted here. However, only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols begins. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 90(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is started. Specifically, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 90(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 90(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Further, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 90(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (because a command error has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 90(g) is maintained without performing the pre-reading effect production (displaying the effect image EF, outputting the effect sound effect).

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 90(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 90(g) is maintained without performing the pre-reading effect production (displaying the effect image EF, outputting the effect sound effect).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period is extended (see FIG. 90(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "0" in a specific update mode, and The surplus hold icons HI displayed first and second in the hold icon display area 70B are erased with one frame of non-animation, and the third hold icon HI is erased with one frame of non-animation. Displayed first in non-animated form. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position.

Then, one necessary hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Moreover, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the pre-read effect production is executed. Specifically, a red effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 90(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T13, the icon change performance is executed at the same time as the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect performance is completed, and the performance pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotating operation (presentation operation) (see FIG. 90(i)).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

Note that at timings T7 to T11, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T12, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". If the difference between the number of reservations known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations known by the production control unit 130m is ``3'', the basic flow changes from ``4'' to ``1''. is the same as the explanation above.

In addition, here, specific example 5 was explained in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 90, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (first hold icon) that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) are information), if the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number, a number of reserved icons one less than the specific number will be displayed. A predetermined number of pending icons are displayed without having to do so. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 88 to 90, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (first hold information) that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) If the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number while the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number, the number of reserved icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed. The number of pending icons that are two less than the specific number is displayed, and then a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 88 to 90, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, one) that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. For example, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a predetermined number while displaying the number of pending special drawings (for example, 4), one and two A predetermined number of pending numbers is displayed without displaying a smaller number of pending numbers. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 6 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 6 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is a timing chart 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands, and FIGS. 92(a) to (h) correspond to timing charts 4 (a) to (h) in FIG. 91. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbols starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "4" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a normal additional manner at the fourth position in the pending icon display area 70B, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output (see FIG. 92(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 92(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 92(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 92(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the shift display of the icons is completed, the pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Additionally, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 92(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 92(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, and output of zone BGM) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (Fig. 92 ( g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 92(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 92(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality has occurred), the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and no processing will be performed to start the variable performance. Therefore, the state of FIG. 92(g) will be maintained.

Thereafter, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 92(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m will remain at "3", and the process to start the variable production will not be performed. Become. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 92(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T13, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 92(g) is maintained.

Thereafter, at timing T14, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0". ” and a process is performed to set a waiting timer until the customer waiting demonstration performance starts.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "0" in a specific update mode, and The surplus pending icons HI displayed in the first to third positions of the pending icon display area 70B and the icons displayed in the icon display area 70C are erased with one frame of non-animation, and the icon change effect and The look-ahead zone performance ends. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived and displayed), and , the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ comes to a final stop in a loss mode (extinguished) (see FIG. 92(h)).

Note that at timings T7 to T13, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

Here, a case has been described in which the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command in a state where the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) is "3" at timing T14. Even when the customer waiting state designation command is received when the number of reservations is ``4'', ``2'', or ``1'', the basic flow is the same as described above.

In addition, here, specific example 6 has been described in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as that described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the predetermined All the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production), including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position that has been set, are now displayed at the stop position (actual stop). ing. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the variable performance has ended (transition to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 7 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 7 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 93 and 94. FIG. 93 is a timing chart 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 94(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 5 of FIG. 93. This is an example of a performance.

Note that FIG. 91 and FIG. 93 differ only in that the command received at timing T14 is a customer waiting designation command or an opening designation command, so the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and the differences will be omitted here. Only parts will be explained.

At timing T14, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains “3”, and it is a jackpot. Processing for starting the opening performance of the game is performed.

At this time, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E remains "3", and is displayed on the production pattern 70a and the icon display area. The pending icon HI and the corresponding icon are deleted, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are completed. In addition, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), the first lamp symbol LZ comes to a final stop in a loss mode (extinguished), and the opening effect image is displayed (Fig. 94 ( h)).

After that, during the jackpot game or after the end of the jackpot game (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), if the production control unit 130m can normally receive the first special figure reservation number designation command from the main control unit 110m. , the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is updated (increased) to the number corresponding to the number of first reserved special symbols designation command in a specific update mode. display, decrease display).

Note that at timings T7 to T13, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

Here, a case has been described in which the opening designation command is received at the timing of T14 when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "3". Even when the opening designation command is received when the number is "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

In addition, here, specific example 7 was explained where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the predetermined All of the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance), including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position, are not displayed at the stop position (actual stop), and the jackpot game The opening performance image is displayed. Therefore, the opening performance is not hindered by the performance symbols, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 8 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. 95 is a timing chart 6 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 96(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. 95. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, when the shift display of the icons is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and an icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 96(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the processing for updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 96(b)).

Thereafter, at timing T3, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 96(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the pre-read zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, the pre-read zone effect continues, the blue icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (Fig. 96 ( d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the number of reserved symbols decreases from "2" to "1". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. Then, the first special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1", that is, the process for starting the variable production without changing the first special figure reservation number. will be held.

At this time, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is maintained at "1", and the second number of the first reservation icon display area 70B is displayed. A hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a special additional manner. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 96(e)).

In addition, the "special additional mode" when additionally displaying (increasingly displaying) the hold icon (corresponding to the first hold display) upon reception of the start time command (start time signal) means that the production control unit 130m is connected to the main control unit 110m. This is a display mode when the number of reserved special drawings changes, which cannot occur unless the command from the player is normally received. Specifically, the display mode is such that the hold icon (corresponding to the first hold display) is additionally displayed as one frame of non-animation so that it has a normal size from the beginning. In addition, the special addition modes include a special addition mode that displays one additional hold icon, a special addition mode that additionally displays two hold icons at the same time, a special addition mode that additionally displays three hold icons at the same time, and a special addition mode that displays three hold icons at the same time. There is a special addition mode in which two items are additionally displayed at the same time.

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 96( (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the additional mode, the same operation mode is used to perform the performance operation (see FIG. 96(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance (the SP ready-to-win performance ends), the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a reach-missing mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating operation (acting operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 96(g)).

Then, at timing T8, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 96(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T9, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 96(i)).

Next, at timing T10, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon, and A changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 96(j) )reference).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

Note that at timings T2 to T4, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the commands (commands at the time of winning, commands at the time of stopping) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands sent from the main control unit 110m (winning command, stop command) The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T5, a case has been described in which the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1", but the first special figure pending number is "1". 0" to "0", when the number of reserved 1st special drawings changes from "2" to "2", when the number of 1st reserved special drawings changes from "3" to "3", in other words, the main control If the number of reservations stored (understood) by the section 110m and the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control section 130m are the same, the basic flow will be the same as described above.

In addition, here, specific example 8 has been described in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of reservation icons (first reservation information) are displayed in the reservation icon display area, the number of reserved special drawings is set to a predetermined number. When the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display that is a number, it displays one more (for example, two) hold icons than the predetermined number, and then displays those hold icons. By shifting and displaying, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of reserved numbers is displayed on the sub-first reserved display 83 or the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E, When the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display in which the number of pending figures becomes a predetermined number, the number of pending figures that is one more (for example, two) than the predetermined number is not displayed. , a predetermined number of pending items is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, although the reservation icon (first reservation information) is not displayed in the reservation icon display area, the number of reserved special drawings is "0" while the icon is displayed. When the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display that is By using shift display, the hold icon is not displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, while the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is displaying the number of reservations of "0", the number of special symbols reservation is When the production control unit 130m receives a start command (start signal) for a variable display that becomes "0", the number of pending events that is one more than "0" (for example, one) is not displayed, and "0" is displayed. 0" is displayed (maintained). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 8 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a timing chart 7 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 98(a) to (f) correspond to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. 97. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, when the shift display of the icons is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and an icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 98 (see (a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure reservation number designation command as a winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (a command error has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 98(b)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T3, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" as a game ball enters the first starting port 45. At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1".

Thereafter, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 98(c)).

Next, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), processing to end the variable production. is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the pre-read zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, the pre-read zone effect continues, the blue icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (Fig. 98 ( d)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. Then, the first special symbol reservation number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "2", that is, the first special symbol reservation number increases by 1 and a process is performed to start the variable production. be exposed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "2" in a specific update mode, and Hold icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed in the second and third positions of the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode (two icons at the same time) (see FIG. 98(e)).

In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 98(e)).

Then, the necessary three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an expansion/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 98 ( (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the fluctuating display of the production pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special addition). Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the mode or not, the state is such that the performance operation) is performed in the same motion mode (see FIG. 98(f)).

Note that at timings T2 to T5, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (commands at the time of winning, commands at the time of stopping) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred), the commands sent from the main control unit 110m (winning command, stop command) The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

Here, at the timing of T6, a case has been described in which the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "2", but the first special figure pending number is "2". When the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1", when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "2" to "3", when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "3" to "4", in other words, the main control If the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control section 110m is one more than the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control section 130m, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation. becomes.

Specifically, when the production control unit 130m receives a start command (a first special symbol reservation number command as a start signal, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. , the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is increased by "1" in the specific update mode, and the production control unit 130m memorizes (understands) ), when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "2" to "3", the reserved icons HI (white icons) are displayed in a special additional mode in the third and fourth positions of the first reserved icon display area 70B. (Two at the same time) will be additionally displayed. Then, the pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, here, specific example 9 was explained where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, variable probability gaming Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A tenth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. 99 is a timing chart 8 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 100(a) to (f) correspond to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 8 of FIG. 99. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process for starting a variable production is performed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, when the shift display of the icons is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and an icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (performance operation) (Fig. 100 (see (a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 100(b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of first special symbols reserved that is stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 100(b)).

Next, at timing T4, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 100(b)).

Then, at timing T5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI continue (see FIG. 100(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the variable production will be terminated. processing will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, and output of the zone BGM) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (Fig. 100 ( d)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. Then, the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "3" in a specific update mode, and Hold icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed in the second to fourth positions of the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode (three at the same time). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 100(e)).

Then, the necessary four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an expansion/contraction operation (preparation operation) (Fig. 100 ( (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the additional mode, the same operation mode is used to perform the performance operation (see FIG. 100(f)).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

It should be noted that at timings T2 to T6, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (command at the time of winning, command at the time of stopping, command at the time of starting) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m (command abnormality has occurred), the command sent from the main control unit 110m (winning command, The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of stopping and the command at the time of starting (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

Here, at the timing of T7, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "3". When the number of reserved first special symbols changes from "0" to "2", when the number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "4", in other words, the number of reservations stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is higher than the number reserved for production control. If there are two more reservations than the number stored (kept) by the unit 130m, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

In addition, at the timing of T7, if the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "0" to "3", the first special figure pending number changes from "1" to "4". ”, that is, the number of reservations stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is 3 more than the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m. The flow is similar to the explanation above.

Specifically, when the production control unit 130m receives a start command (a first special symbol reservation number command as a start signal, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. , the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is increased and displayed to "3" in a specific update mode, and the production control unit 130m memorizes (understands) ), when the number of reserved first special symbols changes from "0" to "3", the production control unit 130m stores (understands) the first to fourth reserved icons in the first reserved icon display area 70B. When the number of reserved first special figures changes from "1" to "4," the reserved icons HI (white icons) are displayed in the special additional mode (three (simultaneously) will be additionally displayed. Then, the pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, here, specific example 10 was explained in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special chart reserved number, the first special chart reserved number designation command, the first special pattern, the sub-first reserved indicator 83, the first special chart reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first start port 45 should be read as the second special chart reserved number, the second special chart reserved number designation command, the second special pattern, the sub-second reserved indicator 84, the second special chart reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second start port 47.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 97 to 100, when a start command (start signal) indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is one more than the number of displayed reservation icons is received. , there is a special addition mode (display mode in which the pending icon HI is displayed in a 10-frame animation that gradually increases from a very small size to an additional display mode), which is different from the normal addition mode (display mode in which the pending icon HI gradually increases from a very small size to an additional display mode of 10 frames). The pending icon is additionally displayed (increased display) in a display mode in which one frame of non-animation is additionally displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 97 to 100, when a start time command (start time signal) indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is more than the number of displayed reservation icons is received, A special addition mode (display mode in which only one additional hold icon HI is displayed in 10 frames of animation so that the hold icon HI gradually increases from a very small size) is different from the normal addition mode (a display mode in which the pending icon HI gradually increases from a very small size to an additional display mode). The pending icon is additionally displayed (increased display) in the non-animated additional display mode). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 97 to 100, when a start time command (start time signal) indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is greater than the number of displayed hold icons is received, the reception After adding and displaying (increasing display) the number of reservation icons that are one more than the number of reserved special drawings received, the number of reservation icons corresponding to the number of special drawings reservation received is displayed by shifting and displaying those reservation icons (decreasing display). A hold icon is now displayed. Therefore, it is possible to correct the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations while informing the player that the number of reservations has decreased, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Summary of specific examples shown in Figures 83 to 100)
As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 83 to 100, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (stop signal) during the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a (command abnormality occurs). In this case, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the fluctuation period of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ, and the output period of the fluctuating BGM are extended (continued) from the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period in which no performance is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 83 to 100, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the scrolling of the background image, the pending icon, and the rotation of the icon continue. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming extremely static and boring during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 83 to 100, even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the pre-reading notice production (icon change production, pre-reading zone production) is continued (executed). It looks like this. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the pre-read preview performance will not end, and the game can be improved by avoiding inconveniences that may cause player dissatisfaction. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 83 to 100, when the pre-reading notice presentation (icon change presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern 70a, Even if there is, the preview mode (type of icon, type of zone performance) of the pre-read preview performance does not change during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a. Therefore, there is no abnormality in the progress of the pre-read preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by avoiding inconveniences that may increase player dissatisfaction.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 83 to 100, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (start time signal) during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a that are deviated from the predetermined stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantly derived and displayed). The variable display starts from. Therefore, the appearance at the start of the variable performance can be made better than when the variable display is started with the performance symbols 70a deviated from the stop position, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 83 to 100, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command (start signal) during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the special The symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ are not stopped and displayed, but continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ, and it is possible to reduce the control load. Furthermore, even if the performance symbol 70a is displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived and displayed), the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ can inform the player that a variable performance is being performed, which increases the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 83 to 100, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command (start signal) during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the relevant The icon is erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than the normal time (10 frames of animation when a stop command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make the newly executed variable performance less likely to be hindered by the deletion of the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 83 to 100, the performance control unit 130m during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a in which the prefetch notice performance (icon change performance, prefetch zone performance) is continued (executed). If the start time command (start time signal) is normally received, the pre-read preview performance can be executed even in the newly executed variable performance. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the pre-read preview performance will not end, and the game can be improved by avoiding inconveniences that may cause player dissatisfaction. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 83 to 100, the performance control unit 130m during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a in which the prefetch notice performance (icon change performance, prefetch zone performance) is continued (executed). When the start time command (start time signal) is normally received, in the newly executed variable performance, it is possible to execute a performance with contents corresponding to the scenario of the pre-read preview performance. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the progress of the pre-read preview performance will not be abnormal, thereby avoiding inconveniences that may increase player dissatisfaction. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 11 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 11 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. FIG. 101 is a timing chart 9 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 102(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 9 of FIG. 101. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (presentation operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process for updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1".

At this time, since the winning command for which the first special figure reservation number is "2" has not been received, the first special figure reservation displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved figures remains "1", and the reserved icon HI is not displayed in the second position corresponding to the first reserved special figure number "2" in the first reserved icon display area 70B (FIG. 102(a)) reference).

After that, at the timing of T3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of first special symbols reserved that is stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "3" in a specific update mode, and A hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode, and a winning sound based on the current winning (the same sound as when the hold icon is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode) is output. (See FIG. 102(b)).

In addition, the "special addition mode" when additionally displaying the pending icon upon reception of the winning command (winning signal) cannot occur unless the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the command from the main control section 110m. This is a display mode when there is a change in the number of reserved special drawings. Specifically, the pending icons HI for those for which the winning command could not be received normally are not displayed, and the pending icons HI for those for which the winning command was received correspond to the number of reserved special drawings in the pending icon display area. The display mode is such that 10 frames of animation are additionally displayed in the area, starting from a very small size and gradually increasing in size. In addition, special addition modes include a special addition mode that adds and displays hold icons one by one (with a gap of one icon), and a special addition mode that adds hold icons by skipping two hold icons (with a gap of two icons). There are various types, such as a special addition mode in which the icons are displayed, and a special addition mode in which the pending icons are displayed in skips of three pending icons (with an interval of three icons).

Next, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 102(c)).

Then, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("814"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is performed at (see FIG. 102(d)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "2", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "2" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is added as a non-animated frame of 1 frame to the second reserved icon HI corresponding to the first special figure pending number "2" in which the winning command (winning signal) could not be received normally in the pending icon display area 70B. The three currently displayed pending icons HI are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 102(e)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the additional mode, the same operation mode is used to perform the performance operation (see FIG. 102(f)).

Next, at timing T8, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI continue (see FIG. 102(g)).

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in the same losing mode as the production pattern ("225"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a losing mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 102(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the number of reserved symbols decreases from "2" to "1". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 102(i)).

Next, at timing T11, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command (winning signal)) is a blue icon. At the same time, a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (FIG. 102(j)) reference).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

Note that at timing T2, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (winning command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on reception of this command Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred), the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (winning command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as when a command error occurs is performed.

Here, at the timing of T3, when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "1", the winning time command (winning prize command) in which the first special figure pending number becomes "3" is executed. As explained above, the case where the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "0" and the first special figure pending number becomes "2" is won. When the time command (win signal) is received, the number of reserved first special symbols becomes "4" when the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "2". Even when the time command (win signal) is received, the basic flow is the same as described above.

In addition, here, we have explained a specific example 11 in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

In addition, if the winning command based on winning to the first starting port 45 cannot be received normally and a smaller number of reserved special drawings than the first reserved number is displayed (reserved icon, etc.), the second starting If the prize-winning command based on the winning in the opening 47 is successfully received, the reservation display corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number is not updated, and vice versa.

(Specific example 12 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A twelfth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG. 103 is a timing chart 10 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 104(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 10 of FIG. 103. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continuing and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1".

At this time, since the winning command (winning signal) for which the first special drawing reservation number is "2" has not been received, the number is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special drawing reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special symbols remaining at "1" remains at "1", and the reservation icon HI is not displayed at the second location corresponding to the number of first reserved special symbols "2" in the first reservation icon display area 70B ( (See FIG. 104(a)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T3, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" as a game ball enters the first starting port 45. At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1".

At this time, since the winning command (winning signal) for which the first special drawing reservation number is "3" has not been received, the number is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special drawing reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings remaining at "1" will remain at "1", and the holding icon HI will not be displayed at the third position corresponding to the number of first reserved special drawings "3" in the first reservation icon display area 70B ( (See FIG. 104(b)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "1" to "4".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "4" in a specific update mode, and A hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode (skipping two icons), and a winning sound based on the current winning (same sound as when the hold icon is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode) is displayed. ) is output (see FIG. 104(c)).

Next, at timing T5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 104(d)).

Then, at timing T6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in the same losing mode as the production pattern ("814"), and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in the losing mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 104(e)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and In the pending icon display area 70B, the pending icon HI is 1 at the second and third locations corresponding to the first special drawing pending numbers "2" and "3" for which the winning command (winning signal) could not be received normally. Two frames of non-animation are added and displayed at the same time, and the displayed four pending icons HI are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 104(f)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the fluctuating display of the production pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special addition). Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the mode or not, the same motion mode is used to perform the performance operation (see FIG. 104(g)).

Next, at timing T9, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI continue (see FIG. 104(h)).

Then, at timing T10, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in the same losing mode as the production pattern ("225"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a losing mode (lights out). The main stop is performed at (see FIG. 104(i)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "2", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "2" in a specific update mode, and The three pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 104(j)).

In addition, at timings T2 and T3, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (winning command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command (command abnormality has occurred), the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (winning command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as when reception is not possible (command error has occurred) is performed.

Here, at the timing of T4, when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "1", the winning time command (winning prize command) in which the first special figure pending number becomes "4". As explained above, the case where the number of reserved first special symbols is "3" when the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "0" is won. When the time command (win signal) is received or when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is “0”, the first special figure pending number becomes “4”. Even when a winning command (winning signal) is received, the basic flow is the same as described above.

In addition, here, specific example 12 has been explained in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

In addition, if the winning command based on the winning to the first starting opening 45 cannot be received normally and the number of pending special drawings is displayed (holding icon, etc.) smaller than the number of reserved special drawings, the second starting If the prize-winning command based on the prize entered into the slot 47 is successfully received, the reservation display corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number is not updated, and vice versa.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, when a winning command (winning signal) indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is more than the displayed number of reserved icons is received, is a special addition mode (display mode in which only one pending icon is added and displayed in the area corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings), which is different from the normal addition mode (display mode in which only one pending icon is additionally displayed in the area corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings). In addition, the reserved icons are additionally displayed (increased display) in a display mode in which only one reserved icon is additionally displayed with a gap in the area corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to add and display a hold icon naturally without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, a winning command (winning command) indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is more than one number displayed in the sub-holding display or the number of reserved special drawings display area. time signal) is received, the number of pending displays on the sub-holding display and the special figure pending number display area will be increased and displayed in a specific update mode (the same mode as when no command is missed at the time of winning). There is. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, when the performance control unit 130m is not displaying the hold icon for which the winning command (winning signal) was not normally received, When the production control unit 130m receives a command (start signal), it displays the pending icons for which the winning command (winning signal) could not be received in one frame of non-animation, and then displays all pending icons. It is designed to be displayed in shift. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, after the performance control unit 130m fails to normally receive the winning command (winning signal), the next winning command (winning signal) is normally sent. If the winning command (winning signal) is successfully received, it is possible to perform an icon change effect for the icon corresponding to the winning command (winning signal) that was successfully received. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to failure to receive the winning command (winning signal) normally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, for the icons for which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command (winning signal), while they are displayed as pending icons, Although the icon change effect is not executed (restricted), the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to failure to receive the winning command (winning signal) normally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the icon change effect may not be executed even while the icon is being displayed.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the winning command ( If the winning signal) is received, the increasing effect (outputting the winning sound) based on the winning signal at the current starting opening is executed without executing the increasing effect (outputting the winning sound) multiple times. (output of the winning sound for the target) is performed once. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is confused due to the overlapping of multiple increase effects, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the winning command ( When a winning signal) is received, an increase performance (output of winning sound) is performed in the same performance mode (sound type, volume, sound length) regardless of the number of increases. Therefore, the player does not make the mistake of thinking that he or she has high expectations for a jackpot, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the winning sound as the effect at the time of increase, for example, a predetermined light emitting means (for example, the winning opening lamp NR) may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner, or while outputting the winning sound. A predetermined light emitting means may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner. Even in this case, it is preferable to perform an increase effect in the same effect mode (sound type, volume, sound output time, light emission color, light emission amount, light emission time) regardless of the increase in the number of pending icons.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the winning command ( When a winning command (winning signal) is received, the number of reserved special drawings increases by one.Increase performance (output of winning sound) is performed in the same manner as when receiving a winning command (winning signal). is designed to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform an increase effect (output of a winning sound) without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 101 to 104, whether the hold icon is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode or the hold icon is additionally displayed in the special addition mode, the same presentation mode is used. The hold icon performs a performance operation at certain points (rotation center position, rotation speed, etc.). Therefore, the player does not make the mistake of thinking that the pending icon additionally displayed in the special additional mode has a high expectation of a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification 1 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 2 described in FIGS. 85 and 86 (modification 1 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 105. FIGS. 105(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to timing charts 2 of FIG. 85 (a) to (i).

Note that since FIG. 86 and FIG. 105 are the same up to the presentation at timings T0 to T9, explanation of the common parts will be omitted here and only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T10, when the stop time of the special symbol passes, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is The symbol loss fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the main control There is an inconsistency caused by a command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the section 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control section 130m (ordinarily there is a discrepancy of 1). However, since an abnormality (deviation of 2 or more) has occurred, the look-ahead zone performance is terminated.

Specifically, the pre-read zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to the production mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the fluctuating BGM is output (see FIG. 105(h)).

In addition, the surplus hold icon HI displayed second in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased as a non-animation for one frame, and the hold icon HI displayed third is erased for one frame. It is displayed second in non-animation. All the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (FIG. 105) (see (h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 105(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 105(i)).

(Modification 2 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 3 described in FIGS. 85 and 87 (modification 2 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 106. 106(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in timing chart 2 of FIG. 85.

Note that since FIG. 87 and FIG. 106 are the same up to the presentation at timings T0 to T9, explanations of the common parts will be omitted here and only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T10, when the stop time of the special symbol passes, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is The symbol loss fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "3" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the main control There is an inconsistency caused by a command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the section 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control section 130m (ordinarily there is a discrepancy of 1). However, since an abnormality (deviation of 2 or more) has occurred, the icon change performance and the look-ahead effect performance are terminated.

Specifically, the surplus hold icon HI (blue icon) displayed third in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 106(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 106(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 106(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, a variable production is executed to display a variable display of a special symbol whose first special symbol reservation number becomes “0”. (The target of the expectation level suggestion by the pre-read preview presentation) also, the pre-read effect presentation and the icon change presentation will not be executed.

In this way, according to the modified examples shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the production control unit 130m are If an inconsistency occurs due to a command abnormality (normally a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction, but an error of 2 or more in the decreasing direction), a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect) , icon change performance, look-ahead effect performance). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the execution of a pre-read preview effect during the execution of a variable effect that is not normally subject to execution of the pre-read preview effect, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress this.

(Variation 3 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
95 and 107, a modified example (modified example 3 in the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command) of the specific example 8 described in Fig. 95 and Fig. 96 will be described. Fig. 107 (a) to (j) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of Fig. 95.

Note that since FIG. 96 and FIG. 107 are the same up to the presentation at timings T0 to T4, explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is The symbol loss fluctuation display starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. Then, the first special figure reservation number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1", that is, the process of starting the variable production without changing the first special figure reservation number is performed. be exposed.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is maintained and displayed from "1" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the first A hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in a special additional manner (one frame of non-animation) second in the hold icon display area 70B. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 107(e)).

In addition, there is an inconsistency caused by the command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the production control unit 130m (original number is decreasing). Since an abnormality in which there is a deviation of 1 from 1 to 1 (the number is the same) has occurred, the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated. Specifically, the pre-read zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to production mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Furthermore, the first blue icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to a white icon with one frame of non-animation (see FIG. 107(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 107) (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the additional mode, the same operation mode is used to perform the performance operation (see FIG. 107(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the left center right performance symbol 70a temporarily stops in a reach-miss mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI continue (see FIG. 107(g)).

Then, at timing T8, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 107(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T9, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 107(i)).

Next, at timing T10, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 107(j) )reference).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 107, a command is created between the first special figure reservation number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure reservation number stored in the production control unit 130m. If an inconsistency occurs due to an abnormality (normally a deviation of 1, but an abnormality where the number is the same), the pre-reading notice presentation (pre-reading zone presentation, icon change presentation, pre-reading effect presentation) will be terminated. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the execution of a pre-read preview effect during the execution of a variable effect that is not normally subject to execution of the pre-read preview effect, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress this.

(Variation 4 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 9 described in FIGS. 97 and 98 (modification 4 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 108. 108(a) to (f) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. 97.

Note that since FIG. 98 and FIG. 108 are the same up to the effects at timings T0 to T5, explanations of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of T6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first special symbol is The symbol loss fluctuation display starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. Then, the first special symbol reservation number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "2", that is, the first special symbol reservation number increases by 1 and a process is performed to start the variable production. be exposed.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "2" in a specific update mode, and Hold icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed in the second and third positions of the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode (two icons at the same time). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 108(e)).

In addition, there is an inconsistency caused by the command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the production control unit 130m (original number is decreasing). Since an abnormality (deviation of 1 in the increasing direction) has occurred, the icon change performance and the look-ahead zone performance are terminated. Specifically, the pre-read zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to production mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Furthermore, the first blue icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to a white icon with one frame of non-animation (see FIG. 108(e)).

Then, the necessary three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 108) (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the fluctuating display of the production pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special addition). Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the mode or not, the state is that the performance operation) is performed in the same motion mode (see FIG. 108(f)).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 108, a command is created between the first special figure reservation number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure reservation number stored in the production control unit 130m. If an inconsistency occurs due to an abnormality (an abnormality in which there is a deviation of 1 in the increasing direction instead of a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction), a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change effect) , look-ahead effect production). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the execution of a pre-read preview effect during the execution of a variable effect that is not normally subject to execution of the pre-read preview effect, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress this.

(Variation 5 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 10 described in FIGS. 97 and 98 (modification 5 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 109. 109(a) to (f) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. 97.

Note that since FIG. 98 and FIG. 109 are the same up to the effects at the timings T0 to T6, explanations of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is The symbol loss fluctuation display starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. Then, the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "3" in a specific update mode, and Hold icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed in the second to fourth positions of the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode (three at the same time). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 109(e)).

In addition, there is an inconsistency caused by a command abnormality (original For example, an abnormality in which there is a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction but a deviation of 1 or more in the increasing direction has occurred, so the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated. Specifically, the pre-read zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to production mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Furthermore, the first blue icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to a white icon with one frame of non-animation (see FIG. 109(e)).

Then, the necessary four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 109) (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the fluctuating display of the production pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are rotated (either added in the normal addition mode or special addition). Regardless of whether it is additionally displayed in the mode, the state is such that the performance operation) is performed in the same motion mode (see FIG. 109(f)).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 109, a command is created between the first special figure reservation number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure reservation number stored in the production control unit 130m. If an inconsistency occurs due to an abnormality (normally a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction, but an error of 2 or more in the increasing direction), a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change) It is designed to end the performance (pre-read effect performance). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the execution of a pre-read preview effect during the execution of a variable effect that is not normally subject to execution of the pre-read preview effect, and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress this.

(Variation 6 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 11 described in FIGS. 101 and 102 (modification 6 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 110. 110(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 9 of FIG. 101.

102 and FIG. 110 have the same effect at the timings T6 to T11, so the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (presentation operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 110(a)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of first special symbols reserved that is stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "3" in a specific update mode, and A hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode (two icons at the same time), and a winning sound based on the current winning (same sound as when the hold icon is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode) is displayed. ) is output (see FIG. 110(b)).

Specifically, the pending icon HI for one frame in which the winning command (winning signal) could not be received normally and the pending icon HI for the part in which the winning command (winning signal) was normally received are displayed in one frame. It is additionally displayed (increased display) in a non-animated manner (see FIG. 110(b)).

Next, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI rotate (regardless of whether they are additionally displayed in the normal addition mode or in the special addition mode, they perform the same operation mode) (See FIG. 110(c)).

Then, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in the same losing mode ("814") as the production pattern 70a, and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in the losing mode (lights out). ), the main stop is made (see FIG. 110(d)).

In addition, if the winning command based on the prize entered into the first starting port 45 cannot be received normally and a number of pending special drawings (holding icons, etc.) smaller than the first number of reserved special drawings is displayed, the second starting If the prize-winning command based on the prize entered into the slot 47 is successfully received, the reservation display corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number is not updated, and vice versa.

(Modification 7 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 12 described in FIGS. 103 and 104 (modification 7 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 111. 111(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 10 of FIG. 103.

104 and FIG. 111 have the same effects at the timings T8 to T11, so the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "2" to "1" in a specific update mode, and The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, and the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (presentation operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1".

At this time, since the winning command (winning signal) for which the first special drawing reservation number is "2" has not been received, the number is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special drawing reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special symbols remaining at "1" remains at "1", and the reservation icon HI is not displayed at the second location corresponding to the number of first reserved special symbols "2" in the first reservation icon display area 70B ( (See FIG. 111(a)).

Furthermore, at the timing of T3, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" as a game ball enters the first starting port 45. At this timing, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality has occurred). In this case, the process of updating the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1".

At this time, since the winning command (winning signal) for which the first special drawing reservation number is "3" has not been received, the number is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special drawing reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings remaining at "1" will remain at "1", and the holding icon HI will not be displayed at the third position corresponding to the number of first reserved special drawings "3" in the first reservation icon display area 70B ( (See FIG. 111(b)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "1" to "4".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "4" in a specific update mode, and Hold icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed in the hold icon display area 70B in a special addition mode (three icons at the same time), and a winning sound based on the current winning (the same sound as when hold icons are additionally displayed in the normal addition mode) is displayed. ) is output (see FIG. 111(c)).

Specifically, the two pending icons HI for which the winning command (winning signal) could not be received normally and the pending icon HI for the one that successfully received the winning command (winning signal) are one frame. It is additionally displayed (increased display) in a non-animated manner (see FIG. 111(c)).

Next, at timing T5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI rotate (regardless of whether they are additionally displayed in the normal addition mode or in the special addition mode, they perform the same operation mode) (See FIG. 111(d)).

Then, at timing T6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in the same losing mode ("814") as the production pattern 70a, and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in the losing mode (lights out). ), the main stop is made (see FIG. 111(e)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process is performed to start a variable production.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "4" to "3" in a specific update mode, and The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 111(f)).

Here, at the timing of T4, when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "1", the winning time command (winning prize command) in which the first special figure pending number becomes "4". As explained above, the case where the number of reserved first special symbols is "3" when the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "0" is won. When the time command (win signal) is received or when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is “0”, the first special figure pending number becomes “4”. Even when a winning command (winning signal) is received, the basic flow is the same as described above.

In addition, here, specific example 12 has been explained in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

In addition, if the winning command based on the winning to the first starting opening 45 cannot be received normally and the number of pending special drawings is displayed (holding icon, etc.) smaller than the number of reserved special drawings, the second starting If the prize-winning command based on the prize entered into the slot 47 is successfully received, the reservation display corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number is not updated, and vice versa.

In this way, according to the modified examples shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, when a winning command (winning signal) indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is two more than the displayed number of reserved icons is received. , the first special addition mode (a display mode in which only one reserved icon is additionally displayed in the area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures) is different from the normal addition mode (a display mode in which only one reserved icon is additionally displayed in the area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures). In the display mode in which two pending icons are displayed simultaneously in an animation), the pending icons are additionally displayed (increased display). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to naturally additionally display the hold icon that should have been displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, when a winning command (winning signal) indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is three more than the displayed number of reserved icons is received, , a second special addition mode (display mode in which only one reserved icon is added and displayed in the area corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings) is different from the normal addition mode (a display mode in which only one reserved icon is added and displayed in the area corresponding to the number of reserved special drawings). In the display mode in which three pending icons are additionally displayed at the same time, the pending icons are additionally displayed (increased display). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to naturally additionally display the hold icon that should have been displayed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, a winning command (winning command) indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is more than the number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-retention display or the number display area of reserved special symbols time signal) is received, the number of pending displays on the sub-holding display and the special figure pending number display area will be increased and displayed in a specific update mode (the same mode as when no command is missed at the time of winning). There is. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, for the icons for which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command (winning signal), while they are displayed as pending icons, Although the icon change effect is not executed (restricted), the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to failure to receive the winning command (winning signal) normally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the icon change effect may not be executed even while the icon is being displayed.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the winning command ( If the winning signal) is received, the increasing effect (outputting the winning sound) based on the winning signal at the current starting opening is executed without executing the increasing effect (outputting the winning sound) multiple times. (output of the winning sound for the target) is performed once. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is confused due to the duplicate performance (output of the winning sound) when increasing the number of times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the winning sound as the increase effect, for example, a predetermined light emitting means (for example, the winning opening lamp NR) may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner, or while outputting the winning sound. A predetermined light emitting means may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner. Even in this case, regardless of the increase in the number of pending icons, the increase effect is executed with the same effect (sound type, volume, sound output time, light emitting color, light emitting amount, light emitting time). Good too.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the winning command ( When a winning signal) is received, an increase performance (output of a winning sound) is performed in the same performance mode regardless of the number of increases. Therefore, the player does not make the mistake of thinking that he or she has high expectations for a jackpot, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, when a game ball enters the starting slot, the winning command ( When a winning command (winning signal) is received, the number of reserved special drawings increases by one.Increase performance (output of winning sound) is performed in the same manner as when receiving a winning command (winning signal). is designed to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform an increase effect (output of a winning sound) without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, whether the hold icon is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode or the hold icon is additionally displayed in the special addition mode, the same presentation mode is used. The hold icon performs a performance operation at certain points (rotation center position, rotation speed, etc.). Therefore, the player does not make the mistake of thinking that the pending icon additionally displayed in the special additional mode has a high expectation of a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when additionally displaying pending icons in the special addition mode, multiple pending icons are added and displayed at the same time with 1 frame of non-animation, but 10 frames of animation (same time as in the normal addition mode) You may add multiple hold icons at the same time. Furthermore, only the latest hold icon may be displayed as a 10-frame animation, and the hold icon that should have been originally displayed may be displayed as a 1-frame non-animation.

(Specific example 13 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 13 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 112. The upper diagram in FIG. 112 is a timing chart 11 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. 112(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted (decreased) displayed as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). In addition, the icon TI is in a state where it is performing a rotating action (acting action).

Next, at timing T1, an auxiliary game is executed by the player hitting right, or a second starting opening is performed in an auxiliary game executed during a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) before entering the normal gaming state. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47 due to reasons such as the ball biting occurring in the movable member 47 (movable member 48) being resolved, the second special figure hold stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is activated. The number increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is a winning to the second starting port 47 during the normal gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 112(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 112(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 112(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 112(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped and displayed (extinguished) in a losing manner (see FIG. 112(e)). It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until the demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of the special symbol starts (see FIG. 112(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, processing is performed to end the first variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the production control unit The number of reserved second special drawings stored (kept) by 130m changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ permanently stops at “814”, which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved second special symbols displayed in the display area 70F will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

(Specific example 14 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 14 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIG. 113. The upper diagram in FIG. 113 is a timing chart 12 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. 113(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted (decreased) displayed as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, an auxiliary game is executed by the player hitting right, or a second starting opening is performed in an auxiliary game executed during a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) before entering the normal gaming state. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47 due to reasons such as the ball biting occurring in the movable member 47 (movable member 48) being resolved, the second special figure hold stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is activated. The number increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning occurs because the winning is entered into the second starting port 47 during the normal gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 113(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 113(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 113(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 113(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-first variable display 81 stops displaying (turns off) in a losing mode, but the second lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-second variable display 82. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 113(e)). It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the second start opening 47. The command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (2nd special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 113(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the first start opening 45, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the performance control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. The number of second special drawings reserved is maintained at "1".

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing is performed to end the first variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and start the opening production. .

Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being erased as an animation (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol is received, the first variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the first variable performance ends at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the first fluctuation performance (fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the normal gaming state, during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the first special If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 will display the loss state (lights out) as a stop. In this way, the sub-second variable display 82 does not stop displaying the jackpot mode (lit) lamp symbol LZ. Therefore, it is not necessary to carry out processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, the first special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol changes while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. When a command to stop the display (stop signal) is received, and a command to stop the variable display of the second special symbol while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the normal gaming state, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-second holding display 84 and the second number of reserved special drawings display area 70F. The number of reserved 2nd special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the second special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that started in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol, the loss of the second special symbol that started after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the first variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 15 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 15 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 114. The upper diagram in FIG. 114 is the timing chart 13 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1" to "0". As the second special symbol decreases, a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 114(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 114(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. No termination processing will be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 114(c)).

Here, continuing scrolling of the background image means that if, for example, an image of a "castle" taken from the front is displayed as the mode A background at timing T3, scrolling will continue and the "castle" will be displayed. It is intended that the background image will continue to change (moving the camera's viewpoint), such as displaying an image taken from the side and displaying an image of the "castle" from the back.
In other words, the display mode is such that the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but the background image continues to change.

However, although the scrolling of the background image continues, in FIGS. 114(c) and 114(d), the execution of the "background preview effect" described above is restricted (not performed).

Furthermore, if the icon TI continues to rotate, for example, if it rotates clockwise and the icon TI is at the reference position (12 o'clock direction) at timing T3, the icon TI continues to rotate. It is intended to rotate in the 1 o'clock direction.
In other words, the presentation pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but the icon TI continues to rotate.

Further, when a pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B at timing T3, the pending icon also continues to rotate in the same manner as the above-mentioned continuation of the rotating operation of the icon TI.

However, although the rotation operation of the icon TI and the rotation operation of the pending icon continue, in FIG. 114(c) and FIG. It is now restricted (not performed).

Note that the rotation motion of the icon TI and the rotation motion of the pending icon may be synchronized, or the rotation motion of the icon TI and the rotation motion of the pending icon may not be synchronized.

Further, although the output of the fluctuating BGM is maintained at the timing of T3, it may be stopped without being maintained. In this case, the period after the timing T3 may be a silent period.
On the other hand, instead of outputting the fluctuating BGM at the timing of T3, special BGM (BGM that is output when a command cannot be received normally) may be output.

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 114(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second variable display 82 is stopped and displayed (turned off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 114(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

At timing T5, although the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted, the pending icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B is not deleted (updated). It has become.
Although the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number display area 70E of special symbols is It is no longer updated.

The reservation icon displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83, and the first special figure reservation number displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E are changed at the timing of T5. May be updated.

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is displayed (updated) decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. , the player waits until the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 114(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, processing is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the production control unit The number of reserved first special drawings stored (understood) by 130m changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed (updated) decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

In addition, here, specific example 15 was explained where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, variable probability gaming). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

Furthermore, when scrolling the background image is continued in a specific gaming state, the display of the right-handed game image MU (see FIG. 127, etc.) is also continued. Thereby, even if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred), it is possible to encourage the player to play the game that is most suitable for the player (right-handed play).
In addition, when displaying not only the right-handed image MU but also the number of successive jackpot games (so-called consecutive number of wins), this may be continued, and the game media obtained from the jackpot games may be displayed continuously. If the number is displayed, this may be continued. Thereby, even if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred), it is possible to give the player a certain sense of satisfaction.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 114, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the first special symbol is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the second variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 114, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 114, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When the time command (stop signal) is received, and when the icon (second running information) corresponding to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is displayed, the stop command (stop signal) of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is received. When a signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 114, in the normal gaming state, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is "0". When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number of special drawings on hold is "0", the first The number of reserved special drawings is now displayed as being reduced to "0". Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 114, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. If the hour command (stop signal) cannot be received, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but the scrolling of the background image is continued. Therefore, even if the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored due to a change in the background image.
On the other hand, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the execution of the "background preview effect" is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling dissatisfied due to the performance pattern 70a being temporarily stopped and making it difficult to see the execution of the "background preview performance".

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 114, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. When the time command (stop signal) cannot be received, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but the rotation of the icon TI and the rotation of the pending icon are continued. Therefore, even if the performance symbol 70a is in a temporarily stopped state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored due to the rotational movement of the icon TI or the rotational movement of the pending icon.
In addition, since the rotational movement of the icon TI and the rotational movement of the pending icon are performed in synchronization, the appearance is improved to prevent players from feeling bored. be able to.
On the other hand, although the rotation operation of the icon TI and the rotation operation of the pending icon are continued, the execution of "the icon change effect" and the "pending icon change effect" is restricted. Therefore, the performance pattern 70a is in an irregular state where it remains temporarily stopped, and it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming too excessive.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 114, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. If the time command (stop signal) cannot be received, the BGM output is maintained during fluctuation. Therefore, the player can be aurally entertained, and the player can be prevented from feeling bored.

In addition, when adopting a configuration in which the output of the fluctuating BGM is stopped at the timing of T3 or a special BGM is output in place of the fluctuating BGM output, it is necessary to understand that the system is in an irregular state. It can be made easier.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the second variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

Note that although the scrolling of the background image is continued, the scrolling may be stopped instead of continuing. Specifically, when the start command (special figure variation pattern designation command) is received at timing T0, the variation time can be grasped, so the grasped variation time is set in the timer counter, and the set timer counter is When the value becomes "0", scrolling of the background image may be continued. Thereby, scrolling of the background image can be stopped even if the stop command cannot be received normally at timing T3.

Also, the scrolling of the background image may continue regardless of the type of the variable effect pattern, and depending on the type of the variable effect pattern, there are cases where the background image continues to scroll and cases where the background image does not continue to scroll. There may be. For example, in a variable effect pattern whose variation time is relatively short (for example, variable effect pattern 1), the scrolling of the background image is continued, and in a variable effect pattern whose variation time is relatively long (for example, variable effect pattern 11), the background image is It may also be possible to prevent the image from continuing to scroll. As a result, if the variation time is relatively short, the amount of change in the background image during variation is small, and by continuing the variation after the timing T3, it is possible to increase the chances of making the background image visible.

In addition, not only the background image, but also the rotation operation of the icon TI and the rotation operation of the pending icon, as in the case of the background image, some may be stopped without continuing, some may be made to continue depending on the type of variable effect pattern, and some may not be made to continue. There may be things.

Note that at the timing of T5, the icon TI is deleted and the pending icon displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B is not deleted (updated), but at the timing of T5, the pending icon is also deleted. May be deleted.

In addition, if the first (second) special symbol loss variation is executed from the timing of T4 to the timing of T5, the pending icon is erased at the timing of T5, and the first (second) special symbol is changed from the timing of T4 to the timing of T5. ) When the special figure jackpot variation is executed, the pending icon may not be deleted at the timing of T5. In this case, it is desirable that the stop command includes a command that can identify whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As a result, if the first (second) special map jackpot variation is executed from the timing of T4 to the timing of T5, the pending icon will not be deleted, indicating that the pending icon that was not deleted was a jackpot. It can be made easier to recognize.

In addition, not only the reservation icon but also the first special figure reservation number displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E are updated at the timing of T5 in the same way as the reservation icon. It may be updated at the timing of T5 or may not be updated depending on the jackpot or loss.

(Specific example 16 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 16 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 115. 115(a) to 115(f) correspond to FIGS. 114(a) to 114(f), so the description will be omitted as appropriate.

In FIG. 115(a), the volume value can be adjusted (effect adjustment). Specifically, when the player operates the right button of the cross key (performance adjustment operation is performed), the volume value increases, indicating that the volume value has been changed from 2 to 3, for example.
Although the volume value has been adjusted (effect adjustment), the volume value image OG is not displayed, and a confirmation sound is being output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value (not shown). .

In FIG. 115(b), the volume value continues to be 3. In addition, since FIG. 115(b) corresponds to the end of the above-mentioned variable performance, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, but the volume cannot be adjusted using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Adjustment and light amount adjustment are now regulated (limited).

In FIG. 115(c), the volume value can be adjusted (effect adjustment). Specifically, when the player operates the right button of the cross key (performance adjustment operation is performed), the volume value increases, indicating that the volume value has been changed from 3 to 4, for example.
Although the volume value has been adjusted (effect adjustment), the volume value image OG is not displayed, and a confirmation sound is being output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value (not shown). .

In FIG. 115(d), the volume value can be adjusted (effect adjustment). Specifically, when the player operates the right button of the cross key (performance adjustment operation is performed), the volume value increases, indicating that the volume value has been changed from 4 to 5, for example.
Although the volume value has been adjusted (effect adjustment), the volume value image OG is not displayed, and a confirmation sound is being output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value (not shown). .
Strictly speaking, FIG. 115(d) corresponds to the start of the above-mentioned fluctuation effect, so after the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment are regulated (restricted) for a certain period, the state shown in FIG. 115(d) is reached. (The performance can be adjusted).

In FIG. 115(e), the volume value continues to be 5. Note that FIG. 115(e) corresponds to the end of the above-mentioned variable performance, so although it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, the volume cannot be adjusted using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Adjustment and light amount adjustment are now regulated (limited).
Note that in FIG. 115(e) as well, it may be possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player.

In FIG. 115(f), the volume value continues to be 5, and the volume value can be adjusted (effect adjustment).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 115, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is Even if the stop command (stop signal) cannot be received, the right button of the cross key is operated by the player as shown in FIGS. 115(c) and 115(d) (performance adjustment operation). ) and the volume value can be adjusted. Therefore, even in an irregular state, it is possible to prevent loss of flexibility and convenience in adjusting the performance.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 115, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the time command (stop signal) cannot be received, the right button of the cross key is operated by the player as shown in FIGS. 115(c) and 115(d). The volume value image OG is not displayed. Therefore, although the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, it is actually being displayed in a variable manner, so by performing the same display control as when the variable display is being performed (control of not displaying the volume value image OG), It is possible to save the effort of changing the display control depending on whether or not the production control section normally receives the command.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 115, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the time command (stop signal) cannot be received, the right button of the cross key is operated by the player as shown in FIGS. 115(c) and 115(d). Although the volume value image OG is not displayed, a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the player's performance adjustment operation is reflected.

(Specific example 17 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 17 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. 116 is a timing chart 14 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. 116(a) to (h) are timing charts 14 (a) to ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to h). Note that FIGS. 116 and 117 are different from FIG. 114 only in the number of pending events, and other events are common, so the description will be omitted as appropriate.

First, at timing T0, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1" to "0". As the second special symbol decreases, a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1." When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special symbol reserved number designation command, a look-ahead designation command as a winning signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "0" to "1."

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased from "1" to "2" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 117(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 117(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. No termination processing will be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 117(c)).

Further, when a plurality of pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B at timing T3, the plural pending icons also continue to rotate in the same manner as the above-mentioned continuation of the rotating operation of the icon TI. At this time, the rotation operations of the plurality of pending icons are synchronized with each other. For example, when the hold icon displayed on the first display part 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B is located at the reference position, the hold icon displayed on the second display part 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B is also located at the reference position, and when the hold icon displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B is located in the 3 o'clock direction, the second display section of the first hold icon display area 70B The hold icon displayed on 70B2 is also located at the 3 o'clock direction.

However, although the rotation operation of the icon TI and the rotation operation of the plurality of pending icons continue, in FIG. 117(c) and FIG. Execution is restricted (not performed).

Note that the rotational motion of the icon TI and the rotational motion of the plurality of pending icons may be synchronized, or the rotational motion of the icon TI and the rotational motion of the plurality of pending icons may not be synchronized.

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command error has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "2", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 117(d)).

Then, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. The termination process will not be performed (see FIG. 117(e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command error has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "2", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 117(f)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Further, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-second variable display 82 stops being displayed (turns off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 117(g)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

At timing T7, although the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the pending icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B and the first pending icon display area The pending icon displayed on the second display section 70B2 of 70B is not erased (updated).
Although the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number display area 70E of special symbols is It is no longer updated.

In addition, the reservation icon displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B, the reservation icon displayed on the second display part 70B2 of the first reservation icon display area 70B, the sub-first reservation display 83, and the first special figure reservation number The first special symbol pending number displayed in the display area 70E may be updated at the timing of T5.

After that, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "0". ”.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is displayed (updated) decreased from "2" to "0" in a specific update mode. , the player waits until the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 117(h)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T7, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T8, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, a process is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the production control unit The number of reserved first special drawings stored (kept) by 130m changes from "1" to "0".

In addition, here, specific example 15 was explained where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, variable probability gaming). Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

Furthermore, when scrolling the background image is continued in a specific gaming state, the display of the right-handed game image MU (see FIG. 127, etc.) is also continued. Thereby, even if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred), it is possible to encourage the player to play the game that is most suitable for the player (right-handed play).
In addition, when displaying not only the right-handed image MU but also the number of successive jackpot games (so-called consecutive number of wins), this may be continued, and the game media obtained from the jackpot games may be displayed. If the number is displayed, this may be continued. Thereby, even if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred), it is possible to give the player a certain sense of satisfaction.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) for the first special symbol variable display that is started after the end of the first special symbol variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the second variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 116 to 117, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the second special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 116 to 117, in the normal gaming state, the second special symbol changes while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. When the stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the stop command for the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed while the corresponding icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, in the normal gaming state, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-first holding display 83 and the first number of special drawings on hold display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 116 to 117, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is If the display stop command (stop signal) cannot be received, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but the scrolling of the background image is continued. Therefore, even if the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored due to a change in the background image.
On the other hand, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the execution of the "background preview effect" is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling dissatisfied due to the performance pattern 70a being temporarily stopped and making it difficult to see the execution of the "background preview performance".

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 116 to 117, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is If the display stop command (stop signal) cannot be received, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but the rotation of the icon TI and the rotation of the plurality of pending icons are continued. Therefore, even if the performance symbol 70a is in a temporarily stopped state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored due to the rotational movement of the icon TI or the rotational movement of the plurality of pending icons.
In addition, since the rotation of the icon TI and the rotation of the plurality of pending icons are performed in synchronization with each other, in order to prevent players from feeling bored, the appearance should be improved. can do well.
On the other hand, although the rotation operation of the icon TI and the rotation operation of the plurality of pending icons are continued, the execution of "the icon change effect" and the "hold icon change effect" is restricted. Therefore, the performance pattern 70a is in an irregular state where it remains temporarily stopped, and it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming too excessive.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 116 to 117, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is If the display stop command (stop signal) cannot be received, the BGM output is maintained during fluctuation. Therefore, the player can be aurally entertained, and the player can be prevented from feeling bored.

In addition, when adopting a configuration in which the output of the fluctuating BGM is stopped at the timing of T3 or a special BGM is output in place of the fluctuating BGM output, it is necessary to understand that the system is in an irregular state. It can be made easier.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the second variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 18 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 18 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 118 and 119. FIG. 118 is a timing chart 15 in the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. 119(a) to (f) are (a) to ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to f). Note that since the events in FIGS. 118 and 119 are common to those in FIG. 114, the description will be omitted as appropriate.

First, at timing T0, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1" to "0". As the second special symbol decreases in number, a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.
Further, the lighting devices (the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76) normally emit light during fluctuation.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 119(a)).
In addition, the lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) normally emit light (for example, blue) during fluctuation (see FIG. 119(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 119(b)).
Further, the lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76) switch from normal light emission (for example, blue) during fluctuation to light emission during stop (for example, blue and white) (see FIG. 119(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. No termination processing will be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 119(c)).
In addition, the light emission (for example, blue-white) during stop in the lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) is also maintained (see FIG. 119(c)).

Although it is assumed that the light emission is maintained during the stop at the timing T3, the light emission may be stopped without being maintained. In this case, after the timing T3, the light may be emitted during normal fluctuation (for example, blue). Further, the light may be turned off after the timing T3.
On the other hand, instead of the light emission during stoppage, a special light emission mode (light emission mode when a command cannot be received normally) may be executed at the timing T3.

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 119(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second variable display 82 stops being displayed (turns off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 119(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.
Further, the lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) switch from emitting light while stopped (for example, blue and white) to emitting light while waiting for a customer (for example, white) (see FIG. 119(e)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is displayed (updated) decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. , the player waits until a customer waiting demonstration performance is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 119(f)).
Further, the lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) maintain light emission (for example, white) while waiting for customers (see FIG. 119(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, processing is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the production control unit The number of reserved first special drawings stored (understood) by 130m changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed (updated) decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

In addition, here, specific example 18 was explained where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state (command abnormality has occurred), but the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, variable probability gaming Even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) for the first special symbol variable display that is started after the end of the first special symbol variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the second variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 118 to 119, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the second special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 118 to 119, in the normal gaming state, the second special symbol changes while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. When the stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the stop command for the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed while the corresponding icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 118 to 119, in the normal gaming state, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-first holding display 83 and the first number of special drawings on hold display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 118 to 119, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variation performance that is started in response to the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol If the display stop command (stop signal) cannot be received, the lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) keep emitting light while the display is stopped. Therefore, it is possible to visually entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bored.

In addition, the configuration is configured to turn off the lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76) or execute a special light emission mode (light emission mode when a command cannot be received normally) at the timing of T3. When adopting this method, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the system is in an irregular state.

Although it was decided to perform the light emission while stopped from the timing T2 to the timing T5, the light emission while stopped is ended at the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing T2, and the light emission while stopped is performed in other light emission modes (e.g., light emission while waiting for customers). It may also be made to emit light.

(Specific example 19 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 19 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 120. 120(a) to (f) correspond to FIGS. 118 and 119(a) to (f), so the description will be omitted as appropriate.

In FIG. 120(a), the light amount value can be adjusted (effect adjustment). Specifically, when the player operates the upper button of the cross key (performance adjustment operation is performed), the light amount value increases, indicating that the light amount value has been changed from 2 to 3, for example.
Although the light amount value has been adjusted (effect adjustment), the light amount value image (not shown) is not displayed, and a confirmation sound is output according to the current light amount value (not shown). .

In FIG. 120(b), the light amount value continues to be 3. In addition, since FIG. 120(b) corresponds to the end of the above-mentioned variable performance, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, but the volume cannot be adjusted using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Adjustment and light amount adjustment are now regulated (limited).

In FIG. 120(c), the light amount value can be adjusted (effect adjustment). Specifically, when the player operates the upper button of the cross key (performance adjustment operation is performed), the light amount value increases, indicating that the light amount value has been changed from 3 to 4, for example.
Although the light amount value has been adjusted (effect adjustment), the light amount value image (not shown) is not displayed, and a confirmation sound is output according to the current light amount value (not shown). .

In FIG. 120(d), the light amount value can be adjusted (effect adjustment). Specifically, when the player operates the upper button of the cross key (performance adjustment operation is performed), the light amount value increases, indicating that the light amount value has been changed from 4 to 5, for example.
Although the light amount value has been adjusted (effect adjustment), the light amount value image (not shown) is not displayed, and a confirmation sound is output according to the current light amount value (not shown). .
Strictly speaking, FIG. 120(d) corresponds to the start of the above-mentioned fluctuating effect, so after the volume adjustment and light amount adjustment are regulated (restricted) for a certain period, the state shown in FIG. 120(d) is reached. (The performance can be adjusted).

In FIG. 120(e), the light amount value continues to be 5. Note that FIG. 120(e) corresponds to the end of the above-mentioned variable performance, so although it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, the volume cannot be adjusted using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Adjustment and light amount adjustment are now regulated (limited).
Note that in FIG. 120(e) as well, it may be possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player.

In FIG. 120(f), the light amount value continues to be 5, and the light amount value can be adjusted (effect adjustment).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 120, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is Even if the stop command (stop signal) cannot be received, the upper button of the cross key is operated by the player as shown in FIGS. 120(c) and 120(d) (performance adjustment operation ) and the light intensity value can be adjusted. Therefore, even in an irregular state, it is possible to prevent loss of flexibility and convenience in adjusting the performance.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 120, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the time command (stop signal) cannot be received, the upper button of the cross key is operated by the player (the effect adjustment operation is not performed), as shown in FIGS. 120(c) and 120(d). It is now possible to adjust the light intensity value (see below), but the light intensity value image is not displayed. Therefore, although the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, it is actually being displayed in a variable manner. It is possible to save the effort of changing the display control depending on whether the control unit has received the command normally.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 120, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the time command (stop signal) cannot be received, the upper button of the cross key is operated by the player (the effect adjustment operation is not performed), as shown in FIGS. 120(c) and 120(d). Although the light intensity value image is not displayed, a confirmation sound is output according to the current light intensity value. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the player's performance adjustment operation is reflected.

(Specific example 1 when the production control unit receives the command normally, and specific example 20 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Using FIGS. 121 and 122, a concrete example 1 in which the production control unit 130m normally receives a command and a concrete example 20 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described. In other words, regarding the "predetermined effect" that can be executed in the "specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 01)", if the effect control unit 130m successfully receives the command (FIG. 121), and if the effect control unit 130m receives the command The execution mode will be explained in comparison with the case where normal reception is not possible (FIG. 122).
FIG. 121 (top) is timing chart 1 when the production control unit 130m normally receives a command in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 121 (bottom) corresponds to (a) to (d) of timing chart 1. This is an example of a performance.
FIG. 122 (top) is the timing chart 16 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 122 (bottom) corresponds to (a) to (f) of the timing chart 16. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 121, a starting win occurs during the normal gaming state, and a loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, Processing to start the first variation effect is performed.
Here, it is assumed that the special figure variation pattern 01 is transmitted as the special figure variation pattern designation command, and the variable effect pattern 1 is executed as the first variable effect.
It should be noted that until T0 is reached, the normal gaming state may be used, or the specific gaming state may be used.

Next, at timing T1, a "predetermined effect" is executed before the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops. The "predetermined performance" is a performance in which the performance pattern 70a performs an effect performance (a performance accompanied by light emission), temporarily stops at a temporary stop position while performing an effect performance (a performance accompanied by light emission), and all of the left center right If the production pattern 70a temporarily stops at a temporary stop position while performing an effect production (production accompanied by light emission), it will develop, for example, to SP reach (in this case, special pattern variation pattern 04, variation production pattern 5, etc. ” is executed).

On the other hand, when only the left presentation pattern 70a temporarily stops at the temporary stop position while performing an effect presentation (a presentation accompanied by light emission), and the middle right presentation pattern 70a does not perform an effect presentation (a presentation accompanied by light emission). Or, if the left and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop at the temporary stop position while performing an effect performance (a performance that involves light emission), and the inner performance pattern 70a does not perform an effect performance (a performance that involves light emission), it remains as it is. After performing a temporary stop, the main stop is performed. In other words, the "predetermined performance" is a performance in which at least one performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at a temporary stop position while performing an effect performance (a performance accompanied by light emission), regardless of the presence or absence of development (FIG. 121(a)) reference).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 121(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the first variable production is performed. become.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped and displayed (turned off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 121(c)).
Then, at timing T4, when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the customer waiting designation command, the customer waiting performance starts (see FIG. 121(d)).

Next, a case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described.
First, at timing T0 in FIG. 122, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1". As the number decreases to "0", a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.
Here, it is assumed that the special figure variation pattern 12 is transmitted as the special figure variation pattern designation command, and the variable effect pattern 25 is executed as the second variable effect.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 122(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 122(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. No termination processing will be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 122(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 122(d)).

Here, it is assumed that special figure variation pattern 01 was transmitted as a special figure variation pattern designation command, but the production control unit 130m could not receive it normally.
In this case, the fluctuation performance pattern (for example, fluctuation performance pattern 1) corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation pattern 01 is not executed, and the second fluctuation performance that was started in response to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol continues (Fig. 122(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

In other words, from the timing of T4 to the timing of T5, the "predetermined effect" that can be executed in the variable effect pattern (for example, variable effect pattern 1) corresponding to the special figure variable pattern 01 will not be executed (FIG. 122(d) ~See FIG. 122(e)).

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second variable display 82 stops being displayed (turns off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 122(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is displayed (updated) decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. , the player waits until a customer waiting demonstration performance is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 122(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, a process is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the production control unit The number of reserved first special drawings stored (kept) by 130m changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed (updated) decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

In addition, here, we will discuss specific example 1 when the production control section normally receives a command in the normal gaming state, and specific example 20 when the production control section cannot receive the command normally (command abnormality has occurred). As explained above, even if the game ball enters the second starting port 47 in a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic The flow is similar to the explanation above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

Note that the "predetermined performance" of the performance pattern 70a performed prior to the temporary stop is not limited to an effect performance (a performance accompanied by light emission), and may be any other performance. For example, it may be an effect in which the character (decoration part) of the effect pattern 70a takes an action prior to the temporary stop (for example, an action of raising the weapon in the case of a character holding a weapon), or an effect in which the character (decoration part) of the effect pattern 70a performs an action prior to the temporary stop. It may also be an effect where the entire lights are turned off.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 121 and 122, a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 01) and a variation effect pattern (for example, variation effect pattern 1) corresponding to the special figure variation pattern 01 are In the case of execution, if the production control unit normally receives the command, it is possible to execute the “predetermined production” using the production pattern 70a, but if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, that is, T3 At the timing of T4, the production control section 130m could not normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control section 110m (a command error occurred), and at the timing of T4. , the production control unit sends the start commands (first special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command (special symbol variation pattern 01)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. If 130m cannot be received normally (command abnormality has occurred), execution of the "predetermined effect" by the effect pattern 70a is restricted (not executed). Therefore, in the non-irregular state (FIG. 121), the player can be entertained by executing the "predetermined performance" using the performance symbol 70a, while the second variable performance in the irregular state (FIG. 122) is continuing (FIG. 122). 122(d) to FIG. 122(e), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the "predetermined effect" suddenly being performed using the effect pattern 70a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 122, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol ends during execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is started later is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the second variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 122, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 122, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When the time command (stop signal) is received, and when the icon (second running information) corresponding to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is displayed, the stop command (stop signal) of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is received. When a signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 122, in the normal gaming state, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is "0". When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number of special drawings on hold is "0", the first The number of reserved special drawings is now displayed as being reduced to "0". Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in the example of FIG. 122, although the execution of the "predetermined effect" by the effect pattern 70a is restricted (not performed), it may not be restricted (it may be performed). For example, if the half difference in the connector is canceled between the timing of T4 and the timing of T5, the start command that was originally supposed to be sent at the timing of T4 is sent at that timing, and the predetermined effect is If an executable special figure variation pattern designation command is received, a predetermined effect can be executed at the timing of T5.

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit normally receives the command, and specific example 21 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
With reference to FIGS. 123 and 124, a second specific example in which the production control unit 130m normally receives a command, and a specific example 21 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described. In other words, "decision success production (movement of the first movable member 73 to the maximum operating position)", "decision success vibration production", and "decision success light emission" that can be executed in the "specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 08)" Regarding the effect (the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 emit light in rainbow colors), the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command (Fig. 123), and the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command. The execution mode will be explained in comparison with the case where it is not possible (FIG. 124).
FIG. 123 (top) is timing chart 2 when the production control unit 130m normally receives a command in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 123 (bottom) corresponds to timing chart 2 (a) to (c). This is an example of a performance.
FIG. 124 (top) is a timing chart 17 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 124 (bottom) corresponds to (a) to (f) of the timing chart 17. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0 in FIG. 123, a starting prize occurs during the normal gaming state, and the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, Processing to start the first variation effect is performed.
Here, it is assumed that the special figure variation pattern 08 is transmitted as the special figure variation pattern designation command, and any one of the variable production patterns 15 to 17 is executed as the first variation production.
It should be noted that until T0 is reached, the normal gaming state may be used, or the specific gaming state may be used.

Further, from the timing T0 to the timing T1, the first movable member 73 is at the origin position, the production button 17 is in a non-vibrating state, and the lighting device emits light during normal variation if it is in normal variation. If it is in normal reach, it will emit light during normal reach, if it is in SP reach, it will emit light during SP reach, and if it is in SPSP reach, it will emit light during SPSP reach.

Additionally, various preview effects can be executed from timing T0 to timing T2. The various preview performances include the above-mentioned dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, the icon change performance, and the pending icon change performance.
In other words, when the main control unit 110m executes the first special pattern jackpot variation and the production control unit 130m executes the first variation production corresponding to the first special pattern jackpot variation, various preview productions can be executed. It is.

In addition, when the main control unit 110m executes the first special pattern jackpot variation and the production control unit 130m executes the first variation performance corresponding to the first special pattern jackpot variation, normal reach → SP reach → SPSP reach is possible.

Next, at the timing of T1, the effect pattern 70a starts a temporary stop (for example, starts a temporary stop at 555), and "decision success effect (movement of the first movable member 73 to the maximum operation position)" is performed. "Success vibration performance" and "Decision success light emission performance" are started (see FIG. 123(a)).

Then, at timing T2, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. If the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing to end the first variable production is performed. become.
At this time, a jackpot (555) is formed by the effect pattern 70a in the display mode including the character and the main stop is made, and the main stop is made when the special pattern TZ is "555" which is the same as the effect pattern 70a. Further, the first movable member 73 returns to the initial position (origin position), the production button 17 becomes non-vibrating, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 are turned off (see FIG. 123(b)). .

Thereafter, at timing T3, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.
At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. Further, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 start emitting light during the jackpot game (see FIG. 123(c)).

Next, a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described.
First, at the timing of T0 in Fig. 124, the specific game state (time-saving game state) is changed to the normal game state, and the second special symbol miss variation display is started as the second special symbol reservation number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific game state decreases from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (a second special symbol reservation number designation command, a special symbol designation command, and a special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special symbol reservation number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process of starting the second variation performance is performed.
Here, special chart change pattern 12 is sent as a special chart change pattern designation command, and change performance pattern 25 is executed as the second change performance.

Further, at timing T0, the first movable member 73 is at the origin position, the effect button 17 is in a non-vibrating state, and the lighting device emits light during normal fluctuation.

Additionally, various preview effects can be executed from timing T0 to timing T3. The various preview performances include the above-mentioned dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, the icon change performance, and the pending icon change performance.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 124(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 124(b)).
Further, the lighting device usually finishes emitting light during fluctuation and then emitting light during stop.

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. No termination processing will be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 124(c)).

Furthermore, execution of various preview performances is restricted from timing T3 to timing T6. In other words, if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, even though the main control unit 110m is executing the first special pattern jackpot variation, the production control unit 130m will be able to perform the first special pattern jackpot variation corresponding to the first special pattern jackpot variation. The variable performance will not be executed, and the execution of various preview performances will be restricted (not executed).

For example, in FIG. 123, execution of the final performance is possible at a predetermined timing of the first variable performance, but in FIG. 124, execution of the final performance is restricted at a predetermined timing.
Further, in FIG. 123, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed at a predetermined timing of the first variable effect, but in FIG. 124, the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is restricted at a predetermined timing.
Further, in FIG. 123, execution of the pending icon change effect is possible at a predetermined timing of the first variable effect, but in FIG. 124, execution of the pending icon change effect is restricted at a predetermined timing.

Further, in FIG. 123, at a predetermined timing of the first variable effect, it is possible to execute normal reach → SP reach → SPSP reach, but in FIG. 124, execution of these reach effects is restricted at a predetermined timing.

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 124(d)).

Here, it is assumed that the special figure variation pattern 08 was transmitted as a special figure variation pattern designation command, but the production control unit 130m could not receive it normally.
In this case, the variable production pattern (for example, any of variable production patterns 15 to 17) corresponding to special symbol variation pattern 08 is not executed, and the second variation production that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. continues (see FIG. 124(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure starts in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

In other words, from the timing of T4 to the timing of T5, the "decision success performance" (first movable member 73 ``movement to the maximum operation position'', ``successful vibration performance'', and ``successful light emission performance'' will not be executed. In other words, the first movable member 73 is at the initial position (origin position), the production button 17 is in a non-vibrating state, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 emit light while stopped (Fig. 124(d) ) to FIG. 124(e)).

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second variable display 82 stops being displayed (turns off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 124(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance. In other words, the opening performance is started without executing the reach performance such as normal reach, SP reach, or SPSP reach.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the word "jackpot" is displayed. Also, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 start emitting light during the jackpot game (see FIG. 124(f)). From the timing of T6, it becomes possible to execute a notice during the jackpot game (for example, a "reserved consecutive notice" that suggests that consecutive jackpots will occur after the jackpot game ends if there is a jackpot indication in the reserved information).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, a process is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol at this timing, and the production control unit 130m The stored number of reserved first special symbols changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed (updated) decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

In addition, here, we will discuss specific example 1 when the production control section normally receives a command in the normal gaming state, and specific example 20 when the production control section cannot receive the command normally (command abnormality has occurred). As explained above, even if the game ball enters the second starting port 47 in a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) and a variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the basic The flow is similar to the explanation above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 123 to 124, a specific variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern 08) and a variation production pattern corresponding to special symbol variation pattern 01 (for example, variation production patterns 15 to 17) ), if the production control unit successfully receives the command, it will execute "decision success production (movement of the first movable member 73 to the maximum operation position)", "decision success vibration production", Although it is possible to execute the "determined successful light emission effect," if the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, that is, at the timing of T3, the stop command (as a stop signal) is sent from the main control unit 110m. The production control unit 130m could not normally receive the special figure stop designation command (special figure stop designation command) (a command error occurred), and at the timing of T4, the start command (the first signal as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the special figure reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command (special symbol fluctuation pattern 08) (command abnormality has occurred), the "determined successful performance" (Movement of the first movable member 73 to the maximum operating position)," "Successful decision vibration performance," and "Successful decision light emission performance" were restricted (not executed). Therefore, in the non-irregular state (FIG. 123), the player is stimulated by executing the "successful decision effect (movement of the first movable member 73 to the maximum operating position)", "successful decision vibration effect", and "successful decision light emission effect". On the other hand, during the continuation of the second variable performance (FIGS. 124(d) to 124(e)) in the irregular state (FIG. 124), there is a sudden change in the "decisive success performance (the maximum of the first movable member 73)". It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to execution of "movement to the operating position", "successful decision vibration effect", and "successful decision light emission effect".

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 123 to 124, a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 08) and a variation effect pattern corresponding to special figure variation pattern 01 (for example, any of the variation effect patterns 15 to 17) ), if the production control unit successfully receives the command, it is possible to execute various preview productions (for example, pseudo-continuation production, pending icon change production); If it cannot be received normally, that is, at the timing of T3, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m (command abnormality). has occurred), at the timing of T4, the start commands (first special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command (special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m When the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the variation pattern 08)) (command abnormality has occurred), execution of various preview performances is restricted. Therefore, in the non-irregular state (Fig. 123), expectations for a jackpot can be improved by executing various preview performances, while during the continuation of the second variable performance in the irregular state (Fig. 124) (Fig. 124 (d) ) to FIG. 124(e)), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to sudden execution of various preview performances (for example, pseudo-continuous performance, pending icon change performance).

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 123 to 124, a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 08) and a variation effect pattern corresponding to special figure variation pattern 01 (for example, any of the variation effect patterns 15 to 17) ), if the production control unit normally receives the command, it is possible to execute the reach production, but if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, that is, at the timing of T3, The production control unit 130m could not normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m (a command error occurred), and at the timing of T4, the main control unit The production control unit 130m correctly receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command as a start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command (special symbol variation pattern 08)) transmitted from 110m. If the command could not be received (a command error occurred), the execution of the reach effect was restricted. Therefore, in the non-irregular state (Fig. 123), the expectation of a jackpot can be improved by executing the reach effect, while in the irregular state (Fig. 124), while the second variable effect continues (Fig. 124 (d) ~FIG. 124(e)), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the sudden execution of the reach effect.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 124, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol ends while the second variable performance is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is started later is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the second variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 124, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 124, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When the time command (stop signal) is received, and when the icon (second running information) corresponding to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is displayed, the stop command (stop signal) of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is received. When a signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 124, in the normal gaming state, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is "0". When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number of special drawings on hold is "0", the first The number of reserved special drawings is now displayed as being reduced to "0". Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In the example of FIG. 124, even if the fluctuation display performed from the timing T4 to the timing T5 is a jackpot fluctuation, the maximum operating position of the first movable member 73 at a predetermined timing (timing T1 in FIG. 123) Although the movement is limited to the maximum movement position, the movement to the maximum movement position is also possible. To achieve this, as explained above in the "predetermined effect" section, for example, if the half difference of the connector is canceled between the timing of T4 and the timing of T5, at that timing, the original T4 When a special figure variation pattern designation command (for example, special figure variation pattern 08) that allows the first movable member 73 to move to the maximum operation position is received by sending the start command that was supposed to be sent at the timing of , the first movable member 73 can be moved to the maximum operating position at a timing corresponding to timing T1 in FIG.

Further, in a similar manner, the vibration of the effect button 17 and the rainbow emission of the lighting device can also be executed at a predetermined timing (timing T1 in FIG. 123). Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a jackpot before the timing of T6, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the sudden start of the performance corresponding to the jackpot game at the timing of T6.

In addition, using the same method, it is possible to execute reach effects, pseudo-continuous effects, decisive effects, and pending icon change effects at predetermined timings (for example, in the case of reach effects, the timing at which each reach effect is executed). can. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to feel uncomfortable.

(Specific example 22 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 22 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating the performance mode during the jackpot game after the event shown in FIG. 113 occurs. In other words, FIG. 113(e) and FIG. 125(e) are approximately the same scene. In addition, "1st special pattern loss is changing" and "2nd special pattern jackpot is changing" in Figure 113 can also be read as "2nd special pattern losing is changing" and "1st special pattern jackpot is changing". Similarly, the presentation mode shown in FIG. 125 is obtained.

First, the case of a jackpot with "special symbol 02" will be explained. When the "special symbol 02" is determined, after the combination of the production symbol 70a of "814" comes to a final stop in FIG. 125(e), an image such as "Super Jackpot" is displayed in FIG. 125(f). The opening performance is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 125(g), during the execution of the round game, a character image KG and a character introduction image KSG are displayed to perform an effect that introduces the characters displayed in the reach effect, etc. ing.

In other words, when "special symbol 02" is determined, "777" can be permanently stopped as a combination of the corresponding production symbols 70a, and "777" can be permanently stopped as a combination of production symbols 70a. After that, the effect to introduce the characters shown in FIG. 125(g) is executed.
However, although "special symbol 02" has been determined, if it is impossible to permanently stop "777" as a combination of the corresponding production symbol 70a (for example, when the event shown in FIG. 113 occurs), , as a combination of the corresponding performance symbol 70a, "777" is not brought to a final stop, but during a jackpot game, the same performance (performance introducing the character) as when "777" is originally brought to a final stop is performed. There is.

On the other hand, when "Special symbol 01" or "Special symbol 03" is determined, after the combination of "814" production symbol 70a in FIG. 125(e) comes to a final stop, "Jackpot" in FIG. 125(f) is determined. An opening performance is performed in which an image such as '' is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 125(g), during the execution of the round game, the probability variable mission effect described in FIG. 78 is executed.

In other words, when "special symbol 01" or "special symbol 03" is determined, it is possible to make a combination of even number symbols (zero), for example, as the combination of the corresponding production symbols 70a, and to make the production stop. After the combination of even symbols as the combination of the symbols 70a is finally stopped, the variable probability mission effect shown in FIG. 125(g) is executed.
However, if "special symbol 01" or "special symbol 03" is determined, but it is impossible to make a combination of even symbols as a combination of the corresponding production symbols 70a (for example, as shown in FIG. 113) If an event occurs), the combination of even symbols is not stopped as the combination of the corresponding performance symbols 70a, but the same performance as when the combination of even symbols is originally stopped during a jackpot game (probable variable mission performance) is designed to be executed.
Then, when "special symbol 01" is determined, the variable probability mission presentation is a failure, and when "special symbol 03" is determined, the variable probability mission presentation is successful.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 125, when the event shown in FIG. 113 occurs, the combination that notifies you of a jackpot is not stopped as the combination of production symbols 70a, but the determined special It is possible to perform performances during the jackpot game according to the symbols. Therefore, when the combination of performance symbols 70a stops, it is difficult to know which special symbol it is, but depending on the performance executed during the jackpot game (character introduction performance, variable mission performance), which special symbol is the one? It becomes easier to understand whether it is a symbol (special symbol 02, special symbol 01, or special symbol 03). Furthermore, when a variable mission performance is executed, it becomes easier to understand which special symbol (special symbol 01 or special symbol 03) it is, depending on the result. Therefore, even if the combination of the performance symbols 70a corresponding to the special symbols cannot be completely stopped, a certain sense of satisfaction can be given to the player.

(Specific example 23 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 23 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 126. The upper diagram in FIG. 126 is the timing chart 18 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1" to "0". As the second special symbol decreases, a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 47 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 126(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the second variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 126(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 126(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 126(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second fluctuation display 82 stops displaying (turns off) in a loss mode, but the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-first fluctuation display 81. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 126(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is when a new prize is won based on a prize in the first start opening 45. The command (win signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol reservation number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the production control unit 130m receives the pattern specification command (see FIG. 126(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the second starting port 47, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the production control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings that is "1" is maintained.

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol and start the opening production. .

Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being erased as an animation (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 126, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the first special symbol is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the second variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 126, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the loss variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) is received for the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol that was started after the end, the second variation production (variation display of the production symbol 70a, variation display of the special symbol TZ) in a loss mode is received. ). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 126, in the normal game state, during the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ that was started in response to the variable display of the second special pattern failing, if a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special pattern that was started after the variable display of the second special pattern ended is received, the sub-second variable display 82 is caused to stop displaying the failing state (light off), but the sub-first variable display 81 is not caused to stop displaying the lamp pattern LZ in the jackpot state (light on). This makes it possible to avoid processing such as switching the lamp pattern from the failing state (light off) to the jackpot state, and to end the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 126, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 126, in the normal gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. When the time command (stop signal) is received, and when the icon (second running information) corresponding to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is displayed, the stop command (stop signal) of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is received. When a signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 126, in the normal gaming state, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is "0". When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number of special drawings on hold is "0", the first The number of reserved special drawings is now displayed as being reduced to "0". Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the second variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 24 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 24 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 127. The upper diagram in FIG. 127 is a timing chart 19 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in a specific game state, and FIGS. 127(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 by the player hitting left, or a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the normal gaming state before entering the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state). As the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the number of reserved first special symbols decreases from "1" to "0". Loss fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the first pending icon display area 70B. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the second starting port 47, and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output because the winning is entered into the second starting port 47 during the specific gaming state. (See Figure 127(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 127(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 127(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 127(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped and displayed (turned off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 127(e)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until the demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of the special symbol starts (see FIG. 127(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, processing is performed to end the variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the production control unit 130m The stored number of reserved second special symbols changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ permanently stops at “814”, which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved second special symbols displayed in the display area 70F will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode.

(Specific example 25 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 25 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 128. The upper diagram in FIG. 128 is a timing chart 20 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in a specific game state, and FIGS. 128(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 by the player hitting left, or a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the normal gaming state before entering the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state). As the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the number of reserved first special symbols decreases from "1" to "0". Loss fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the first pending icon display area 70B. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the second starting port 47, and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since the winning is in the second start opening 47 during the specific gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 128(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 128(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 128(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 128(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-first variable display 81 stops displaying (turns off) in a losing mode, but the second lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-second variable display 82. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 128(e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the second start opening 47. The command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (2nd special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 128(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the first start opening 45, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the performance control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. The number of second special drawings reserved is maintained at "1".

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the performance control unit 130m, processing is performed to end the variable performance started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and start the opening performance at this timing.

Then, the relevant icon TI (normal icon, special icon ) will be displayed as one frame of non-animation, and the opening image will be displayed (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, in a specific game state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol is received, the first variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, since the first variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, in a specific game state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the first fluctuation performance (fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, in a specific game state, during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the first special When a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 are In any case, the lamp pattern LZ in the jackpot mode (lit) is not displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, it is not necessary to carry out processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, in a specific game state, while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, the first special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, in a specific game state, the first special symbol changes while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. When a command to stop the display (stop signal) is received, and when the command to stop the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed while the corresponding icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, in the specific game state, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second number of reserved special drawings display area 70F. The number of reserved 2nd special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the second special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in a specific gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol, the loss of the second special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the first variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 26 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 26 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIG. 129. The upper diagram in FIG. 129 is a timing chart 21 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in a specific game state, and FIGS. 129(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Further, one pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed (reduced) as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). In addition, the icon TI is in a state where it is performing a rotating action (acting action).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 due to reasons such as the player hitting left-handed, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases. Increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the specific gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 129(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 129(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 129(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 129(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure starts in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second variable display 82 is stopped and displayed (turned off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 129(e)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until a demonstration effect is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 129(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, a process is performed to end the variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the production control unit 130m The stored number of reserved first special symbols changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

(Specific example 27 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 27 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIG. 130. The upper diagram in FIG. 130 is the timing chart 22 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in a specific game state, and FIGS. This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, the pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed (reduced) as a 20-frame animation in the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 due to reasons such as the player hitting left-handed, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases. Increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the specific gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 130(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 130(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command error has occurred), the second variable production will end. processing is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 130(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process to start the variable production is not performed (Fig. 130 ( d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure starts in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second fluctuation display 82 stops displaying (turns off) in a loss mode, but the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-first fluctuation display 81. The display will not be stopped (see FIG. 130(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the first start opening 45. The command (win signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the production control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 130(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the second starting port 47, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the production control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings that is "1" is maintained.

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol and start the opening production. .

Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being erased as an animation (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 129 to 130, in a specific game state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) for the first special symbol variable display that is started after the end of the first special symbol variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the second variable effect ends at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to end the second variable effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 129 to 130, in a specific game state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the second fluctuation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 129 to 130, in a specific game state, during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the second special When a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 are In either case, the lamp pattern LZ in the jackpot mode (lit) is not displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 129 to 130, in a specific game state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the second special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the icon is deleted upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 129 to 130, in a specific game state, the second special symbol changes while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. When the stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the stop command for the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed while the corresponding icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 129 to 130, in the specific game state, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-first holding display 83 and the first number of special drawings on hold display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in a specific gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the second variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 28 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 28 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 131. Note that FIGS. 131(a) to 131(d) are scenes corresponding to FIGS. 114(a) to 114(d), so the description will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 131(a), a background image HG imitating a mountain is displayed as the mode A background. Then, if a temporary stop is performed in FIG. 131(b), and the stop command cannot be received normally in FIG. 131(c), the display of the background image HG imitating a mountain that was displayed as the mode A background is terminated. Then, a background image HG imitating the ocean is displayed as a mode A special background.

This background image HG imitating the sea is a background image that is displayed only when, for example, the stop command cannot be received normally and the variable performance cannot be ended. If the start command cannot be received normally in FIG. 131(d), the background image HG imitating the sea is subsequently displayed as the mode A special background.

For example, if the start command in Figure 131(d) is received normally, or if the start command in Figure 131(d) is not received normally, the next command (for example, stop command, customer waiting state) If the specified command (opening specified command) is received normally, at that point, the background image HG imitating a mountain is restored as the mode A background.

In addition, when displaying the background image HG imitating the sea as the mode A special background, for example, a timer counter is provided on the effect control board 130 side, and the command at the start (especially the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is After determining the fluctuation time through reception, the timer counter is set to a time corresponding to the determined fluctuation time. When the timer counter becomes 0 as a result of the subtraction, it is determined whether a stop command has been received, and if a stop command has not been received, a background imitating the ocean is set as a mode A special background. Processing such as displaying the image HG is assumed.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 131, when the stop command cannot be received normally, a background image that is displayed only when the event occurs is displayed. This makes it easier for the user to understand that some kind of irregularity has occurred due to the display of an unfamiliar background image.

Note that the display of the Mode A special background is just an example, and the display of the background image HG that imitates the mountains of the Mode A background continues, but it is possible to understand that some irregularities have occurred due to changes in other displayed objects. You may make it easier. For example, the effect pattern 70a may be erased, or the hold icon may be erased. Similar effects can be expected with such a method.

(Specific example 29 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 29 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIG. 132. In addition, in FIG. 132, the normal gaming state will be explained as an example, but it can also be read as a specific gaming state.

First, at timing T0, it is shown that a customer waiting state is in the normal gaming state, and at this time, the first image display device 70 is executing a customer waiting demonstration performance, and in the customer waiting demonstration performance, , while the production pattern 70a, the icon display area 70C, the first pending icon display area 70B, and the background corresponding to the mode (for example, mode A background) are hidden (hard to see), the main stop display of the special pattern TZ , the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F are displayed (visibly displayed).
It is assumed that the combination of performance symbols 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 before the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance is "814", and the combination of special symbols TZ is "814".

Next, at timing T1, while a customer waiting demonstration performance (for example, a display such as "Pachinko ABC" indicating the model name) is being executed, the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 are damaged due to an impact or the like. It is assumed that a disconnection or the like (for example, a disconnected connector) has occurred in the signal line for command communication (from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130) (see FIG. 132(a)).
Further, even if the signal line is disconnected, the first image display device 70 does not notify that the disconnection has occurred, and continues to perform the customer waiting demonstration performance.

Next, at timing T2, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the main control unit 110m sends a winning command (first special figure reservation number designation command and pre-reading designation command as a winning signal). However, since the disconnection that occurred at timing T0 has not been resolved, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command.

For this reason, the first image display device 70 continues to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance (for example, a display such as "Beware of getting addicted!" that urges to prevent excessive involvement in the game), and the icon display area 70C and the first reservation icon display area 70B remain hidden (hard to see), and although the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E are visible, they are not updated. Therefore, it is difficult to grasp that a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 45.

Next, at the timing of T3, the main control unit 110m transmits a start time command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as a start time signal), but the timing Since the disconnection, etc. that occurred at T0 has not been resolved, the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command.

Therefore, the first image display device 70 continues to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance (for example, displaying the character image KG), the performance pattern 70a is not displayed (hard to see), and the special pattern TZ is also not displayed. It is in a stopped state at "814", the sub-first variable display 81 remains off, the icon display area 70C also remains hidden (hard to see), and the audio output device 9 is also silent. Therefore, unless one watches the first special symbol display 60, it is difficult to understand that the variable display is currently being performed.

Next, at timing T4, it is assumed that the disconnection of the signal line (for example, disconnection of the connector) has been resolved. That is, at this timing, the production control section 130m is in a state where it can normally receive the command transmitted from the main control section 110m.

Next, at timing T5, a stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) is transmitted from the main control unit 110m, and the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command. In this case, the first image display device 70 ends the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance, and displays the performance pattern 70a, the icon display area 70C, the first pending icon display area 70B, and the background corresponding to the mode (for example, the mode A background). Display (visibly display).
At this time, the production pattern 70a is displayed in a permanently stopped state (displayed visually) without making a temporary stop, and for example, a losing combination of "814" is made to make a real stop. On the other hand, in the special pattern TZ, since the main stop display of "814" has been visible since the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance, the main stop display of "814" is continued here as well.
In other words, from the player's viewpoint, the customer waiting demonstration effect was visible, but suddenly the effect pattern 70a becomes visible in the fully stopped state (only the result is visible).
Thereafter, at timing T6, when a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance control unit 130m executes a customer waiting performance.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 132, the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 perform command communication (from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130) during execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance. If there is a break in the signal line (for example, a disconnected connector, etc.) and a start winning occurs in that state, and then the disconnect, etc. (for example, a disconnected connector, etc.) is resolved and the stop command is normally received, The customer-waiting demonstration performance was promptly ended, and the performance pattern 70a was made visible in the fully stopped state (only the result was visible). Therefore, by promptly notifying the player of the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to feel uncomfortable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 132, even if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command at the time of winning or the command at the time of start, execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance is continued. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a great deal of discomfort, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of boredom by executing the customer waiting demonstration performance.

In addition, in the customer waiting demonstration production, the main stop display of the special symbol TZ, the first special symbol pending number display area 70E, and the second special symbol pending number display area 70F may also be hidden (hard to see).

In addition, in FIG. 132(d), both the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ have the loss display mode "814" different from the initial roll stopped (the symbol combination indicating the result of the previous fluctuating display) However, in FIG. 132(d), the initial roll (for example, 135) may be stopped.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand that some kind of abnormality has occurred by displaying the initial result.

In addition, in FIG. 132(d), both the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ have the loss display mode "814" different from the initial roll stopped (the symbol combination indicating the result of the previous fluctuating display) 132(d), a special display mode different from the lose display mode or the initial roll may be performed. For example, both the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ may be displayed as "???" or may be displayed as "XXXX".
According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand that some kind of abnormality has occurred by displaying the special display mode.

Further, in FIG. 132, the explanation has been given using the example of "the first special pattern loss is changing", but this may also be "the first special pattern jackpot is changing". Even in that case, the above-mentioned symbol combinations (e.g. "814", e.g. "135", e.g. "???", e.g. "XX The opening performance of the jackpot game may be started without any delay.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to save the effort of performing the process of displaying the jackpot display mode such as "555", so the control process can be simplified.

In addition, in FIG. 132, the sound (BGM) output from the audio output device 9 is "silent" from beginning to end, but when the stop command is normally received at timing T5, the BGM is output for a predetermined period of time. You can also do this.
According to such a configuration, in addition to displaying the effect pattern 70a so that it is visible in the fully stopped state, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the irregular state has returned to the normal state.

In addition, in FIG. 132, the sound (sound effect) output from the audio output device 9 is "silent" from beginning to end, but the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a is caused by the normal reception of the stop command at timing T5. A stop sound that is output at the same time may also be output.
According to such a configuration, even if the production pattern 70a suddenly becomes visible in the state of the main stop, it is possible to make it easy to recognize that the main stop has occurred.
On the other hand, the stop sound may not be output uniformly.

In the above explanation, the game machine was explained as having a "stop command" (a special figure stop command as a stop signal), but it also has a "stop command" (a special figure stop command as a stop signal). The same thing as described above is also possible for gaming machines that do not have the above-mentioned system.
For example, if a "stop command" is not provided, it is assumed that the production control board 130 is provided with a timer counter. Then, when a special figure variation pattern designation command is received from the main control board 110, since the variation time can be specified, the specified variation time is set in the timer counter. Then, when the set timer reaches "0", the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ can be stopped without requiring a "stop command" (special pattern stop command as a stop signal).

In addition, it may happen that the timer counter itself is out of order, or that the special figure variation pattern designation command itself is abnormal and the timer is set to exceed the actual variation time. In this case, the same situation as the above-described "stop command" (special figure stop command as a stop signal) may not be received normally. In other words, the display mode is as shown in FIG. 114(c).
Even in such a case, if the command at the start of the next fluctuating display is normally received or the subsequent customer waiting state designation command is normally received, the production pattern 70a and special pattern TZ will be stopped. can be done.

Further, for example, in FIG. 114, an example will be described in which the main control unit 110m executes the second special pattern loss variation and then executes the first special pattern loss variation, and in FIG. Although the explanation has been given using an example in which the first special figure losing variation is executed in the section 110m and then the second special figure losing variation is executed, the first special figure losing variation is executed in the main control section 110m. It is also possible to apply (for example, the contents of FIG. 114, FIG. 127, etc.) to the case where the first special pattern loss fluctuation is executed and the second special pattern loss fluctuation is executed in the main control unit 110m. It is also possible to apply (for example, the contents of FIG. 114, FIG. 127, etc.) when executing and then executing the second special figure loss variation.

(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a production lever device 23 is provided in addition to the production button 17 as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment. Note that a description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 133, a production lever device 23 functioning as an input device is provided on the center bottom side of the upper plate 11 so as to be on the front and back sides of the production button device 16.
The production lever device 23 is provided on the center bottom side of the upper tray 11 so as to be on the opposite side of the production button device 16, and includes a production lever 24 that can be pulled toward the front by the player, and a production lever 24. A production lever detection switch (not shown) that detects an operation on the production lever 24 and a lever vibration motor (not shown) that vibrates the production lever 24 are provided. Predetermined information can be input to 1.

The effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11, so when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibrations cause the upper plate 11 to act as a transmission member. The signal is transmitted to the production lever 24 via. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the production lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the production button 17 via the upper plate 11. In other words, when the player is manually operating one operation part, the other operation part vibrates (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut). When a vibration performance with/without the validity period of the operation part related to an in-performance, final performance, re-lottery performance, confirmed performance, etc. is executed, the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand via the other operation part. It is supposed to be done.

In addition, since the production button device 16 and production lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11 attached to the glass frame 4, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the production button 17 is driven, the vibration acts as a transmission member. It is also transmitted to the firing handle via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4, which perform the function. Further, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4.

(Decision production pattern determination table)
FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a fixed performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a fixed performance pattern in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 134, the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each successive performance pattern, and selected performance pattern are associated with the final performance pattern determination table. For reference, the production structure (effective suggestion production, validity period, production content) of each fixed production pattern is described.

"Effective suggesting effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur. Specifically, it includes a semi-transparent effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a semi-transparent effect imitating the effect lever 24. This is an effect in which a transparent effect lever image is moved and displayed on the first image display device 70, and a translucent effect button image and a translucent effect lever image are gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the fixed performance ends when the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24 is operated once or when 5 seconds elapse.

The "operation target" in the valid period column indicates the type of the operation part (effect button 17, effect lever 24) whose operation is valid during the valid period. The operation becomes valid, and if it is the "production lever", the operation of the production lever 24 becomes valid.
"Promotional performance" is a performance that prompts the operation of the operation unit (performance button 17, performance lever 24) during the valid period, and specifically, it is a performance that prompts the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, performance lever 24), and specifically, it is a performance that prompts the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, performance lever 24), and specifically, it is a performance that encourages the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, production lever 24). As a result, an opaque effect button image or an opaque effect lever image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed.

"Normal Button White" in the promotion effect column means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. 17 indicates that white light is emitted.
"Protruding button red" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 emits red light. It is shown that.
"Protruding button rainbow" means that a button image imitating the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image, and the effect button 17 also emits a rainbow light. It is shown that.

The "normal lever" indicates that a production lever image imitating the production lever 24 of a predetermined size is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque production lever image.
"Large lever rainbow" indicates that a production lever image imitating the production lever 24 larger than a predetermined size is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque production lever image.

“Operation unit status” in the valid period column indicates the status of the operation unit (production button 17, production lever 24) during the validity period, and “normal” means that the target operation unit is the production button 17. If there is, it is a normal state in which it is not protruding, and "protruding" indicates that if the target operation section is the production button 17, it is in a protruding state in which it is protruding. In addition, since the production lever 24 does not have a protruding state, it is only in a normal state.

"Failure" in the column of winning presentation mode refers to a failed presentation indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed because the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color. indicates that it will be executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and emits rainbow-colored light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. This indicates that a successful performance will be executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column is determined by the vibrator to vibrate the performance button 17 and is determined by the start of a successful performance (= when the performance button 17 is operated or the valid period ends) This shows that a strong vibration performance (decision success vibration performance) is executed in which strong vibrations are performed for 4 seconds and then strong vibrations are performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the button light emission column is determined by the effect button LED for causing the effect button 17 to emit light and starts from the start of a successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This shows that rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 17). Note that even if the operation target is the effect lever 24, the effect button 17 emits a rainbow light.

The expected jackpot for each promotional effect is ``normal button white'' < ``protruding button red'' < ``normal lever'' < ``protruding button rainbow'' = ``large lever rainbow.'' Furthermore, the jackpot expectation level for each operation unit state is "normal" < "prominent".

The first feature of the deciding performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the performance (direction) is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 134 is that the valid period occurs over the longest period of time that occurs during the variable performance. Therefore, inconveniences such as the player missing the operation of the performance button 17 can be suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 134 is that the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24 vibrates for the longest period as a strong vibration performance that occurs during a variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of successful performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 134 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24. Therefore, even after the vibration of the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24 ends, the player's sense of elation can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that during the effective period of the production lever 24, there was only 5 seconds for a single hit related to the final performance, but for example, the production lever 24 is made to be operated multiple times, such as for 5 seconds in a row, and each time the production lever 24 is operated, As the performance progresses (for example, by increasing the level gauge), when the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), a success performance or a failure performance may be executed. The production lever 24 is caused to continue to be operated, and while the production lever 24 continues to be operated, the production progresses (for example, by increasing the level gauge), and the duration is determined to be a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). A success performance or a determined failure performance may be executed.

In addition, during the validity period related to the advanced performance or the pseudo continuous performance, the performance lever 24 may be operated once when a performance with high expectation of jackpot is executed, or the performance lever 24 may be operated continuously. Alternatively, the production lever 24 may be held down for a long time (for example, 2 seconds). In the case of consecutive pulls, the performance advances each time the performance lever 24 is operated (for example, by increasing the level gauge), and when the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), an SPSP development performance or a pseudo continuous success performance is executed. It is a good idea to do so. In addition, if the effect lasts for a long time, the effect is advanced while the effect lever 24 continues to be operated (for example, by increasing the level gauge), and when the duration reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the SPSP development effect is started. It is preferable that a pseudo continuous success effect be executed.

In addition, when the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 is extended or continuously pulled, the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 may be made to vibrate weakly each time the effect progresses (the level gauge increases to the next stage). good.

In addition, the vibration intensity of the production button 17 has weak vibrations and strong vibrations, and the vibration intensity of the production lever 24 has strong vibrations, but even with the same strong vibration, the production lever 24 has a higher vibration intensity than the production button 17. The stronger vibration may have a higher vibration intensity, or the stronger vibration of the effect button 17 may have a higher vibration intensity than that of the effect lever 24.

Further, the type of vibration (vibration time, vibration intensity) may be varied depending on the type of validity period (operation promotion image: single press, long press, repeated press, prolonged press, continuous press). For example, a single press of the production button 17 for 3 seconds during a dialogue preview production or a pseudo-continuous production will be treated as 1 second of weak vibration, and a long press of the production button 17 for 4 seconds during an advanced production will be treated as 1 second of weak vibration, and a cut will be made. A single press of the production button 17 for 4 seconds during the in-performance will result in a weak vibration of 3 seconds, a single press of the production button 17 for 5 seconds during the final production will result in a strong vibration of 4 seconds → 5 seconds, and a production during the advanced production. If the lever 24 is held down for 4 seconds, the strong vibration may be set for 1 second.

Further, when the pending icon or the icon changes to a display mode with high expectation of jackpot (for example, red or rainbow), the production button 17 or production lever 24 may be vibrated weakly or strongly for one second. .

In this embodiment, all three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop (shaking motion) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, but the left and right performance symbols 70a stop and the center performance Only the symbol 70a may be temporarily stopped (swinging motion). At this time, all three performance symbols 70a may perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion), or the left and right performance symbols 70a may not perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion), and only the center performance symbol 70a may perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion). ).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the decoration part are made to fluctuate (production movement). Only one of them may be made to perform a fluctuating motion (acting motion).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and a numeric part (identification character) does not perform a fluctuating motion (performance motion). The texture (surface pattern, etc.) may be made to perform a fluctuation motion (presentation motion), or the identification portion may be caused to perform a fluctuation motion (presentation motion) by adding a light emitting effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a may be expanded/contracted. In this case, if a start command (start signal) is received during a temporary stop, if the production pattern 70a is deviated from the stop position in the direction of shrinking (smaller than the normal size) or in the direction of enlargement. (larger than the normal size), it is preferable to display the normal size at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a does not swing and the decorative part and number part protrude from the base image. It may also be made to fluctuate as shown in FIG. In this case, when a start command (start signal) is received during a temporary stop, if the decorative part or number part is out of alignment with the base image, it will fit within the base image and be displayed at the stop position. It is a good idea to do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), since the effect pattern 70a is composed of only a number part (identification character), the decoration part fluctuates when the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. Although the movement (performance movement) is not performed, the performance pattern 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decoration part consisting of a pattern effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. It may also be made to perform a fluctuating motion (acting motion).

Further, in this embodiment, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 are not mentioned during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, but the frame illumination device 76 is not mentioned during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. At least one of the plurality of light emitting units 10 may be set in the same manner as during the temporary stop before the extension (emission mode with lower brightness than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change or movement than during fluctuation). , at least one of the plurality of light emitting parts constituting the board lighting device 76 is set in the same light emission mode as during temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower brightness than during fluctuation, light emission with less change or movement than during fluctuation) mode, lights out). In this case, the next time a start time command (start time signal) is received, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 will change (switch) to a light emission mode corresponding to the fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production pattern 70a in the losing mode stops, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), but the special symbol TZ has the same number as the production pattern 70a. The actual stop may be performed in a manner of failure. In addition, when the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined jackpot mode ("333") when the production pattern 70a in the jackpot mode stops, the special symbol TZ stops in the jackpot mode with the same number as the production pattern 70a. It may be stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start time commands (special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command as the start time signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m while the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. ) is received by the production control unit 130m, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ continues, but similarly to the production symbol 70a, the variable display is started after being momentarily derived and displayed. You may also do so. In this case, regarding the special symbol TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbol TZ that is shifted from the predetermined stopping position at the stopping position.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a start command (start signal) or a customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TI is displayed, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation. However, it only needs to be shorter than the 10 frames required to erase the relevant icon TI based on the reception of the stop command (stop signal), the 20 frames required to shift the display of the hold icon HI, and the 10 frames required to additionally display the hold icon. , for example, it may be erased after five frames of animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a start command (start signal) is received while displaying more pending icons than the number of reserved special drawings, the excess pending icons HI are erased with one frame of non-animation. However, from the 10 frames required to erase the relevant icon TI based on reception of the stop command (stop signal), the 20 frames required to shift the display of the hold icon HI, and the 10 frames required to additionally display the hold icon. It is sufficient if the number of frames is short; for example, the animation may be erased after five frames of animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives a start time command (start time signal) in which the number of reserved special pictures becomes a predetermined number, the number of reserved special pictures and production control notified from the main control unit 110m are controlled. If an inconsistency occurs due to a command abnormality (an abnormality in which the number is the same, an abnormality in which there is a deviation in the increasing direction) between the number of reserved special drawings stored (understood) by the unit 130m, a predetermined A predetermined number of hold icons is displayed after displaying one more hold icon than the predetermined number, but a predetermined number of hold icons is displayed without displaying one more hold icon than the predetermined number. may be displayed as is.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives a start time command (start time signal) in which the number of reserved special pictures becomes a predetermined number, the number of reserved special pictures and production control notified from the main control unit 110m are controlled. If an inconsistency occurs due to a command abnormality (an abnormality where the number is the same, an abnormality where there is a deviation in the increasing direction) between the number of reserved special drawings that the unit 130m has memorized (kept), this The icon is displayed during a variable performance that is executed in response to receiving a start command (start signal); The icon may not be displayed inside.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal icon is a white icon regardless of the type of performance mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be changed depending on the type of performance mode or gaming state. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of performance mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed depending on the type of performance mode or game state.

In addition, when changing the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon depending on the type of production mode or game state, the operation mode (performance movement mode) during the variable production should be changed depending on the form of the normal icon. Good too. Furthermore, even when changing the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon depending on the type of performance mode or game state, the operation mode (performance operation mode) during the variable performance can be changed depending on the form of the special icon. Good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but special icons that suggest a change to a special icon (displayed in the process of changing to a special icon) and specific A specific icon indicating that a reach effect (for example, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect) will be executed may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to make the form and presentation operation of the special icon or specific icon different from the form and presentation operation of the normal icon or special icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hold icon is displayed when both the special figure hold number designation command and the pre-read designation command as the winning command (win signal) are successfully received. If the number designation command is received and the prefetch designation command is not received normally, a pending icon is displayed, while if the special drawing reservation number designation command is not received normally and the prefetch designation command is received normally. The hold icon may not be displayed, or vice versa. In addition, when displaying a pending icon by receiving only one of the special figure pending number designation command and the prefetch designation command, the icon change effect for this pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the performance mode cannot be changed by operating the performance button 17 by the player, but the performance mode may be changed by operating the performance button 17. In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a based on the command abnormality in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, no operation for changing the production mode is accepted, that is, the production button 17 It is preferable to restrict changes in the production mode based on the operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the hold icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the hold icon is displayed as a button icon that prompts the operation of the effect button 17, and An operation change effect may be executed in which the button icon is changed to any one of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon in response to the effect button 17 being operated while the button icon is displayed. . In this case, in the operation change production, the production button 17 is changed from the first operation mode (non-vibration, non-protruding state in the standby position) to the second operation mode (vibration, protrusion state in the production position) at a predetermined rate. You can do it like this. In this case, the rate at which the production button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change production is higher than the rate at which the production button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-mentioned dialogue preview production or decision production. It is better to make the rate of change higher.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the effect button image executed in the effective suggestion effect is semi-transparent, but it may also be a effect button image that is not translucent but only an outline, or a effect button image that is only a silhouette. good.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) or a development performance is executed, a vibration performance of the performance button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) can be executed. However, a movable frame member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and an action performance that moves the frame movable member may be performed when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed in the pre-reach preview performance or development performance. Instead of the vibration effect, an action effect that moves the frame movable member may be performed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a vibrating effect of the effect button 17 when performing a post-reach preview effect (pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decisive effect, confirmed effect) or when the symbols are aligned. , a frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the symbols are aligned, an action effect may be executed in which the frame movable member is operated, or instead of the vibration effect. It may also be possible to perform an action effect that moves the frame movable member.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is being executed, the title is not displayed to indicate that the reach effect is being performed, but the display format with different jackpot expectations (white characters, The title may be displayed using either red text, which has a higher jackpot expectation than white text, or rainbow text, which guarantees a jackpot, etc. After the title is displayed in white text, it changes to red text or rainbow text. You may also do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, the cut-in performance was performed at the end of the SP reach performance, but it is now performed in the middle (first period) or the end (second period) of the SP reach performance. Even if the production button 17 is more likely to be in the protruding state (the ratio of the protruding state is higher) when the cut-in production is performed at the end of the SP reach production than when the cut-in production is performed in the middle. good.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a valid period is generated in which the performance button 17 is held down in the advanced performance, but a valid period in which the performance button 17 is pressed and held is generated as a jackpot preview performance other than the developed performance. At the same time, it may be possible to execute an operation progress effect that progresses the effect according to the long press period during the valid period. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the long press continues at a plurality of determination timings during the validity period, and determine to which stage the performance should be advanced based on the determination result.

In addition, in this embodiment, the icon (running information) indicating that the variable display of the special symbol is being executed is displayed on the image display device, but instead of displaying the icon, a predetermined The light emitting section may be made to emit light. In this case, the predetermined light emitting section is caused to emit light at the display timing of the icon corresponding to the shift display (decreasing display) of the pending icon accompanying the start of the variable effect, and the predetermined light emitting section is emitted at the timing when the icon concerned is erased as the variable effect ends. It is a good idea to turn off the lights. Furthermore, in the case of a gaming machine that erases the icon immediately after the start of the variable display, it is preferable to turn off the predetermined light emitting section immediately after the start of the variable display.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first variable performance is terminated by receiving a command to stop the variable display of the first special symbol, a command to stop the variable display of the second special symbol, an opening designation command, a customer waiting designation command, etc. However, it may be configured to end upon reception of a command at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, or it may be configured to end (stop) without receiving a command as the variable display time elapses. You may also do so. In addition, the second fluctuating performance will end (stop) upon reception of a command to stop the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, a command to stop the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, an opening designation command, a customer waiting designation command, etc. However, the variable display of the first special symbol may be terminated by receiving a command at the start of the variable display, or may be terminated (stopped) without receiving a command as the variable presentation time elapses.

(About combination with other irregular events)
In FIG. 114 and the like, it has been explained that a command abnormality occurs due to missing commands due to disconnection or half-disconnection, garbled commands due to noise, half-disconnection, or the like.
Here, combinations with other irregular events will be explained.

First, when the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 (from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130) do not have a disconnection in the signal line for command communication, for example, if the main control board 110 is connected to the production control board 110, When a disconnection or the like (such as a disconnected connector) occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 53a or the radio wave detection sensor 54a, a magnetic error or radio wave error is notified. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the act of disconnecting the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a in advance so that they cannot detect magnetism or radio waves, and then using a magnet or the like to win a prize.

On the other hand, between timing T1 and timing T2 in FIG. 114, there is a disconnection, etc. (connector For example, if a disconnection occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 53a or radio wave detection sensor 54a connected to the main control board 110 (connector disconnection, etc.), a magnetic error or radio wave error will be notified. This means that you will not be able to do so. The command related to the error cannot be sent because the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 (from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130) is disconnected (such as a disconnected connector). It's for a reason.

After that, while the main power supply (operating power supply) of the gaming machine 1 is ON, the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 (from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130) is disconnected. If the error is resolved, a command related to the error may be sent to notify the magnetic error or radio wave error.

On the other hand, when the main power supply (operating power supply) of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, a disconnection occurs in the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 (from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130). When the main power source (operating power source) of the game machine 1 is turned on after solving the problem (such as a disconnected connector), a notification of a magnetic error or a radio wave error may be made.

In any case, if the disconnection of the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 (from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130) is resolved, magnetic errors and radio wave errors will not be reported. Therefore, it is possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent attempts.

Note that when the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are disconnected (such as a disconnected connector), the main power supply (operating power supply) of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, and the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are turned off. If the main power source (operating power source) of the gaming machine 1 is turned on after the disconnection or the like is resolved, an unrecoverable error may be generated.

<Contents 1 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, determination information acquired when acquisition conditions are met is stored as a reserved memory, and based on the determination information, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result. It is common to perform variable effects based on this. Some of these gaming machines display an increase or decrease in the number of pending images corresponding to each pending memory, or display an execution image corresponding to a pending memory in which a variable performance has been executed. There are some that allow players to grasp the progress of the game (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem in that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of pending games when the number of pending games changes.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game effect that controls the performance of the game based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first pending information and a decreasing display of the second pending information when the number of pending memories decreases. The display of the first pending information is decreased (subtracted by 1) before the frame update timing at which the decreased display of the second pending information (movement to the center of the adjacent display area in the pending icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the update (update to the pending number) is completed is earlier. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (performance control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decrease in the first pending information and displays the second pending information on which the fluctuating effect has started. It is possible to perform a change display to change the execution information (the icon), and the change display of the second pending information to the execution information (movement from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the reduction display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the corresponding frame update timing. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first pending information and a decreasing display of the second pending information when the number of pending memories decreases. When the number of pending memories increases, it is possible to display an increase in the first pending information and an increase in the second pending information, and when the number of pending memories increases, the number of pending memories increases while the second pending information is decreased. If the number increases, even before the frame update timing at which the reduction display of the second pending information (movement to the center of the adjacent display section in the pending icon display area) is completed, the first pending information Incremental display of information (updating to the pending number by adding 1) is started. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decreasing display of the first pending information and displays the second pending information for which the variable display has started. It is possible to display a change in execution information (the icon), and when the number of pending memories increases, it is possible to display an increase in the first pending information and to display an increase in the second pending information. Yes, and if the number of pending memories increases during the change display of the second pending information, the reduction display of the second pending information (movement from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. Even before the frame update timing becomes, the display of an increase in the first reservation information (updating to a reservation number incremented by 1) is started. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means is capable of displaying an increasing number of the first pending information and an increasing display of the second pending information when the number of pending memories increases. Yes, and if the number of pending memories increases during execution of the fluctuating performance, the increasing display of the second pending information (enlargement of the pending icon additionally displayed in the pending icon display area to a normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increment display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number added by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame updating timing at which the first pending information is displayed. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold memories, and the fluctuating effect execution means is configured to It is possible to execute a specific performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) that makes the execution of the special game expected, and when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means displays the first pending information. It is possible to display an increase in the number of pending memories and to display an increase in the second pending information, and when the number of pending memories increases during execution of the specific effect, an increased display of the first pending information (one added (updating to the pending number) is executed, but the increasing display of the second pending information is executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the specific effect is completed, the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol that was displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner) It is designed so that it will not happen. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; A game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the slave control means controls an image of a variable performance according to the result of the determination. A variable performance execution means executable by a display means (image display device), first reservation information (reservation number) indicating the number of said reservation memories, and second reservation information (representing an identifier corresponding to each of said reservation memories). and information display means capable of displaying a hold icon), and when the number of hold memories increases, the information display means displays an increase in the first hold information and an increase in the second hold information. The storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the first starting port) as a first pending memory, and the storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the first starting port), and The judgment information based on (entering the game ball into the second starting port) is stored as a second pending memory, and when the number of the first pending memories increases in the specific gaming state, the first pending memory The increase display (update to the pending number added by 1) is executed, but the predetermined condition is satisfied for the increase display of the second pending information (the last variable performance in the specific gaming state is completed, and the normal gaming state is returned) It will not be executed until By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2>
Conventional gaming machines are generally capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and executing the special game according to the result of the determination. Among these gaming machines, there were gaming machines that initialized the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restored it to the state before the power supply was stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that it is difficult to determine whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73, member 74, production button 17), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , an effect control capable of performing an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing an effect operation (presentation operation, effect emission) of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means controls the operation mode of the initial operation (operation) when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored. mode, light emission mode, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, an operating means (effect button 17) that can be operated by the player and can emit light in a predetermined manner, and a power source are provided. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the stop of power supply, and the operation means after the start of power supply. and effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission and effect light emission of the operating means during execution of the game, and the effect control means is configured to initialize the control state of the game. The light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission is made different depending on when the control state of the game is restored and when the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, a movable effect means (first movable member 73 , a second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation and effect light emission of the movable effect means during the execution of the game; ), and the performance control means is configured to control the initial operation mode (number of steps and Although the operation mode, etc. of each step is the same, the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable presentation means is made different. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, a movable effect means (first movable member 73 , a second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply and effect light emission of the movable effect means during execution of a game, The performance means includes a first movable performance means (first movable member 73) and a second movable performance means (second movable member 74), and the performance control means is configured to control when the control state of the game is initialized. and when the control state of the game is restored, at least a part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the first movable effect means is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the second movable effect means are designed to differ. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by satisfying the acquisition condition, A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and initializing the control state of the game after starting power supply or stopping power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring to a previous state, and a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a fluctuating performance accompanied by the performance; each of the plurality of performance patterns includes identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that enable each to be identified; When the control state of the game is initialized, the control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means to a first combination (for example, "135"), and adjusts the control state of the game. When the character is restored, the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means are set to a second combination (for example, "753"). Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3>
Conventional gaming machines generally initialize the control state of the game after the power supply starts, or restore it to the state before the power supply was stopped. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that caused the movable performance means to perform an initial operation after the start of power supply (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the movable presentation means may not be able to perform a suitable initial operation.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means is such that the movable effect means is in the second position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) in which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the initial operation is performed after the movable presentation means returns to the first position. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the effect control means is such that the movable effect means is in the second position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) in which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, an operation is performed to return the movable presentation means to the first position, and when the movable presentation means returns to the first position, the initial operation is performed, but when the movable presentation means does not return to the first position, The above-mentioned initial operation is not performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect element is in the first position at the time of starting power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the first movable presentation means is performed. Instead, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect element is in the first position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position, perform the initial operation of the second movable presentation means. It is designed not to do this. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position at the time of start of power supply (power-on) at which the control state of the game is initialized. position, the first movable presentation means performs a return operation to the first position, and when the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position, the first movable presentation means initializes. Instead, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. A control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means has a first movable effect means (first movable member 73), a second position of the first movable effect means, and a second position of the first movable effect means. and a second movable presentation means (second movable member 74) which has an overlapping portion, and the presentation control means is configured to perform the above operation at the time of start of power supply (power-on) to initialize the control state of the game. When the first movable presentation means is at the second position and the second movable presentation means is at the first position, the first movable presentation means performs a return operation to the first position, and If the presentation means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable presentation means is not performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

<Content 4 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restores it to the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, see JP 2017-189604 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply that was stopped during the variable performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when acquisition conditions are satisfied, A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and initializing the control state of the game after starting power supply, or stopping power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring to the previous state, and a fluctuation accompanied by a fluctuating display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a performance is provided, and in the fluctuating performance, the performance symbol being displayed in a fluctuating manner is oscillatedly displayed (temporarily stopped display) and then statically displayed ( When the power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating performance in which the performance symbols are oscillatedly displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the performance control means performs a predetermined display. At the timing of (when receiving a special figure stop designation command, when receiving a customer waiting command), the effect pattern can be displayed statically on the display means without being oscillatedly displayed. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment a determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information); Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of displayed performance symbols; The effect control means includes a reach variation effect that executes a reach effect by forming a formation display, and the effect control means controls the control means at a predetermined timing ( When the special pattern stop designation command is received, when the customer wait command is received), it is possible to display on the display means in a static state a combination of the performance symbols that is different from the reach combination according to the production symbols that formed and displayed the reach state. There is. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 5>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there were gaming machines that initialized the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restored it to the state before the power supply was stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game will decrease. There was a problem that there was.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a determination by the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result, are a customer waiting state in which the fluctuating performance is not executed, a first state that is an execution period of the fluctuating performance without the pending memory, and an execution period of the fluctuating performance in a state with the pending memory. and a second state, and the performance control means is capable of performing a specific display (displaying an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the performance symbols on the display means when the control state of the game is restored. and the mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply that was stopped in the customer waiting state is restarted and the power supply is restored to the customer waiting state, and the power supply stops in the first state or the second state. The display mode of the specific display (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made different when the power supply is restarted and the first state or the second state is restored. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 6>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect on a display unit when a player is not playing a game (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time depending on the state of the gaming machine.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information), and a determining means (main control board 110) that can determine the control state of the game after starting power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the displayed performance design; When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to execute a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) on the display means, and the case where the performance pattern is displayed statically after the elapse of the variable time of the variable performance, and the case where the control state It is possible to make the period until the customer waiting performance is executed different depending on the case where the performance pattern is statically displayed after the initialization or after the recovery of the control state. Therefore, the customer waiting effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the state of the gaming machine, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

<Contents 7 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information on a display means corresponding to determination information on whether a variable performance is being executed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game will decrease. There was a problem that there was.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information), and a determining means (main control board 110) that can determine the control state of the game after starting power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing or restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped, and an effect displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of symbols, and when the control state of the game is restored, the performance control means displays the performance on the display means. It is possible to perform a specific display (displaying an initial screen, etc.) before displaying a symbol, and to display the determination information during execution of the variable effect in a predetermined display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. It is possible to display the corresponding execution information (the relevant icon), and if the power supply that was stopped while the execution information was displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next Until the variable display starts, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed), but the execution information is not stored in the predetermined display area. It is not displayed. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 8>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a pre-read preview performance that spans multiple variable performances based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-143904 reference). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply that was stopped during the pre-read preview performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. there were.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired when an acquisition condition is met (a gaming ball enters a starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before the judgment by the judgment means, an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the game control state after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and The display control means (performance control board 130) is capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means. The performance control means is capable of performing a predetermined look-ahead preview performance (continuous preview performance) over a plurality of the variable performances based on the judgment result of the advance judgment means. If the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the look-ahead preview performance is not resumed, and a preview performance different from the look-ahead preview performance (for example, an alternative preview performance) can be performed in the variable performance that is executed next to the variable performance where the power supply was stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the end of the continuous preview performance due to the power supply being stopped, and to increase the interest of the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 9>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executed a specific performance that gradually indicated the degree of expectation that the special game would be executed over multiple variable performances (for example, (Refer to Publication No.-143904). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that when the power supply that was stopped during a specific performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the interest in the game may decrease. Ta.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display; It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) suggested by Although the specific performance can be executed in the variable performance that is executed next to the stopped variable performance, it is not executed from the continuation of the stage that was suggested before the power supply was stopped. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change performance that matches the content of the current variation performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents 10 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually changes the display mode of identification information that is displayed corresponding to each piece of judgment information for which execution of the variable effect has not been completed. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the power supply that was stopped during a change performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted is high. There was a possibility that something would happen.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display; It is possible to display identification information (the icon, the pending icon) corresponding to each piece of the judgment information that has not been started, and the special game can be executed by changing the display mode of the identification information in stages. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that suggests the level of expectation for icon) and a third stage mode (red icon), and the power supply that was stopped during the display of the identification information in the second stage mode that changes up to the third stage mode is restarted and the gaming control state is restored, the identification information that was displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. Therefore, the user does not need to be aware of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

<Contents 11 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that displayed the number of pending memories, which is determination information that has not yet been determined, in a display area (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time to grasp the number of suspended memories, which reduces the interest in the game. There was a problem that there was a possibility that the

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a determination by the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result, and the control state of the game is controlled. In the case of restoration, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect design on the display means, and the first display area (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second A hold display indicating the number of hold memories is displayed in each of a hold indicator 84) and a second display area different from the first display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D). If the power supply that was stopped while the suspended memory exists is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the suspended display may be executed in the second display area while the specific display is being executed. However, the suspended display can be executed in the first display area. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. It becomes possible.

<Contents 12 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a performance that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored after being stopped during a performance that indicates the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed, the interest in the game is lost. There was a problem that there was a possibility of a decline.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; The performance control means includes a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display, and a light emitting means (winning hole lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, The means is capable of executing a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and during execution of the change effect. When the power supply that has been stopped is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is set to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishment) different from the specific notification mode. Therefore, while reducing the control load after the power supply is resumed, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as when the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variable effect has not been executed. It becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

<Contents 13 of the invention described in this embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines are equipped with a main control means that can control the progress of the game, and a performance control means that can control performances according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance means that can operate in a predetermined manner (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, such a gaming machine does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means deviate from each other.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, a performance button 17), and the performance control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable performance means and a performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission) of the movable performance means. is possible, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command etc.), it is possible to carry out said initial operation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to perform a customer waiting effect in a standby state (a customer waiting state) in which no game is in progress, and during the execution of the customer waiting effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, a performance button 17), and the performance control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable performance means and a performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission) of the movable performance means. It is possible to execute a variable effect for informing the player whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and during execution of the variable effect, the main control means When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to perform a special game performance (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance) during the execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to perform special game performances (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance), and If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling , a second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , the effect control means is capable of performing an initial operation and an initial light emission of the movable effect means, and is also capable of executing a effect operation and an effect light emission of the movable effect means. , The operation mode of the initial operation of the movable presentation means (operation mode such as the number of steps and the movement of each step) is the same when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored. However, by changing the light emission mode (emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means, a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot If a predetermined signal (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the production (presentation), it is possible to execute the initial operation of the movable production means. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (game ball winning in the starting hole). ), a determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; (initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and production operation of the movable production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display), and the judgment of the judgment means Depending on the result, it is possible to execute a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the fluctuating performance, the fluctuating performance symbol is shaken. It is possible to perform a static display (stop display) after a dynamic display (temporary stop display), and the production control means is capable of restarting power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating production in which the production symbols are displayed in a oscillating manner. When the control state of the game is restored, the performance symbols may be statically displayed on the display means without being oscillated and displayed at a predetermined timing (when receiving a special symbol stop designation command, when receiving a customer waiting command). A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuating performance, jackpot performance) in which it is possible to perform a performance according to the signal. ), it is possible to carry out said initial operation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the judgment result of the judgment means, it is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and the The states include a customer waiting state in which the fluctuating performance is not executed, a first state that is an execution period of the fluctuating performance without the pending memory, and an execution period of the fluctuating performance in a state with the pending memory. and a second state in which the performance control means performs a specific display (displaying an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the performance symbols on the display means when the control state of the game is restored. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the customer waiting state is restored, and the first state or the first state When the power supply that was stopped during the second state is resumed and the first state or the second state is restored, the display mode of the specific display (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made different, and according to the signal. If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuating performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance can be executed, the initial It is possible to perform the actuation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and the display means When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after statically displaying the performance design, it is possible to perform a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) on the display means, and after the variable time of the variable performance has elapsed, the performance design can be displayed. The period until the customer waiting performance is executed can be made different between when the performance pattern is statically displayed and when the performance pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored; A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which a performance can be executed in accordance with the signal. In this case, it is possible to carry out the initial operation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance design displayed on the display means (image display device), and the above-mentioned advance Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a predetermined prefetched preview performance (continuous preview performance) over a plurality of the variable performances, and the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the prefetched preview performance is not restarted, and a different preview performance from the prefetched preview performance (for example, When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command , power restoration designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the judgment result of the judgment means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that gradually indicates the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over the variable effect, and the power supply that was stopped during execution of the specific effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to execute the specific performance in the variable performance that is executed next to the variable performance for which the power supply has stopped, but the specific performance has been suggested before the power supply was stopped. A predetermined signal (a power-on designation command, When a power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling (Operation, light emission, sound output, image display) Possible production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and fulfillment of acquisition conditions A storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing the judgment information (special figure judgment information) obtained by (entering the game ball into the starting hole) as a reserved memory, and A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous special game (jackpot game), and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or before the power supply is stopped. initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the state of It is possible to execute the production operation of the means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display), and it is expected that the special game will be executed by changing the light emission means to a specific notification mode. It is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of change, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is The main control is performed during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuating performance, jackpot performance) in which it is possible to control a notification mode (white lighting or turning off) different from a specific notification mode and execute a performance according to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) from the sound output device, and If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state in which the performance can be executed (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance), the predetermined signal It is possible to output notification sound. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound indicating the start of power supply, such as a power-on notification sound, a power restoration notification sound, etc. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a standby state (a customer waiting state) in which there is no customer waiting, and a predetermined signal (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means while the customer waiting performance is being executed. In this case, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance to notify whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and during execution of the fluctuating performance, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration command, etc.) is sent from the main control means. When a specified command, etc.) is received, the predetermined notification sound can be output. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute a special game performance (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance) while a special game (jackpot game) is being executed, and a predetermined signal is sent from the main control means during execution of the special game performance. When receiving a command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

<Contents 14 of the invention described in this embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying an effect image (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, such gaming machines do not take into consideration the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the performance control means continues.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. The gaming machine is equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, and is equipped with display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying performance images (variable performance, jackpot performance, etc.). , the performance control means is capable of displaying a game standby screen (a static display screen of performance symbols) on the display means in a standby state (a customer waiting state) in which a game is not in progress; If the power supply to the main control means is stopped during display, it is possible to continue displaying the game standby screen. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player is not made to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

<Contents 15 of the invention described in this embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines are generally equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there are those that execute an abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a possibility that an abnormality notification may not be properly performed.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or performance control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on input signals from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality alarm (wire breakage alarm, magnetic wire breakage alarm, etc.) is provided. abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, wire breakage, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (wire disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification) is issued. , radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and if the control means and the detection means are in a connected state during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, for a predetermined period (30 seconds elapsed, until the power is turned off, etc.) The execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (wire disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification) is issued. notification, etc.) was made possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (wire disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification) is issued. notification, etc.), and if the control means and the detection means are connected while the predetermined abnormality notification is being executed, the predetermined notification will continue for a predetermined period of time (30 seconds elapse, until the power is turned off, etc.). Continue to perform abnormality notification. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

<Contents 16 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and the game performance is performed according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that run the game are common. Some of these gaming machines were equipped with a main control means that controlled the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controlled the effect according to commands (signals) from the main control means (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means deviate.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. The first pending information (first pending icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) in response to an increase in the first pending memory, and the first pending information (first pending icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) as the first pending memory decreases. Each of the pending information can be reduced by shifting display, and when the plurality of presentation symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating presentation, the first pending information is subjected to a presentation operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.). It is possible that the first suspension information indicates that the plurality of performance symbols that are performing a performance operation are temporarily stopped, and a specific number (for example, three) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). During the display of the first reservation information, when the first reservation memory receives a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (a reservation number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) in which the first reservation memory becomes the predetermined number; , without starting the fluctuation effect and shifting displaying the first pending information (the third pending icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of first pending information, The first hold information (at least the first hold icon from the icon display area) corresponding to the predetermined number is displayed in a shifted manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the performance control means executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in front of a background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first pending information (first pending icon) corresponding to each of the first pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), and When a plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped, it is possible to perform a performance operation (scrolling, changing, etc.) on the background image, and it is possible to temporarily stop the plurality of performance symbols for which the background image is performing a performance operation. start of the fluctuating display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the first pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (eg, one); When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation performance is started, and the first After displaying the hold information, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first hold information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to the signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. A first pending number indicating the number of the first pending memories can be displayed in the first display area (sub-first pending display 83), and a first pending number corresponding to each of the first pending memories can be displayed. 1 hold information (first hold icon) can be displayed in a second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating effect, the effect symbols It is possible to make a predetermined element (a tactile image of a character, a pattern effect image) making a presentation movement (fluctuation movement, etc.), and the predetermined element is temporarily stopping the plurality of presentation patterns in which the predetermined element is performing a presentation movement. a signal at the start of the variable display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the first pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one); (Pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command), the execution of the fluctuation effect is started, and the first reservation, which is one less than the specific number, is received in the first display area. Displaying the predetermined number of the first reserved number (for example, one) without displaying a number (for example, two), and displaying a number one less than the specific number (for example, two) in the second display area. The present invention is characterized in that after the first suspension information is displayed, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first suspension information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. It is possible to display first reservation information (first reservation icon) corresponding to each of the first reservation memories in the display area (image display device 70), and in the variable performance, the plurality of performance symbols are displayed. It is possible to cause the first hold information to perform a performance operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.) while temporarily stopping, and during the temporary stop of the plurality of performance symbols for which the first hold information is performing a performance operation. and while displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the first hold information that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one), at the start of the variable display when the first hold memory becomes the predetermined number. When a signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation performance is started, and the first reservation is performed in a number one (for example, three) less than the specific number. The predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information is displayed without displaying any information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the performance control means executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in front of a background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first pending information (first pending icon) corresponding to each of the first pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), and When a plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped, it is possible to perform a performance operation (scrolling, changing, etc.) on the background image, and it is possible to temporarily stop the plurality of performance symbols for which the background image is performing a performance operation. start of the variable display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the first pending information that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one); When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation performance is started, and the first Displaying the first pending information in a number two (for example, two) less than the specific number without displaying any pending information, and then displaying the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information. . Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. A first pending number indicating the number of the first pending memories can be displayed in the first display area (sub-first pending display 83), and a first pending number corresponding to each of the first pending memories can be displayed. 1 hold information (first hold icon) can be displayed in a second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating effect, the effect symbols It is possible to make a predetermined element (a tactile image of a character, a pattern effect image) making a presentation movement (fluctuation movement, etc.), and the predetermined element is temporarily stopping the plurality of presentation patterns in which the predetermined element is performing a presentation movement. a signal at the start of the variable display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the first pending information that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one); (Pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), the fluctuation effect is started, and the first storage number (which is two less than the specific number) in the first display area is received. The predetermined number of the first memory numbers (for example, one) are displayed without displaying the first memory number (for example, two), and the first memory number (for example, three) that is one less than the specific number is displayed in the second display area. Displaying the first pending information in a number two (for example, two) less than the specific number without displaying one pending information, and then displaying the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information. do. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting hole). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means that executes a variable display of the symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and controls between a normal game state and a specific game state advantageous to the player (variable probability game state, time-saving game state). and a state control means, wherein the performance control means performs a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. When the plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating performance, the predetermined elements (tactile image of the character, pattern effect image) constituting the performance symbol are subjected to a performance motion (fluctuation motion). etc.), and based on the determination result of the first determination information when the predetermined element is in the performance operation in the variable performance and the temporarily stopped performance symbol is deviated from the stop position. When a signal at the start of the fluctuating display (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the production symbols are displayed at the stop position with the start of the fluctuating production, and then Display fluctuations. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) as the second pending memory increases, and the second pending information is displayed as the second pending memory decreases. can be shifted and displayed to decrease by one, and while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the second hold information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the second hold information is displayed in the second hold memory. When a signal at the start of the fluctuating display (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuating display is started, and the second display of the specific number is received. Without shifting and displaying the second hold information (the third hold icon from the icon display area side) that corresponds to the specific number of hold information, the second hold information (the icon display that corresponds to the predetermined number) Shift-display the first and second hold icons from the area side. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70). During the display of a number (for example, three) of the second reservation information, a signal at the start of the fluctuation display when the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number (reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern When a specified command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and after displaying the second pending information one less than the specific number (for example, two), the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second pending information is displayed. Display the second pending information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting hole). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. It is possible to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage memories in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage storages, and a second storage number corresponding to each of the second storage storages. 2 pending information (second pending icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and a specific number (for example, three) of the above information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) During the display of the second reservation information, when the second reservation memory receives a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (a reservation number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number; The variable performance is started, and the second memory number (for example, one) is the predetermined number without displaying the second memory number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number in the first display area. , display a number (for example, two) of the second reservation information that is one less than the specific number in the second display area, and then display the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second reservation information. indicate. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70). During the display of a specific number (for example, four) of the second pending information, the second pending memory becomes the predetermined number. If a figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and the predetermined number (for example, one ) is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70). During the display of a specific number (for example, four) of the second pending information, the second pending memory becomes the predetermined number. If a figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and the second hold information is one less than the specific number (for example, three) without displaying the second pending information, and the number is two than the specific number. A small number (for example, two) of the second reservation information is displayed, and then a predetermined number (for example, one) of the second reservation information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls the effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. It is possible to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage memories in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage storages, and a second storage number corresponding to each of the second storage storages. 2 hold information (second hold icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and a specific number (for example, four) of the During the display of the second reservation information, when the second reservation memory receives a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (a reservation number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number; The variable effect is started, and the second memory number (for example, one) is the predetermined number without displaying the second memory number (for example, two) that is two fewer than the specific number in the first display area. is displayed, and the second pending information that is one less than the specific number (for example, three) is displayed in the second display area, and the second pending information that is two less than the specific number (for example, two) is displayed. The second hold information is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second hold information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means that executes a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and controls between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. and a state control means, wherein the performance control means executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols in the specific gaming state so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information. When the performance symbol temporarily stopped in the fluctuation performance is shifted from the stop position, a signal at the start of the fluctuation display based on the determination result of the second determination information (pending number designation command, When a special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the performance symbols are displayed at the stop position with the start of the fluctuation performance, and then the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. The production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the determination information, In accordance with the increase in the pending memory, additional pending information (pending icon) is displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and in accordance with the decrease in the pending memory, the pending information is shifted and displayed, and one of the pending information is displayed as execution information. (the icon), and while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the pending memory becomes the predetermined number. When a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is deleted, the fluctuation display is started, and the specified number of the suspension Without shifting and displaying the pending information corresponding to the specific number of information (the third pending icon from the icon display area side), the necessary amount of the pending information (the first to second pending icons from the icon display area side) (hold icons) are shifted and displayed, and one of them is displayed as the execution information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls a performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. and a memory means for performing a variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the performance control means It is possible to display the hold information (hold icon) in the display area (image display device 70), and display the hold information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon), During the display of the specific number (for example, three) of the pending information that is two more than the number of pending items (1), a signal at the start of the variable display when the pending memory becomes the predetermined number (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command) , special figure variation pattern designation command), erases the execution information, starts the variation production, and displays the pending information of the number one (for example, two) less than the specific number. The predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls a performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. storage means for indicating the number of pending memories, and the production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) to correspond to the variable display, and a storage unit that indicates the number of pending memories. It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, first special figure reservation number display area 70E, second special figure reservation number display area 70F). Displaying the pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories in a second display area (holding icon display area), and displaying the holding information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon) and the start of the fluctuating display in which the pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (eg, one). When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the fluctuation performance is started, and the specific number is displayed in the first display area. The predetermined number of pending numbers (for example, 1) is displayed without displaying the pending number (for example, 2) that is one less than the specific number, and a number that is one less than the specific number (for example, 1) is displayed in the second display area. After the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. and a storage means for performing a variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means It is possible to display the pending information (pending icon) in the display area (image display device 70), and to display the pending information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon), While displaying a specific number (for example, 4) of the pending information that is 3 more than 1), a signal at the start of the fluctuating display when the pending memory becomes the predetermined number (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command , special figure variation pattern designation command), erase the execution information, start the variation production, and display the pending information of the number one less than the specific number (for example, three). Instead, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. and a memory means for performing a variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the performance control means It is possible to display the hold information (hold icon) in the display area (image display device 70), and display the hold information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon), While displaying a specific number (for example, 4) of the pending information that is 3 more than 1), a signal at the start of the fluctuating display when the pending memory becomes the predetermined number (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command , special figure variation pattern designation command), erase the execution information, start the variation production, and display the pending information of the number one less than the specific number (for example, three). Instead, two fewer (for example, two) pieces of the hold information than the specific number are displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one piece) of the hold information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. storage means for indicating the number of pending memories, and the production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) to correspond to the variable display, and a storage unit that indicates the number of pending memories. It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, first special figure reservation number display area 70E, second special figure reservation number display area 70F). Displaying the pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories in a second display area (holding icon display area), and displaying the holding information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon) and the start of the fluctuating display in which the pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (eg, 4) of the pending information that is three more than a predetermined number (eg, 1). When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the fluctuation performance is started, and the specific number is displayed in the first display area. The predetermined number of pending numbers (for example, 1) is displayed without displaying the pending number (for example, 2) that is two fewer than the specified number, and the second display area displays a number that is one less than the specific number (for example, 1). 3) of the pending information is displayed, and then the predetermined number (eg, 1) of the pending information and the Display execution information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine, the main control means executes a special game (jackpot determination information) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game); and a fluctuation display means for performing a fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means; It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of performance symbols in accordance with the display, and the fluctuating display can be started when the temporarily stopped performance symbol in the fluctuating performance is deviated from the stop position. When a time signal (retention number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the performance symbols are displayed at the stop position with the start of the fluctuation performance, and then are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

<Contents 17 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, a gaming machine determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and executes a game performance according to the result of the determination. is common. Among such gaming machines, there is also known a game machine that executes a performance using a predetermined performance device (performance button, movable member, etc.) (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-033816). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the game is not very interesting.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the game performance includes a first performance (pre-reach performance). The vibration performance includes a specific game performance (reach variation performance) in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is executed later, and the vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (during a line preview performance, a step-up preview performance, and a pseudo continuous performance). , a 1-second vibration performance such as during a development performance), and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (a vibration performance of 3 seconds or more during a cut-in performance, a successful decision performance, a confirmed performance, when the symbols are aligned, etc.) In the specific game performance, the first vibration performance is easier to execute during the first performance than during the second performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the game performance is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). The vibration performance includes a specific game performance (reach variation performance) in which a specific performance (reach performance) that makes the execution of the special game expected is executed after a predetermined performance (pseudo continuous performance) is executed, and the vibration performance includes a first A vibration performance (a 1-second vibration performance during a dialogue preview performance, a step-up preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (when a cut-in performance is performed, (vibration performance for 3 seconds or more at the time of a successful decision performance, at the time of a confirmed performance, when the symbols are aligned, etc.), and in the specific game performance, the first vibration performance is performed more than when the first vibration performance is not performed. The second vibration effect is easier to execute when Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), and the performance control means includes a suggestive performance (a look-ahead effect performance, a look-ahead motion performance) that suggests that the special game may be executed during the execution of the game performance; It is possible to perform a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means (a pre-reading vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.), and the vibration effect includes a vibration effect in response to an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. A first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.) that is executed with the above operation promotion display, and a second vibration performance (a pre-read vibration performance, etc.) that is performed without the operation promotion display, During a predetermined period after the start of the game performance (until the first high-speed fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a ends), the second vibration performance is more effective than the case where the suggestion performance is performed. The level of expectation that the special game will be executed is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. a game state control means (main control board 110) that controls the gaming state), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance that variably displays a plurality of types of performance symbols according to the judgment result of the judgment means. ), the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the variable performance, and the fluctuation performance includes a first type of performance pattern (an even number pattern). A first specific variation performance in which a reach effect is executed, a second specific variation effect in which a reach effect is executed by a second type of effect pattern (an odd numbered pattern other than "7"), and a third type of effect pattern ("7"). 7" pattern), in which a reach effect is executed, and the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (at the time of a dialogue preview performance, during a step-up preview performance, during a pseudo-continuous performance, and during a development performance). 1 second vibration performance such as) and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (vibration performance for 3 seconds or more such as at the time of cut-in performance, at the time of successful decision performance, at the time of confirmation performance, etc.), In the normal gaming state, the first specific variation performance is more likely to be executed than the second specific variation effect, the third specific variation effect is more difficult to execute than the first specific variation effect, and the first specific variation effect is more difficult to execute than the first specific variation effect. The second vibration effect is easier to execute when the third specific variation effect is executed than when it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.) that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.) that is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during the operation promotion display, and the operation promotion display. When the first vibration effect is executed, a predetermined effect sound (display sound effect of an operation promotion image) corresponding to the operation of the operating means is included. , effect sounds corresponding to the operation of the effect buttons, and sound effects of the operation of the accessories), while the predetermined effect sounds are not output when the second vibration effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the game performance includes a specific performance that makes you expect to execute the special game. (reach performance) is executed, and the vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, (cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) and a second vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, etc.) that is executed without the operation promotion display, and when the first vibration effect is executed, the operation means While a predetermined effect image (operation promotion image, effect image corresponding to the operation of the effect button) related to the operation of is displayed, when the second vibration effect is executed, the predetermined effect image is not displayed. , in the specific game performance (jackpot reach variation performance) in which the special game is executed, the number of times the second vibration performance is executed (up to 3 times) before the start of the specific performance is greater than the number of times the second vibration performance is executed before the start of the specific performance. The number of times the second vibration effect is executed (maximum 7 times) is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17) and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means includes: It is possible to perform a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.) in which the first operating means is vibrated during the execution of the game performance, and while the second operation means is being operated. When the vibration effect is executed, vibrations related to the vibration effect are transmitted to the player via the second operating means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to players, a gaming frame (a frame body consisting of a gaming board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided. The frame production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of the an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to control the performance during execution of the game performance. It is possible to execute a suggestion performance (jackpot notice performance) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and an operation performance (vibration performance) that activates (moves, vibrates) the frame performance section while the suggestion performance is being executed. , action presentation, etc.), and the suggestion presentation includes a first suggestion presentation (weak notice, pre-reach notice presentation) and a second suggestion presentation (strong When the second suggestion effect is executed, the operation effect is more likely to be executed than when the first suggestion effect is executed, and the first suggestion effect is easier to execute than when the first suggestion effect is executed. The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the operation effect is executed during execution of the first suggestion effect than when the operation effect is not executed during execution of the effect. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), and the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), A vibration effect that vibrates the operating means can be executed, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (when a line preview is displayed, a cut-in effect) that is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. a second vibration performance (a vibration performance such as a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, etc.) that is executed without the operation promotion display; The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the second vibration performance is executed is different between the performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), and the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), A vibration effect that vibrates the operating means can be executed, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (when a line preview is displayed, a cut-in effect) that is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. a second vibration performance (a vibration performance such as a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, etc.) that is executed without the operation promotion display; The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the first vibration performance is executed is different between the performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to players, a gaming frame (frame body consisting of a gaming board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided. The frame production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of the an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to control the performance during execution of the game performance. , executes a change effect (vibration effect, action effect, light emission effect, etc.) that changes the frame effect part from a first state (standby state, extinguished state) to a second state (vibration state, operating state, predetermined light emitting state). It is possible, and the variable performance includes a specific game performance (reach variable performance) in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is executed after the first performance (pre-reach performance), and the execution of the first performance The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the change effect is executed than when the change effect is not executed during the game, and the specific game effect (jackpot) in which the special game is executed is higher. In the reach variation effect), the change effect is executed during execution of the second effect regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed during execution of the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect includes an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. The first vibration performance (one of the vibration performances such as a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo-continuation performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, etc.) is performed in accordance with the operation promotion display, and a first vibration performance is performed without accompanying the operation promotion display. The first vibration performance includes a second vibration performance (one of the vibration performances at the time of step-up notice performance, when the symbols are aligned, and when the C symbols are aligned), and the first vibration performance has a different degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. Multiple vibration modes (weak vibration or strong vibration for 1 second for vibration performances during dialogue previews, pseudo continuous performances, or advanced performances, weak vibrations or strong vibrations for 3 seconds for vibration performances during cut-in performances) The second vibration performance is performed in one of the predetermined vibration modes (vibration during step-up notice performance) when performing a predetermined performance (step-up notice performance, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment). A vibration performance is performed with a weak vibration for 1 second, a vibration performance when the symbols are aligned, a strong vibration for 4 seconds, and a strong vibration for 1 second when the C symbols are aligned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A game state control means (main control board 110) that controls the gaming state), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. , the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the vibration performance includes a predetermined vibration performance (pre-read vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up notice). The predetermined vibration performance includes a vibration performance for 1 second (at the time of performance, etc.) and a specific vibration performance different from the predetermined vibration performance (vibration performance for 3 seconds or more at the time of a successful decision performance, when the symbols are aligned, etc.). , a first vibration performance (vibration performance during dialogue preview performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation promotion display, and a second vibration performance (pre-reading vibration) that is performed without the operation promotion display. In the game performance in which the special game is performed, the first vibration performance is executed, and the second vibration performance is The rate at which the specific vibration effect is subsequently executed differs depending on when it is executed, and the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the normal gaming state than during the specific gaming state. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and performance control that executes a variable performance that displays a plurality of types of performance symbols in a variable manner according to the determination result of the determination means. means (performance control board 130), the performance control means, during execution of the variable performance, a special performance (successful performance, fixed performance, etc.) that suggests execution of the special game, and the operation means. A vibration performance that vibrates in one of several vibration modes (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, successful decision performance, confirmed performance) When the special game is executed, the type of the performance symbol that suggests the execution of the special game ( The execution mode of the vibration performance (execution or nonexecution, execution timing, etc.) differs depending on the even number design, odd number design other than "7", and "7" design, and the vibration performance is performed in conjunction with the execution of the special performance. In this case, the vibration mode of the vibration performance is the same regardless of the type of performance symbol that suggests execution of the special game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17) and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means includes: It is possible to perform a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.) that vibrates the first operating means during execution of the game performance, and the vibration performance includes an operation promotion display. A first vibration performance (vibration performance such as a dialogue preview performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the middle, and a vibration performance that is executed without the operation promotion display. The first vibration performance includes a second vibration performance (a pre-read vibration performance, a vibration performance at the time of a step-up notice performance, etc.), and the first vibration performance has a vibration start timing that differs depending on the operation timing of the first operating means. In the two-vibration effect, the start timing of the vibration is predetermined, and when the vibration effect is executed during operation of the second operating means, the vibration related to the vibration effect is transmitted to the game via the second operating means. The information is now communicated to the public. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means, and the effective period of the operating means includes a first effective period (a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a development effect). during the second validity period (validity period related to performance, cut-in performance, fixed performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) and a second validity period (validity period while waiting for customers) different from the first validity period. The vibration effect is more easily executed when the operating means is operated during the first valid period than when the operating means is operated during the period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means, and the validity period of the operation means includes a first validity period (validity period related to dialogue preview performance, etc.). , a second validity period (validity period related to cut-in performances, fixed performances, etc.) different from the first validity period, and a third validity period (validity period related to customer waiting) different from the first validity period and the second validity period. (a middle effective period), and the vibration effect is executed more when the operating means is operated during the second effective period than when the operating means is operated during the third effective period. It is becoming easier to Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a production section (production button 17 (button vibration motor) that can be operated in a predetermined manner) is provided. , production lever 24 (lever vibration motor), second movable member 74), and judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). ); a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance), and the performance control means has a first performance mode (performance mode A to C) and a second performance mode (performance mode D). ~G), and changes the performance section from a first state (standby state, light-off state) to a second state (vibration state, operating state, predetermined light emitting state) during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a change performance (vibration performance, movement performance, light emission performance, etc.), and the special game is expected to be executed when the change performance is executed in the first performance mode and the second performance mode. The degrees are different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to operate in a first performance mode (performance mode). mode A to C) and a second performance mode (performance mode D to G), and can be controlled to any one of a plurality of stages with different expectations for the special game to be executed during the execution of the game performance. It is possible to execute a progressive stage performance (step-up preview performance, pseudo continuous performance), and in the first performance mode and the second performance mode, the stage performance is at a predetermined stage (in the case of a step-up preview performance, The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the game progresses to 3-step performance, 4th-step performance, 5th-step performance, or 1 time or 2 times in the case of pseudo-continuous performance is different. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to mode A to C) and a second production mode (production mode D to G), and continuous productions (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading (vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance, etc.), and in the game performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (ready-to-reach performance) that makes you expect the execution of the special game, and a predetermined number of times (once) in the first performance mode. In the case where the continuous performance is executed the predetermined number of times in the second performance mode, the specific performance in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance is better than when the continuous performance is executed. is becoming more difficult to implement. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to operate in a first performance mode (performance mode). modes A to C) and second production modes (production modes D to G), and continuous productions (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading vibration effects, look-ahead zone effects, etc.), and in the game effects, it is possible to execute a specific effect (ready-to-reach effect) that makes people expect to execute the special game, and in the second effect mode, it is possible to perform The case where the continuous performance is executed the predetermined number of times in the first performance mode is better than the case where the continuous performance is performed three times) in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance. The specific performance is easier to execute. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to operate in a first performance mode (performance mode). modes A to C) and second production modes (production modes D to G), and continuous productions (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading vibration presentation, look-ahead zone presentation, etc.), and in the game presentation, it is possible to execute a specific presentation (ready-to-reach presentation) that makes one expect the execution of the special game, and the specific presentation includes a first specific presentation (normal reach presentation, etc.). performance) and a second specific performance (SP/SPSP reach performance) in which the degree of expectation for the special game to be executed is higher than that of the first specific performance, and the first performance mode is higher than the second performance mode. In this case, when the continuous performance is executed the first number of times, the specific performance is more likely to be executed in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance, and the specific performance is more likely to be executed in the second performance mode than in the first performance mode. In the performance mode, when the continuous performance is performed a second number of times greater than the first number of times, the second specific performance is more likely to be executed in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , a display means (image display device) capable of displaying a production image, and judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires the information; a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance), and the performance control means displays an operation promotion display (an opaque button image) that prompts the operation of the operation means during the execution of the game performance. ) at the same time, it is possible to execute an operation effect (development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) according to the operation of the operation means, and before performing the operation promotion display, the operation promotion display is displayed on the display means. It is possible to perform a suggestion display (semi-transparent button image) indicating that the operation may be performed, and the operation promotion display includes a first operation promotion display (white button image in normal state) and the operation promotion display (a white button image in a normal state). The first operation promotion display includes a second operation promotion display (a red button image in a normal state, a red button image in a protruding state, a rainbow button image in a protrusion state) having a different degree of expectation that the special game will be executed; The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the first operation promotion display is performed is different between the first performance mode and the second performance mode, and in the first performance mode, the suggestion display is not performed. The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the operation promotion display is performed after the suggestion display is performed than when the operation promotion display is performed at the time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents 18 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and the game performance is performed according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that run the game are common. Some of these gaming machines were equipped with a main control means that controlled the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controlled the effect according to commands (signals) from the main control means (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means deviate.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with an acquisition means for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole, a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a reservation memory means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reservation memory, and the presentation control means is equipped with a winning time signal (number of reserved special patterns at the time of increase) transmitted when the reservation memory increases due to a winning time signal transmitted when the reservation memory increases due to a winning time signal transmitted when the reserved ..., When a special command is received, the reserved display can be additionally displayed (the number of reserved icons can be increased), and when a start signal (special reserved number designation command when decreasing) is received, which is transmitted when the reserved memory is decreased with the start of the variable display, the reserved display can be decreased (the first reserved icon is moved to the icon in question, and the number of reserved icons is decreased). When a winning signal is received in which the number of reserved memories is one more than the number of reserved displays, the reserved display is additionally displayed in a normal additional mode (multiple frames of animation, one without a gap), and when a winning signal is received in which the number of reserved memories is several times more than the number of reserved displays, the reserved display is additionally displayed in a special additional mode (multiple simultaneous displays, one frame of non-animation, one with a gap). This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command for specifying the number of reservations is received, the first reservation display is additionally displayed (increasing the number of reservation icons), and the second reservation display is increased (increasing the number in the number of reservations display area, lighting mode of the sub-retention display). When the start time signal (the command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time of decrease) that is transmitted when the number of pending memories decreases with the start of the fluctuating display is received, the first pending display (moves the first pending icon to the corresponding icon, decreases the number of pending icons), and displays a decreased number of the second pending display (decreases the number in the pending number display area, switches the lighting mode of the sub pending display to decrease) ), and when receiving the entry award signal in which the number of pending memories is one more than the number of first pending displays, the first pending display may be changed to a normal additional mode (multiple frames). Animation, one without a gap) is additionally displayed, and at the same time, the second pending display is increased and displayed in a specific update mode (switching with one frame of non-animation), and the number of the second pending display is increased compared to the number of the first pending display. When the input award time signal with a large number of pending memories is received, the first pending display is additionally displayed in a special additional mode (multiple at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one with an interval), and , the second pending display is increased and displayed in the specific update mode. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance that controls the performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons), and a start signal (decreasing When receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved displays (move the first reserved icon to the corresponding icon, reduce the number of reserved icons), and perform a production operation on the reserved display ( When the number of pending memories is one more than the number of pending displays, the pending display is changed to a normal additional mode (rotating motion, shaking motion). Animation of multiple frames (one without a gap) is additionally displayed, and if the entry award signal is received in which the number of pending memories is greater than the number of pending displays, the pending display is specially added. (multiple items at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one item at a time), and even if the pending display is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode, it is additionally displayed in the special addition mode. Even in the suspended display, it is possible to perform the performance operation in the same performance mode (position of the rotation axis, rotation speed, swing width, and swing speed). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons), and a start signal (decreasing When receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved displays (move the first reserved icon to the corresponding icon, reduce the number of reserved icons), and the number of reserved displays can be reduced When the number of pending memories is one more than the entry award time signal, the pending display is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode (multiple frames of animation, one without a gap), and the pending display is If the entry award signal is received in which the number of pending memories is two more than the number of reserved memories, the pending display is changed to the first special additional mode (two at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one frame after one interval). If the number of pending memories is 3 more than the number of pending displays, the pending display is additionally displayed in a second special additional mode (3 simultaneous, 1 frame). Non-animation of , additionally displayed with 1 space between 2). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command for specifying the number of reservations is received, the first reservation display is additionally displayed (increasing the number of reservation icons), and the second reservation display is increased (increasing the number in the number of reservations display area, lighting mode of the sub-retention display). When the start time signal (the command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time of decrease) that is transmitted when the number of pending memories decreases with the start of the fluctuating display is received, the first pending display (moves the first pending icon to the corresponding icon, decreases the number of pending icons), and displays a decreased number of the second pending display (decreases the number in the pending number display area, switches the lighting mode of the sub pending display to decrease) ), and when receiving the entry award signal in which the number of pending memories is one more than the number of first pending displays, the first pending display may be changed to a normal additional mode (multiple frames). Animation, one without a gap) is additionally displayed, and at the same time, the second pending display is increased and displayed in a specific update mode (switching with one frame of non-animation), and the number of the second pending display is increased compared to the number of the first pending display. If the input award signal with two more pending memories is received, the first pending display is changed to the first special addition mode (two at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one with one interval). and additionally display the second pending display in the specific update mode, and when receiving the entry award time signal in which the number of pending memories is three more than the number of the first pending displays, The first pending display is additionally displayed in a second special addition mode (three at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one with two intervals), and the second pending display is increased and displayed in the specific update mode. do. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons), and a start signal (decreasing When receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved displays (move the first reserved icon to the corresponding icon, reduce the number of reserved icons), and perform a production operation on the reserved display ( When the number of pending memories is one more than the number of pending displays, the pending display is changed to a normal additional mode (rotating motion, shaking motion). If an animation of multiple frames (one without a gap) is additionally displayed, and the number of pending memories is two more than the number of pending displays, the award time signal is received, the pending display is 1 additional display in a special addition mode (two at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one with one interval), and the entered award time signal where the number of the pending memories is 3 more than the number of pending displays. If received, the pending display is additionally displayed in the second special addition mode (three at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one with a gap between two), and the above-mentioned pending display is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode. Whether it is a pending display or the pending display additionally displayed in the first special additional mode or the second special additional mode, the same production mode (rotary axis position, rotation speed, swing width, swing It is possible to perform the above-mentioned effect movement at a speed (speed). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons), and a start signal (decreasing When receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved displays (move the first reserved icon to the corresponding icon, reduce the number of reserved icons), and the number of reserved displays can be reduced When the number of pending memories is one more than the entry award time signal, the pending display is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode (multiple frames of animation, one without a gap), and the pending display is If the start signal is received in which the number of the suspended memories is greater than the number of suspended memories, the suspended display is additionally displayed in a special additional mode (multiple at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one at a time). do. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command for specifying the number of reservations is received, the first reservation display is additionally displayed (increasing the number of reservation icons), and the second reservation display is increased (increasing the number in the number of reservations display area, lighting mode of the sub-retention display). When the start time signal (the command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time of decrease) that is transmitted when the number of pending memories decreases with the start of the fluctuating display is received, the first pending display (moves the first pending icon to the corresponding icon, decreases the number of pending icons), and displays a decreased number of the second pending display (decreases the number in the pending number display area, switches the lighting mode of the sub pending display to decrease) ), and when receiving the entry award signal in which the number of pending memories is one more than the number of first pending displays, the first pending display may be changed to a normal additional mode (multiple frames). Animation, one without a gap) is additionally displayed, and at the same time, the second pending display is increased and displayed in a specific update mode (switching with one frame of non-animation), and the number of the second pending display is increased compared to the number of the first pending display. When the start time signal with a large number of pending memories is received, the first pending display is additionally displayed in a special additional mode (multiple at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one with an interval); , the second pending display is increased and displayed in the specific update mode. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ A ninth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons), and a start signal (decreasing When receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved displays (move the first reserved icon to the corresponding icon, reduce the number of reserved icons), and perform a production operation on the reserved display ( When the number of pending memories is one more than the number of pending displays, the pending display is changed to a normal additional mode (rotating motion, shaking motion). Animation of multiple frames (one without a gap) is additionally displayed, and if the start signal is received where the number of pending memories is more than the number of pending displays, the pending display is specially added. (multiple items at the same time, one frame of non-animation, one item at a time), and even if the pending display is additionally displayed in the normal addition mode, it is additionally displayed in the special addition mode. Even in the suspended display, it is possible to perform the performance operation in the same performance mode (position of the rotation axis, rotation speed, swing width, and swing speed). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons), and a start signal (decreasing When receiving a command to specify the number of reserved special figures at the time, it is possible to reduce the number of reserved displays (move the first reserved icon to the corresponding icon, reduce the number of reserved icons), and change the number of reserved memory (for example, If the entry award time signal or the start time signal is received while displaying a smaller number of the reservation display (for example, "2") than the number of reservation displays (for example, "2"), the number corresponding to the number of reservation memories. Since the above-mentioned hold display is displayed, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons) and to perform an effect when the pending display increases (output of winning sound, light emission when winning). , upon receiving a start signal (command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time of decrease) that is transmitted when the number of reservations stored decreases with the start of the variable display, the reservation display is decreased (the first reservation icon is changed to the corresponding icon). If the number of pending icons is decreased by one and the number of pending icons is decreased by one, and the number of pending icons is decreased by one, and the number of pending icons is increased by one, the number of pending icons is increased by one. When the input prize signal which is to be increased is received, the increase performance is not executed multiple times but is executed once. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; The effect control means includes a holding storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a holding memory, and a preliminary judgment means for pre-judging the judgment information before the judgment means, and the production control means When receiving the winning signal (command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings at the time of increase) that is sent when the number of reserved memories increases due to the increase in the number of reserved memories, additional reserved displays are displayed (the number of reserved icons is increased), and when the number of reserved displays increases, It is possible to execute effects (output of winning sound, light emission when winning), and a start signal (command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings at the time of decrease) that is sent when the holding memory decreases with the start of the fluctuating display. When receiving a predetermined signal indicating the result of the preliminary determination, it is possible to reduce the pending display (shift the first pending icon to the corresponding icon, reduce the number of pending icons), and when receiving a predetermined signal indicating the result of the preliminary determination, the special It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect (icon change effect, continuous notice effect) that makes players expect to play a game, and when the input award time signal that increases the pending display by one is received, the increase time effect is executed. (Output of winning sound, light emission when winning) is executed once, and if the winning signal that causes the number of pending displays to be increased multiple times is received, the increase effect is executed once instead of being executed multiple times. , when a plurality of the pending displays are increased, the pending memory corresponding to a specific pending display (the pending icon for which the winning command could not be received normally) among the increased pending displays is targeted. Execution of look-ahead effects is restricted. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole, and an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information); a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons) and to perform an effect when the pending display is increased (outputting a winning sound, emitting light when winning). , upon receiving a start signal (command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time of decrease) that is transmitted when the number of reservations stored decreases with the start of the variable display, the reservation display is decreased (the first reservation icon is changed to the corresponding icon). If the input award time signal is received, which increases the number of pending icons (the number of pending icons is decreased), the number of pending displays is additionally displayed, and the number of pending icons is decreased. The increase effect is executed for the corresponding pending display. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (production control board 130), the main control means includes an acquisition means for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on winning of a game ball in a starting hole; a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination result; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determining means; a suspension storage means for storing the judgment information of execution as a suspension memory; When a command to specify the number of pending figures is received, it is possible to additionally display a pending display (increase the number of pending icons) and to perform an effect when the pending display increases (output of winning sound, light emission when winning). , upon receiving a start signal (command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time of decrease) that is transmitted when the number of reservations stored decreases with the start of the variable display, the reservation display is decreased (the first reservation icon is changed to the corresponding icon). , and decrease the number of pending icons), and when receiving the winning signal that increases the pending display by one, the increase effect (output of winning sound, light emission when winning) is activated. If the input award signal is received which causes the number of pending displays to be increased by one after being executed once, the increase effect is not executed multiple times but is executed once and the number of pending displays is increased by one. Even if a plurality of the hold displays are increased, the increase performance is executed in the same performance mode (sound type, volume, sound length, light emitting color, light emitting time). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (first special A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and the production control means controls the first variation production (production symbols and/or special symbols) upon receiving the start signal (start command) of the first variation display. When a condition for ending the first variable display is satisfied (a command to stop the first variable display is received, a variable display time elapses), the first variable display can be ended; When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time is lapse), the second variable performance can be ended, and the start signal includes a first information signal (special figure designation command) and a second information signal (variation pattern designation command), The means is arranged such that in the normal gaming state, there is an abnormality in the first information signal or the second information signal which is the starting signal of the second variable display (the winnings or losses are not correct, the symbol is damaged, the special symbol is If the types are different, etc.), the second variable effect is not executed, but during the execution of the second variable effect, an end condition different from the end condition of the second variable effect is satisfied (stopping of the first variable display). (time command is received, second fluctuation display start time command is received, opening designation command is received, customer waiting state designation command is received, power on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), the second fluctuation Finish the performance. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (first special A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and the production control means controls the first variation production (production symbols and/or special symbols) upon receiving the start signal (start command) of the first variation display. When a condition for ending the first variable display is satisfied (a command to stop the first variable display is received, a variable display time elapses), the first variable display can be ended; When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time is has passed), the second variable effect can be ended, and in the normal gaming state, if the start signal of the second variable display cannot be received normally (within a predetermined time after receiving the special figure designation command), the second variable effect can be terminated. If the variation pattern specification command is not received, the variation pattern specification command is received even though the special figure specification command is not received, etc.), the second variation effect is not executed, but the second variation effect is being executed. An end condition different from the end condition of the second fluctuating effect is established (receiving the stop command of the first fluctuating display, receiving the start command of the second fluctuating display, receiving the opening designation command, and receiving the customer waiting state designation command). (such as a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.), the second fluctuation effect is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (first special A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and the production control means controls the first variation production (production symbols and/or special symbols) upon receiving the start signal (start command) of the first variation display. When a condition for ending the first variable display is satisfied (a command to stop the first variable display is received, a variable display time elapses), the first variable display can be ended; When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time is lapse), the second variable performance can be ended, and the start signal includes a first information signal (special figure designation command) and a second information signal (variation pattern designation command), The means is arranged such that in the specific gaming state, there is an abnormality in the first information signal or the second information signal which is the starting signal of the first variable display (the winnings or losses do not match, the special symbol is damaged, If the type is different, etc.), the first variable effect is not executed, but during the execution of the first variable effect, an end condition different from the end condition of the first variable effect is satisfied (stopping of the second variable display). time command, first fluctuation display start time command, opening designation command, customer waiting state designation command, power on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.). 1. End the variation performance. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (a first special prize) based on the establishment of a first starting condition (a winning of a game ball to the first starting opening 45). A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), and a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and the production control means controls the first variation production (production symbols and/or special symbols) upon receiving the start signal (start command) of the first variation display. When a condition for ending the first variable display is satisfied (a command to stop the first variable display is received, a variable display time elapses), the first variable display can be ended; When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at start time) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time is has passed), the second variable effect can be terminated, and in the specific gaming state, if the start signal of the first variable display cannot be received normally (within a predetermined time after receiving the special symbol designation command), the second variable effect can be terminated. If the fluctuation pattern designation command is not received, the fluctuation pattern designation command is received even though the special figure designation command is not received, etc.), the first fluctuation performance is not executed, but the first fluctuation performance is being executed. An end condition different from the end condition of the first fluctuating effect is established (receiving the stop command of the second fluctuating display, receiving the start command of the first fluctuating display, receiving the opening designation command, and receiving the customer waiting state designation command). , a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.), the first fluctuation effect is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (first special A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and the production control means controls the first variation production (production symbols and/or special symbols) upon receiving the start signal (start command) of the first variation display. When a condition for ending the first variable display is satisfied (a command to stop the first variable display is received, a variable display time elapses), the first variable display can be ended; When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time is lapse), the second variable performance can be ended, and the start signal includes a first information signal (special figure designation command) and a second information signal (variation pattern designation command), The means is arranged such that in the specific game state, there is an abnormality in the first information signal or the second information signal which is the start signal of the second variable display (the winnings or losses are not correct, the symbol is damaged, the special symbol is If the types are different, etc.), the second variable effect is not executed, but during the execution of the second variable effect, an end condition different from the end condition of the second variable effect is satisfied (stopping of the first variable display). (time command is received, second fluctuation display start time command is received, opening designation command is received, customer waiting state designation command is received, power on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), the second fluctuation Finish the performance. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (first special A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and the production control means controls the first variation production (production symbols and/or special symbols) upon receiving the start signal (start command) of the first variation display. When a condition for ending the first variable display is satisfied (a command to stop the first variable display is received, a variable display time elapses), the first variable display can be ended; When the signal for starting the second variable display (command at start) is received, the second variable effect is started, and the condition for ending the second variable effect is satisfied (the command at the time of stopping the second variable display is received, the variable effect time is has passed), the second variable effect can be ended, and in the specific gaming state, if the start signal of the second variable display cannot be received normally (within a predetermined time after receiving the special symbol designation command), the second variable effect can be terminated. If the variation pattern specification command is not received, the variation pattern specification command is received even though the special figure specification command is not received, etc.), the second variation effect is not executed, but the second variation effect is being executed. An end condition different from the end condition of the second fluctuating effect is established (receiving the stop command of the first fluctuating display, receiving the start command of the second fluctuating display, receiving the opening designation command, and receiving the customer waiting state designation command). (such as a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.), the second fluctuation effect is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (first special A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and when the effect control means receives the start signal (start command) of the first variable display, the effect control means controls the execution information of the first variable display (the icon, When the condition for erasing the running information of the first variable display is satisfied (receiving a stop command, elapse of the variable production time), the running information can be erased, and the second variable display When the start signal (start command) is received, the running information (the icon, the lamp) of the second variable display is displayed, and the condition for erasing the running information of the second variable display is satisfied (stop command). is received, and the fluctuation production time has elapsed), the execution information can be deleted, and the start signal is a combination of a first information signal (special figure designation command) and a second information signal (variation pattern designation command). In the specific game state, the performance control means detects that there is an abnormality in the first information signal or the second information signal, which is the start signal of the second variable display (the winnings and losses do not match, are damaged, etc.). (the type of special symbol is different, etc.), the running information of the second fluctuating display is not displayed, but the running information of the second fluctuating display is displayed while the running information of the second fluctuating display is being displayed. An erasure condition different from the erasure condition is met (receiving the stop command of the first variable display, receiving the start command of the second variable display, receiving the opening designation command, receiving the customer waiting state designation command, specifying the power on) command, power restoration designation command, etc.), the execution information in the second variable display is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twenty-second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means executes a first symbol (first special A first variable display execution means executes a first variable display that causes a variable display of a symbol), and a second symbol (a second special symbol ), a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display that causes a variable display to be displayed; ), and when the effect control means receives the start signal (start command) of the first variable display, the effect control means controls the execution information of the first variable display (the icon, When the condition for erasing the running information of the first variable display is satisfied (receiving a stop command, elapse of the variable production time), the running information can be erased, and the second variable display When the start signal (start command) is received, the running information (the icon, the lamp) of the second variable display is displayed, and the condition for erasing the running information of the second variable display is satisfied (stop command). When the start signal of the second variable display cannot be received normally (when a special figure designation command is received), the running information can be erased. If the variable pattern designation command is not received within a predetermined period of time, the fluctuation pattern designation command is received even though the special figure designation command has not been received, etc.), the execution information of the second fluctuation display is not displayed. , during the display of the running information of the second fluctuating display, a deletion condition different from the deletion condition of the running information of the second fluctuating display is established (when a stop command of the first fluctuating display is received, the second fluctuating display When a start command is received, an opening designation command is received, a customer waiting state designation command is received, a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.), the execution information in the second variable display is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

<Contents 19 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and the game performance is performed according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that run the game are common. Some of these gaming machines were equipped with a main control means that controlled the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controlled the effect according to commands (signals) from the main control means (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means deviate.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means receives first determination information (special performance control board 130) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). Figure determination information) or whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 47). a first variable display execution device that executes a first variable display (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the first determination information; and a first variable display execution device that determines the second determination information. a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the result of the second variable display; a storage means for storing the second determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. and a gaming state control means for controlling the play state, the performance control means being able to display an icon (holding icon) based on the first holding memory and the second holding memory on the display means (first image display device 70). The first variable effect can be started in response to the start of the first variable display, the first variable effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the first variable display, and the first variable effect can be ended in response to the start of the second variable display. The main control means can start a second variable display in response to the second variable display, and end the second variable display in response to the end of the second variable display, and the main control means may cause the first variable display to start after the second variable display. (when performing the first variable display after performing the second variable display in the normal gaming state), the effect control means executes a command while executing the second variable effect based on the second variable display. When a communication abnormality occurs in which the (stop command) cannot be received, the display of the icon that was displayed during the second variable performance (the display of the icon based on the first pending memory) is changed to Even after the fluctuating display ends and the first fluctuating display is executed, it is possible to continue displaying without being erased, and continuous performance operations (fluctuation, rotation, etc.) are possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means receives first determination information (special performance control board 130) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). Figure determination information) or whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 47). a first variable display execution device that executes a first variable display (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the first determination information; and a first variable display execution device that determines the second determination information. a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the result of the second variable display; a storage means for storing the second determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. and a gaming state control means for controlling the play state, the performance control means being able to display an icon (holding icon) based on the first holding memory and the second holding memory on the display means (first image display device 70). The first variable effect can be started in response to the start of the first variable display, the first variable effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the first variable display, and the first variable effect can be ended in response to the start of the second variable display. The main control means can start a second fluctuating display in response to the first fluctuating display, and can end the second fluctuating display when the second fluctuating display ends, and the main control means starts the second fluctuating display following the first fluctuating display. (when performing a second variable display after performing a first variable display in a specific gaming state), the effect control means executes a command while executing the first variable effect based on the first variable display. When a communication abnormality occurs in which the (stop command) cannot be received, the display of the icon that was displayed during the first variation performance (display of the icon based on the second pending memory) is changed to Even when the variable display ends and the second variable display is executed, it is possible to continue displaying without being erased, and continuous performance operations (fluctuation, rotation, etc.) are possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance that controls the performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means receives first determination information (special performance control board 130) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). Figure determination information) or whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 47). a first variable display execution device that executes a first variable display (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the first determination information; and a first variable display execution device that determines the second determination information. a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the result of the second variable display; a storage means for storing the second determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. and a gaming state control means for controlling the play state, the performance control means being able to display an icon (holding icon) based on the first holding memory and the second holding memory on the display means (first image display device 70). The first variable effect can be started in response to the start of the first variable display, the first variable effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the first variable display, and the first variable effect can be ended in response to the start of the second variable display. The second variable effect can be started in accordance with the second variable display, and the second variable effect can be ended in response to the end of the second variable display, When executing the first variable display (when performing the first variable display after performing the second variable display in the normal gaming state), the performance control means executes the second variable display based on the second variable display. If a communication error occurs in which a command (stop command) cannot be received during execution of the production, and if a predetermined command (start command, stop command) related to the first variable display that is executed next is successfully received. While the second variable effect is ended, the display of the icon that was displayed during the second variable effect is not updated. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means receives first determination information (special performance control board 130) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). Figure determination information) or whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 47). a first variable display execution device that executes a first variable display (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the first determination information; and a first variable display execution device that determines the second determination information. a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the result of the second variable display; a storage means for storing the second determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. and a gaming state control means for controlling the play state, the performance control means being able to display an icon (holding icon) based on the first holding memory and the second holding memory on the display means (first image display device 70). The first variable effect can be started in response to the start of the first variable display, the first variable effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the first variable display, and the first variable effect can be ended in response to the start of the second variable display. The second variable effect can be started in accordance with the second variable display, and the second variable effect can be ended in response to the end of the second variable display, When executing the first variable display (when performing the first variable display after performing the second variable display in the normal gaming state), the performance control means executes the second variable display based on the second variable display. If a communication error occurs in which a command (stop command) cannot be received during execution of the production, and if a predetermined command (start command, stop command) related to the first variable display that is executed next is successfully received. The second variable performance is ended, and the display of the icon displayed during the second variable performance is updated at a predetermined timing thereafter. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means receives first determination information (special performance control board 130) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). Figure determination information) or whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 47). a first variable display execution device that executes a first variable display (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the first determination information; and a first variable display execution device that determines the second determination information. a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the result of the second variable display; a storage means for storing the second determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. and a gaming state control means for controlling the play state, the performance control means being able to display an icon (holding icon) based on the first holding memory and the second holding memory on the display means (first image display device 70). The first variable effect can be started in response to the start of the first variable display, the first variable effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the first variable display, and the first variable effect can be ended in response to the start of the second variable display. The second variable effect can be started in response to the first variable display, and the second variable effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the second variable display, When executing the second variable display (when performing the second variable display after performing the first variable display in a specific gaming state), the effect control means executes the first variable display based on the first variable display. If a communication error occurs in which a command (stop command) cannot be received during execution of the production, and if a predetermined command (start command, stop command) related to the second variable display that is executed next is successfully received. The first variable performance is ended, and the display of the icon displayed during the first variable performance is updated at a predetermined timing thereafter. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means receives first determination information (special performance control board 130) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). Figure determination information) or whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 47). a first variable display execution device that executes a first variable display (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the first determination information; and a first variable display execution device that determines the second determination information. a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the result of the second variable display; a storage means for storing the second determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. and a gaming state control means for controlling the play state, the performance control means being able to display an icon (holding icon) based on the first holding memory and the second holding memory on the display means (first image display device 70). and is capable of displaying hold information (hold numbers, sub-first hold LED) based on the first hold memory and the second hold memory, and starts a first variable effect in response to the start of the first change display. and the first variable effect can be ended in response to the end of the first variable display, the second variable effect can be started in response to the start of the second variable display, and the second variable effect can be started in response to the end of the second variable display. When the main control means executes the first variable display following the second variable display (when the second variable display is executed in the normal gaming state) (in the case where the first variable display is performed after performing the first variable display), if a communication abnormality occurs in which the effect control means cannot receive a command (command at the time of stop) while executing the second variable effect based on the second variable display. , when a predetermined command (start command, stop command) related to the first executed variation display is normally received, the second variation effect is ended, and the second variation display is displayed at a predetermined timing thereafter. The pending information displayed during the performance is updated. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means receives first determination information (special performance control board 130) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). Figure determination information) or whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 47). a first variable display execution device that executes a first variable display (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the first determination information; and a first variable display execution device that determines the second determination information. a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the result of the second variable display; a storage means for storing the second determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. and a gaming state control means for controlling the play state, the performance control means being able to display an icon (holding icon) based on the first holding memory and the second holding memory on the display means (first image display device 70). and is capable of displaying hold information (hold numbers, sub-first hold LED) based on the first hold memory and the second hold memory, and starts a first variable effect in response to the start of the first change display. and the first variable effect can be ended in response to the end of the first variable display, the second variable effect can be started in response to the start of the second variable display, and the second variable effect can be started in response to the end of the second variable display. When the main control means executes the second variable display following the first variable display (the first variable display in a specific gaming state) (in the case where a second variable display is performed after performing a second variable display), if a communication abnormality occurs in which the effect control means cannot receive a command (command at the time of stop) while executing the first variable effect based on the first variable display. , when a predetermined command (start command, stop command) related to the second executed variation display is normally received, the first variation effect is ended, and the first variation display is displayed at a subsequent predetermined timing. The pending information displayed during the performance is updated. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means receives first determination information (special performance control board 130) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). Figure determination information) or whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 47). a first variable display execution device that executes a first variable display (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the first determination information; and a first variable display execution device that determines the second determination information. a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the result of the second variable display; a storage means for storing the second determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. and a game state control means for controlling the first variable display. The first variable effect can be started in response to the start of the first variable display, the first variable effect can be ended in response to the end of the first variable display, and the second variable effect can be started in response to the start of the second variable display. and the second variable performance can be ended in accordance with the end of the second variable display, and when the main control means executes the first variable display following the second variable display (normal game state (in the case where the first variable display is performed after performing the second variable display), the effect control means cannot receive a command (stop command) during execution of the second variable effect based on the second variable display. When a communication abnormality occurs, the predetermined display effect (background display effect) that was being displayed during the second variable effect is such that the second variable display ends and the first variable display is executed in the main control means. It is possible to continue displaying even if the Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ A ninth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means receives first determination information (special performance control board 130) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). Figure determination information) or whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 47). a first variable display execution device that executes a first variable display (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the first determination information; and a first variable display execution device that determines the second determination information. a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the result of the second variable display; a storage means for storing the second determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. and a game state control means for controlling the first variable display. The first variable effect can be started in response to the start of the first variable display, the first variable effect can be ended in response to the end of the first variable display, and the second variable effect can be started in response to the start of the second variable display. and the second variable performance can be ended in accordance with the end of the second variable display, and the main control means executes the second variable display following the first variable display (in a specific game state (in the case where a second variable display is performed after performing a first variable display), the effect control means cannot receive a command (stop command) during execution of the first variable effect based on the first variable display. When a communication abnormality occurs, the predetermined display effect (background display effect) displayed during the first variable effect is such that the first variable display ends and the second variable display is executed in the main control means. It is possible to continue displaying even if the Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means receives first determination information (special performance control board 130) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). Figure determination information) or whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 47). a first variable display execution device that executes a first variable display (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the first determination information; and a first variable display execution device that determines the second determination information. a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the result of the second variable display; a storage means for storing the second determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. and a game state control means for controlling the performance, and the performance control means adjusts the predetermined performance (sound performance, light emission performance) (adjustment to increase the volume value) in response to the performance adjustment operation (cross key operation) by the player. , adjustment to lower the volume value, adjustment to increase the light amount value, adjustment to decrease the light amount value), and a first fluctuation effect is started in response to the start of the first fluctuation display, and the first fluctuation display is The first variable effect can be ended in response to the end of the second variable display, the second variable effect is started in response to the start of the second variable display, and the second variable effect is started in response to the end of the second variable display. and when the main control means executes the first variable display following the second variable display (in the case where the first variable display is performed after the second variable display is performed in the normal gaming state). , when a communication abnormality occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (command at the time of stop) during execution of the second variation production based on the second variation display, the production control means may control the display according to the first variation display executed next. When a predetermined command (start command, stop command) is normally received, the second fluctuating effect is ended, and the main control means ends the second fluctuating display while the first fluctuating display is being executed. In addition, the performance adjustment operation described above is possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means receives first determination information (special performance control board 130) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). Figure determination information) or whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 47). a first variable display execution device that executes a first variable display (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the first determination information; and a first variable display execution device that determines the second determination information. a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the result of the second variable display; a storage means for storing the second determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a game state control means for controlling the performance, and the effect control means starts a first variable effect including a change in effect symbols in response to the start of the first variable display, and starts a first variable effect including a change in effect symbols in response to the start of the first variable display, and The first variable performance can be ended in response to the start of the second variable display, a second variable performance including a variation of the performance symbol can be started in response to the start of the second variable display, and the second variable performance can be terminated in response to the end of the second variable display. If the variable performance can be terminated and the first variable display is executed in a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 01), a specific first variation production (variation production pattern 1) can be executed, At a predetermined timing in the specific first variable performance, a predetermined performance using the performance pattern (effect performance of the performance pattern, action performance of the performance pattern) can be executed, and the performance control means is capable of performing the following: When executing the first variable display following the second variable display (when performing the first variable display after performing the second variable display in the normal gaming state), the effect control means executes the second variable display. If a communication abnormality occurs in which a command (stop command) cannot be received during execution of the second variable effect based on the display, the main control means ends the second variable display and displays the specific one as the first variable display. Even if the variable pattern is being executed, the performance control means limits execution of the predetermined performance using the performance symbols at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and a movable performance device (first movable member 73) that is movable between an initial position and an operating position, the main control means is configured to meet a first starting condition. The first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment (the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 45) or the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47) a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information); and a first variable display (first special a first variable display execution means for executing a variable display of symbols); and a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the determination result of the second determination information. , storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first pending memory, and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second pending memory; and a gaming state control means for controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the effect control means is configured to control in response to the start of the first variable display. The first variable effect can be started in response to the end of the first variable display, and the second variable effect can be started in response to the start of the second variable display, The second variation effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the second variation display, and when the first variation display is executed with a specific variation pattern (special pattern variation pattern 08), the second variation effect can be terminated according to the end of the specific first variation effect (variation pattern 08). Performance patterns 15 to 17) can be executed, and at a predetermined timing in the specific first variable performance, a moving performance (determined success performance) can be executed by the movable performance device, and the performance control means: When the main control means executes the first variable display following the second variable display (when performing the first variable display after performing the second variable display in the normal gaming state), the effect control means However, if a communication abnormality occurs in which a command (stop command) cannot be received during execution of the second variable effect based on the second variable display, the main control means ends the second variable display and returns the second variable display to the first variable display. Even if the specific variation pattern is executed as a variation display, the effect control means limits execution of the moving effect by the movable effect device at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and a movable performance device (first movable member 73) that is movable between an initial position and an operating position, the main control means is configured to meet a first starting condition. The first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment (the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 45) or the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47) a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information); and a first variable display (first special a first variable display execution means for executing a variable display of symbols); and a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the determination result of the second determination information. , storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first pending memory, and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second pending memory; and a gaming state control means for controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the effect control means is configured to control in response to the start of the first variable display. The first variable effect can be started in response to the end of the first variable display, and the second variable effect can be started in response to the start of the second variable display, The second variable performance can be ended in accordance with the end of the second variable display, and when the second variable display is executed with a specific variation pattern (special pattern variation pattern 44), the second variation display is The performance patterns 46 to 48) can be executed, and at a predetermined timing in the specific second variable performance, the movable performance device can execute a moving performance (determined success performance), and the performance control means: When the main control means executes the second variable display following the first variable display (when performing the second variable display after performing the first variable display in a specific gaming state), the effect control means However, if a communication abnormality occurs in which a command (stop command) cannot be received during execution of the first variable effect based on the first variable display, the main control means ends the first variable display and displays the second variable display. Even if the specific variation pattern is executed as a variation display, the effect control means limits execution of the moving effect by the movable effect device at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and an operation means (performance button 17) which can be operated by a player and which can vibrate, the main control means is configured to control when a first starting condition is satisfied ( The first judgment information (special figure judgment information) obtained by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45) or the second judgment information obtained by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47) a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information); and a first variable display (of the first special symbol) based on the result of determination of the first determination information. a first variable display execution means for executing a variable display (variable display); a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the determination result of the second determination information; a storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first pending memory and the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal game state and the normal game. a gaming state control means for controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state; The first variable effect can be started in response to the end of the first variable display, the second variable effect can be started in response to the start of the second variable display, and the second variable effect can be started in response to the start of the second variable display, The second variable performance can be terminated in accordance with the end of the display, and when the first variable display is executed with a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 08), the second variation production can be terminated according to the end of the display. 15 to 17), the operation means can be vibrated at a predetermined timing in the specific first variation display, and the production control means is configured to cause the main control means to vibrate the second variation display. When subsequently executing the first variable display (when performing the first variable display after performing the second variable display in the normal gaming state), the performance control means executes the first variable display based on the second variable display. If a communication abnormality occurs in which a command (stop command) cannot be received during execution of the second variation effect, the second variation display is terminated in the main control means and the specific variation pattern is executed as the first variation display. Even if the performance control means limits the vibration of the operation means at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and an operation means (performance button 17) which can be operated by a player and which can vibrate, the main control means is configured to control when a first starting condition is satisfied ( The first judgment information (special figure judgment information) obtained by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45) or the second judgment information obtained by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47) a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information); and a first variable display (of the first special symbol) based on the result of determination of the first determination information. a first variable display execution means for executing a variable display (variable display); a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the determination result of the second determination information; a storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first pending memory and the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal game state and the normal game. a gaming state control means for controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state; The first variable effect can be started in response to the end of the first variable display, the second variable effect can be started in response to the start of the second variable display, and the second variable effect can be started in response to the start of the second variable display, The second variable performance can be ended in accordance with the end of the display, and when the second variable display is executed with a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 44), the second variation display is 46 to 48), the operation means can be vibrated at a predetermined timing in the specific second variable display, and the effect control means is configured to control the first variable display by the main control means. When subsequently executing the second variable display (when performing the second variable display after performing the first variable display in a specific gaming state), the performance control means executes the second variable display based on the first variable display. If a communication abnormality occurs in which a command (stop command) cannot be received during execution of the first variation effect, the first variation display is terminated in the main control means and the specific variation pattern is executed as the second variation display. Even if the operation device is operated, the performance control means limits the vibration of the operation means at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (effect control board 130) and a light emitting means (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) capable of performing a predetermined light emission effect, the main control means is configured to The first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the condition (the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 45) or the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47) a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the acquired second determination information (special figure determination information); and a first variable display (first variable display) based on the result of determination of the first determination information. a first variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol); and a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of the second special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the second determination information. means, storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first pending memory, and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state. and a gaming state control means for controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the effect control means starts the first variable display. The first variable effect can be started in response to the start of the first variable display, the first variable effect can be ended in response to the end of the first variable display, and the second variable effect is started in response to the start of the second variable display, The second variable effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the second variable display, and when the first variable display is executed with a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 08), the specific first variable effect (Variable effect patterns 15 to 17) can be executed, and at a predetermined timing in the specific first variable effect, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit a specific light (rainbow light emission), and the effect control means , when the main control means executes the first variable display following the second variable display (when performing the first variable display after performing the second variable display in the normal gaming state), the effect control If a communication abnormality occurs in which the means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the second fluctuating effect based on the second fluctuating display, the main control means ends the second fluctuating display and displays the second fluctuating effect. Even if the specific variation pattern is executed as one variation display, the effect control means restricts the light emitting means from emitting a specific light at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (effect control board 130) and a light emitting means (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) capable of performing a predetermined light emission effect, the main control means is configured to The first determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the condition (the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 45) or the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 47) a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the acquired second determination information (special figure determination information); and a first variable display (first variable display) based on the result of determination of the first determination information. a first variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol); and a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of the second special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the second determination information. means, storage means for storing the first determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a first pending memory, and storing the second determination information in which the determination has not been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state. and a gaming state control means for controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the effect control means starts the first variable display. The first variable effect can be started in response to the start of the first variable display, the first variable effect can be ended in response to the end of the first variable display, and the second variable effect is started in response to the start of the second variable display, The second variable effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the second variable display, and when the second variable display is executed in a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 44), the second variable effect is (variable effect patterns 46 to 48), and at a predetermined timing in the specific second variable effect, it is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit a specific light (rainbow light emission), and the effect control means , when the main control means executes the second variable display following the first variable display (when performing the second variable display after performing the first variable display in a specific gaming state), the effect control If a communication abnormality occurs in which the means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the first fluctuating effect based on the first fluctuating display, the main control means ends the first fluctuating display and displays the first fluctuating effect. Even if the specific variation pattern is executed as the 2-variation display, the effect control means restricts the light emitting means from causing the light emission means to emit a specific light at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means receives first determination information (special performance control board 130) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). Figure determination information) or whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 47). a first variable display execution device that executes a first variable display (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the first determination information; and a first variable display execution device that determines the second determination information. a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the result of the second variable display; a storage means for storing the second determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a game state control means for controlling the game state, and the effect control means starts the first variable effect in response to the start of the first variable display, and starts the first variable effect in response to the end of the first variable display. The effect can be ended, the second variable effect can be started in response to the start of the second variable display, the second variable effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the second variable display, and the first variable effect can be ended. When the display is executed with a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 08), a specific first variation effect (variation effect patterns 15 to 17) can be executed, and a predetermined variation pattern in the specific first variation effect can be executed. It is possible to execute a reach effect (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach) at the timing, and the effect control means is configured such that the main control means executes the first variable display following the second variable display. (when performing the first variable display after performing the second variable display in the normal gaming state), the effect control means may issue a command (stop) while executing the second variable effect based on the second variable display. If a communication abnormality occurs in which the command cannot be received, even if the second variable display ends in the main control means and the specific variable pattern is executed as the first variable display, the effect control means Execution of the reach effect is restricted at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means receives first determination information (special performance control board 130) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). Figure determination information) or whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 47). a first variable display execution device that executes a first variable display (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the first determination information; and a first variable display execution device that determines the second determination information. a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the result of the second variable display; a storage means for storing the second determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a game state control means for controlling the game state, and the effect control means starts the first variable effect in response to the start of the first variable display, and starts the first variable effect in response to the end of the first variable display. The effect can be ended, the second variable effect can be started in response to the start of the second variable display, the second variable effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the second variable display, and the first variable effect can be ended. When the display is executed with a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 08), a specific first variation effect (variation effect patterns 15 to 17) can be executed, and a predetermined variation pattern in the specific first variation effect can be executed. It is possible to execute a suggestion performance (decision performance) that suggests whether or not the special game is to be executed at the timing, and the performance control means is configured such that the main control means executes a suggestion performance (decision performance) that suggests whether or not the special game is to be executed. When executing the first variable display (when performing the first variable display after performing the second variable display in the normal gaming state), the performance control means executes the second variable display based on the second variable display. If a communication abnormality occurs in which a command (stop command) cannot be received during execution of the performance, the second fluctuation display ends in the main control means and the specific fluctuation pattern is executed as the first fluctuation display. Also, the effect control means limits execution of the suggested effect at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means receives first determination information (special performance control board 130) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). Figure determination information) or whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 47). a first variable display execution device that executes a first variable display (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the first determination information; and a first variable display execution device that determines the second determination information. a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the result of the second variable display; a storage means for storing the second determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a game state control means for controlling the game state, and the effect control means starts the first variable effect in response to the start of the first variable display, and starts the first variable effect in response to the end of the first variable display. The effect can be ended, the second variable effect can be started in response to the start of the second variable display, the second variable effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the second variable display, and the first variable effect can be ended. When the display is executed with a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 08), a specific first variation effect (variation effect patterns 15 to 17) can be executed, and a predetermined variation pattern in the specific first variation effect can be executed. It is possible to execute a pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) in which a pseudo variable effect is performed a predetermined number of times at the timing, and the effect control means is configured to perform a pseudo continuous effect in which a pseudo variable effect is performed a predetermined number of times. When executing the first variable display (when performing the first variable display after performing the second variable display in the normal gaming state), the performance control means controls the second variable display based on the second variable display. If a communication abnormality occurs in which a command (stop command) cannot be received during execution, even if the second fluctuation display ends in the main control means and the specific fluctuation pattern is executed as the first fluctuation display, The effect control means limits execution of the pseudo-continuous effect at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means receives first determination information (special performance control board 130) obtained when the first starting condition is satisfied (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). Figure determination information) or whether to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the second starting port 47). a first variable display execution device that executes a first variable display (a variable display of the first special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the first determination information; and a first variable display execution device that determines the second determination information. a second variable display execution means for executing a second variable display (a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the result of the second variable display; a storage means for storing the second determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a second pending memory; and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. and a gaming state control means for controlling the play state, the performance control means being able to display an icon (holding icon) based on the first holding memory and the second holding memory on the display means (first image display device 70). The first variable effect can be started in response to the start of the first variable display, the first variable effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the first variable display, and the first variable effect can be ended in response to the start of the second variable display. It is possible to start a second variable effect accordingly, and to end the second variable effect according to the end of the second variable display, and to set the icon to a normal display mode (white icon) and the normal display mode. It is possible to perform an icon change effect (pending icon change effect) that indicates the possibility that the special game will be executed by displaying it in one of the different special display modes (red icon), and the first variable display is When executed with a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 08), it is possible to execute a specific first variation production (variation production patterns 15 to 17), and at a predetermined timing in the specific first variation production. , it is possible to execute the icon change effect, and the effect control means is capable of executing the icon change effect when the main control means executes the first variable display following the second variable display (the second change effect in the normal gaming state). (in the case where a first variable display is performed after performing a variable display), there is a communication abnormality in which the effect control means cannot receive a command (stop command) during execution of the second variable effect based on the second variable display. When this occurs, even if the second variable display has ended in the main control means and the specific variation pattern has been executed as the first variable display, the effect control means may perform the icon change effect at the predetermined timing. Restrict execution. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

<Contents 20 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and the game performance is performed according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that run the game are common. Some of these gaming machines were equipped with a main control means that controlled the progress of the game, and an effect control means that controlled the effect according to commands (signals) from the main control means (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means deviate.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; An icon (pending icon) based on the above can be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70), a variable effect is started in response to the start of the variable display, and a variable effect is ended in accordance with the end of the variable display. is possible, and when the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state, the effect control If a communication error occurs in which the means cannot receive a command (command at stop) while executing the current variation effect corresponding to the current variation display, the means displays the icon (the first one) that was displayed during the execution of the current variation effect. 1. Display of icons based on pending memory) can be continuously displayed without being erased even if the current variable display is finished and the next variable display is executed in the main control means, and the icon display can be continuously displayed. It is movable (fluctuation, rotation, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a second pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; An icon (pending icon) based on the above can be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70), a variable effect is started in response to the start of the variable display, and a variable effect is ended in accordance with the end of the variable display. is possible, and the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the specific gaming state, the effect control If a communication error occurs in which the means cannot receive a command (command at stop) while executing the current variation effect corresponding to the current variation display, the means displays the icon (the first one) that was displayed during the execution of the current variation effect. 2. Display of icons based on pending memory) is capable of being continuously displayed without being erased even when the current variable display is finished and the next variable display is executed in the main control means, and is continuously displayed. It is movable (fluctuation, rotation, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance that controls the performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; An icon (pending icon) based on the above can be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70), a variable effect is started in response to the start of the variable display, and a variable effect is ended in accordance with the end of the variable display. is possible, and when the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state, the effect control If a communication error occurs in which the means cannot receive a command (command at stop) while executing the current variation effect corresponding to the current variation display, the means displays the icon (the first one) that was displayed during the execution of the current variation effect. 1 display of icons based on pending storage) allows the main control means to not update the icons even if the current variable display ends and the next variable display is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; An icon (pending icon) based on the above can be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70), a variable effect is started in response to the start of the variable display, and a variable effect is ended in accordance with the end of the variable display. is possible, and when the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state, the effect control If a communication error occurs in which the means cannot receive a command (command at stop) while executing the current variation effect corresponding to the current variation display, the means displays the icon (the first one) that was displayed during the execution of the current variation effect. 1 (display of icons based on pending storage) is not updated even when the current variable display is finished and the next variable display is executed in the main control means, but can be updated at a subsequent predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A fifth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a second pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; An icon (pending icon) based on the above can be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70), a variable effect is started in response to the start of the variable display, and a variable effect is ended in accordance with the end of the variable display. is possible, and the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the specific gaming state, the effect control If a communication error occurs in which the means cannot receive a command (command at stop) while executing the current variation effect corresponding to the current variation display, the means displays the icon (the first one) that was displayed during the execution of the current variation effect. 2 (display of icons based on pending storage) allows the main control means to not update the icons even if the current variable display ends and the next variable display is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; is capable of displaying an icon (holding icon) based on the holding memory, and holding information (for example, holding numbers, sub-first holding LED) based on the holding memory, and starts a fluctuating effect in response to the start of the fluctuating display, The variable performance can be ended in accordance with the end of the variable display, and the main control means is based on the next judgment information stored in the pending storage following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state. When executing the next variable display, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the current variation display will be executed. The display of the hold information (for example, the hold number based on the first hold memory, the display of the sub-first hold LED) is changed to the next change display after the current change display ends in the main control means. It is not updated even if it is executed, and it can be updated at a predetermined timing thereafter. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a second pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; is capable of displaying an icon (holding icon) based on the holding memory, and holding information (for example, holding numbers, sub-second holding LED) based on the holding memory, and starts a fluctuating effect in response to the start of the fluctuating display, The variable performance can be ended in accordance with the end of the variable display, and the main control means is based on the next judgment information stored in the pending storage following the current variable display currently being executed in the specific gaming state. When executing the next variable display, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the current variation display will be executed. The display of the hold information (for example, the hold number based on the second hold memory, the display of the sub-second hold LED) is changed to the next change display after the current change display ends in the main control means. It is not updated even if it is executed, and it can be updated at a predetermined timing thereafter. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the effect control means includes a display means ( A predetermined display effect (e.g., background display effect) capable of changing display (e.g., background change display) can be executed in the first image display device 70), and the variable effect is started in response to the start of the variable display. and the variable performance can be terminated in accordance with the end of the variable display, and the main control means displays the next judgment information stored in the hold following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state. When executing the next variation display based on the current variation display, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (command at the time of stop) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the current variation production The predetermined display effect (for example, background display effect) that was being displayed during the execution of is capable of being continuously displayed even when the current variable display ends and the next variable display is executed in the main control means, In addition, continuous change display is possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ A ninth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for performing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a second pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the effect control means includes a display means ( A predetermined display effect (e.g., background display effect) capable of changing display (e.g., background change display) can be executed in the first image display device 70), and the variable effect is started in response to the start of the variable display. and the fluctuating performance can be ended in accordance with the end of the fluctuating display, and the main control means can display the next judgment information stored in the hold following the current fluctuating display currently being executed in the specific gaming state. When executing the next variation display based on the current variation display, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (command at the time of stop) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the current variation production The predetermined display effect (for example, background display effect) that was being displayed during the execution of is capable of being continuously displayed even when the current variable display ends and the next variable display is executed in the main control means, In addition, continuous change display is possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; Performs adjustments (increasing the volume value, decreasing the volume value, increasing the light level value, decreasing the light level value) regarding the predetermined effects (sound effect, light emission effect) according to the effect adjustment operation (cross key operation) It is possible to start a fluctuating performance in response to the start of the fluctuating display, and to end the fluctuating performance in response to the end of the fluctuating display; When executing the next variable display based on the next judgment information held in storage following the current variable display, the effect control means may issue a command while executing the current variable effect corresponding to the current variable display. If a communication abnormality occurs in which the (stop command) cannot be received, the effect adjustment operation is made possible even if the current variable display is finished in the main control means and the next variable display is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , a gaming state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the effect control means controls the variable display. It is possible to start a variable effect according to the start of the variable display, and to end the variable effect according to the end of the variable display, and when the variable display is executed with a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 01), a specific A variable performance (variable performance pattern 1) can be executed, and at a predetermined timing in the specific variable performance, a predetermined performance using a performance pattern (effect performance of the performance pattern, action performance of the performance pattern) can be executed, When the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next determination information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state, the effect control means If a communication error occurs in which a command (command at stop) cannot be received during the execution of the current variation effect corresponding to the current variation display, the main control means terminates the current variation display and displays the specific variation as the next variation display. Even if a pattern is executed, execution of a predetermined effect using the effect pattern can be restricted at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twelfth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and a movable performance device (first movable member 73) that is movable between an initial position and an operating position, the main control means is configured to control when a starting condition is satisfied ( For example, whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by winning a game ball to the first starting port 45, winning a game ball to the second starting port 47) a determining means for determining whether the determination is made; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display (for example, a variable display of the first special symbol, a variable display of the second special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the determination information; A storage means for storing the unexecuted determination information as a suspended memory (for example, a first suspended memory), and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ), the effect control means is capable of starting a variable effect in response to the start of the variable display, and can end the variable effect in response to the end of the variable display, When the fluctuating display is executed in a specific fluctuating pattern (special figure fluctuating pattern 08), specific fluctuating effects (fluctuation rendering patterns 15 to 17) can be executed, and at a predetermined timing in the specific fluctuating rendering. , the movable performance device is capable of executing a moving performance (decision success performance), and the main control means executes the next judgment stored in the pending storage following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state. When executing the next variation display based on the information, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main control Even if the current variable display ends and the specific variable pattern is executed as the next variable display in the means, execution of the moving effect by the movable effect device can be restricted at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and a movable performance device (first movable member 73) that is movable between an initial position and an operating position, the main control means is configured to control when a starting condition is satisfied ( For example, whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by winning a game ball to the first starting port 45, winning a game ball to the second starting port 47) a determining means for determining whether the determination is made; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display (for example, a variable display of the first special symbol, a variable display of the second special symbol) based on the result of the determination of the determination information; A storage means for storing the unexecuted determination information as a pending memory (for example, a second pending memory), and a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ), the effect control means is capable of starting a variable effect in response to the start of the variable display, and can end the variable effect in response to the end of the variable display, When the fluctuating display is executed with a specific fluctuating pattern (special figure fluctuating pattern 44), specific fluctuating effects (fluctuation rendering patterns 46 to 48) can be executed, and at a predetermined timing in the specific fluctuating rendering. , the movable performance device can execute a moving performance (decision success performance), and the main control means executes the next judgment stored in the pending storage following the current variable display currently being executed in the specific game state. When executing the next variation display based on the information, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main control Even if the current variable display ends and the specific variable pattern is executed as the next variable display in the means, execution of the moving effect by the movable effect device can be restricted at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and an operation means (performance button 17) which can be operated by a player and which can vibrate, the main control means is configured to control the performance when a starting condition is satisfied (for example, Whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by winning the game ball to the first starting port 45 and winning the game ball to the second starting port 47) a determination means for making a determination; a fluctuation display execution means for executing a variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol, a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination information; a storage means for storing the judgment information as a suspended memory (for example, a first suspended memory); a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; and a game state control means for controlling the fluctuation performance, the performance control means being capable of starting the fluctuation performance in response to the start of the fluctuation display, and ending the fluctuation performance in response to the end of the fluctuation display, When the display is executed with a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 08), it is possible to execute a specific variation effect (variation effect patterns 15 to 17), and at a predetermined timing in the specific variation effect, the The operating means can be vibrated, and the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state. If a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main control means terminates the current variation display and displays the current variation display. Even if the specific variation pattern is executed as the next variation display, vibration of the operating means can be limited at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and an operation means (performance button 17) which can be operated by a player and which can vibrate, the main control means is configured to control the performance when a starting condition is satisfied (for example, Whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by winning the game ball to the first starting port 45 and winning the game ball to the second starting port 47) a determination means for making a determination; a fluctuation display execution means for executing a variable display (for example, a variable display of a first special symbol, a variable display of a second special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination information; a storage means for storing the judgment information as a pending memory (for example, a second pending memory); a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; and a game state control means for controlling the fluctuation performance, the performance control means being capable of starting the fluctuation performance in response to the start of the fluctuation display, and ending the fluctuation performance in response to the end of the fluctuation display, When the display is executed with a specific variation pattern (special figure variation pattern 44), it is possible to execute a specific variation effect (variation effect patterns 46 to 48), and at a predetermined timing in the specific variation effect, the The operating means can be vibrated, and the main control means executes the next variable display based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current variable display currently being executed in the specific gaming state. If a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main control means terminates the current variation display and displays the current variation display. Even if the specific variation pattern is executed as the next variation display, vibration of the operating means can be limited at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and a light emitting means (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) capable of producing a predetermined light emission effect, the main control means is configured to A special game (jackpot game) is executed based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by the establishment (for example, winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45, winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not the above-mentioned A storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a suspended memory (for example, a first suspended memory); a gaming state control means for controlling a gaming state), the performance control means being capable of starting a variable performance in response to the start of the variable display and ending the variable performance in response to the end of the variable display. Yes, and when the fluctuating display is executed with a specific fluctuating pattern (special figure fluctuating pattern 08), it is possible to execute a specific fluctuating production (fluctuation rendering patterns 15 to 17), and the predetermined variation display in the specific fluctuating rendering is It is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit a specific light (rainbow light emission) at the timing, and the main control means can display the next stored pending display following the current variable display currently being executed in the normal gaming state. When executing the next variation display based on the determination information, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main Even when the current variable display ends and the specific variable pattern is executed as the next variable display in the control means, it is possible to restrict the light emitting means from emitting a specific light at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130) and a light emitting means (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76) capable of producing a predetermined light emission effect, the main control means is configured to A special game (jackpot game) is executed based on the determination information (special figure determination information) obtained by the establishment (for example, winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45, winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not the above-mentioned A storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not yet been performed as a pending memory (for example, a second pending memory); a gaming state control means for controlling a gaming state), the performance control means being capable of starting a variable performance in response to the start of the variable display and ending the variable performance in response to the end of the variable display. Yes, and when the fluctuating display is executed with a specific fluctuating pattern (special figure fluctuating pattern 44), it is possible to execute a specific fluctuating production (fluctuation rendering patterns 46 to 48), and the predetermined variation display in the specific fluctuating rendering is It is possible to cause the light emitting means to emit a specific light (rainbow light emission) at the timing, and the main control means may display the next stored pending display following the current variable display currently being executed in the specific gaming state. When executing the next variation display based on the determination information, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main Even when the current variable display ends and the specific variable pattern is executed as the next variable display in the control means, it is possible to restrict the light emitting means from emitting a specific light at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , the effect control means is capable of starting the variable effect in response to the start of the variable display, and can end the variable effect in response to the end of the variable display, and the variable display is configured to match a specific variation pattern (specifically When executed in figure variation pattern 08), specific variation effects (variation effect patterns 15 to 17) can be executed, and at a predetermined timing in the specific variation effect, reach effects (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP When the main control means executes the next variation display based on the next determination information held and stored, following the current variation display that is currently being executed, If a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main control means ends the current variation display and starts the next variation. Even if the specific variation pattern is executed as a display, execution of the ready-to-reach effect can be restricted at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls the effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , the effect control means is capable of starting the variable effect in response to the start of the variable display, and can end the variable effect in response to the end of the variable display, and the variable display is configured to match a specific variation pattern (specifically When executed in figure variation pattern 08), it is possible to execute a specific variation performance (variation performance patterns 15 to 17), and whether or not the special game is executed at a predetermined timing in the specific variation performance. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (decision effect) suggesting that the main control means is capable of displaying the next change based on the next judgment information stored in the hold, following the current change display that is currently being executed. When executing the display, if a communication abnormality occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (command at the time of stop) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main control means Even if the specific variation pattern is executed as the next variation display after the display ends, execution of the suggestion effect can be restricted at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , the effect control means is capable of starting the variable effect in response to the start of the variable display, and can end the variable effect in response to the end of the variable display, and the variable display is configured to match a specific variation pattern (specifically When executed in figure variation pattern 08), a specific variation effect (variation effect patterns 15 to 17) can be executed, and a pseudo variation effect is performed a predetermined number of times at a predetermined timing in the specific variation effect. It is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect), in which the main control means performs a next variable display based on the next judgment information held and stored, following the current variable display that is currently being executed. When performing the current variation display, if a communication error occurs in which the production control means cannot receive a command (stop command) while executing the current variation production according to the current variation display, the main control unit controls the current variation display. Even if the specific variation pattern is executed as the next variation display after completion, the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect can be restricted at the predetermined timing. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twenty-first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect that controls effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means (performance control board 130), the main control means is configured to control whether a starting condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or when a game ball enters the second starting port 47). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the winning of the above-mentioned determination information; a variable display execution means for executing a variable display of the first special symbol and a variable display of the second special symbol; a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been performed as a pending memory (for example, a first pending memory); , the effect control means is capable of displaying an icon (pending icon) based on the pending memory on a display means (first image display device 70), and starts a variable effect in response to the start of the variable display. , the variable effect can be ended in accordance with the end of the variable display, and the icon is displayed in either a normal display mode (white icon) or a special display mode (red icon) different from the normal display mode. By doing so, it is possible to execute an icon change performance (pending icon change performance) that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed, and when the fluctuation display is performed in a specific fluctuation pattern (special pattern fluctuation pattern 08). , a specific variable effect (variable effect patterns 15 to 17) can be executed, and the icon change effect can be executed at a predetermined timing in the specific variable effect, and the main control means: When executing the next variable display based on the next determination information stored in the hold storage following the current variable display that is currently being executed, the effect control means executes the current variable effect according to the current variable display. If a communication error occurs during which a command (command at stop) cannot be received, even if the current variation display ends in the main control means and the specific variation pattern is executed as the next variation display, the predetermined timing It is possible to restrict the execution of the icon change effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment transitions to a low probability gaming state after the end of a jackpot game if the type of the special jackpot pattern is a normal pattern, and transitions to a high probability gaming state that continues until the next jackpot game after the end of a jackpot game if the type of the special jackpot pattern is a specific pattern, but the gaming machine may transition to a high probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all jackpot games.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are finished, the high probability game state is entered, and if the player wins the falling lottery that is executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation display in the high probability game state, the high probability game state is ended and the normal It is also possible to use a gaming machine that returns to a gaming state.

Furthermore, when a game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of a jackpot game, the gaming machine may be configured to shift to a high probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game ends.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. However, a gaming machine may be used in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel).

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that equivalent meanings to the claims and all changes within the scope be included.

1 Game machine 5 Game board 44 General figure gate 45 First starting port 47 Second starting port 50 Big prize opening 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and a performance control means for controlling a performance according to a signal from the main control means,
The main control means is
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game based on determination information obtained when a starting condition is met;
A variable display execution means for executing a variable display based on the determination result of the determination information;
storage means for storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending storage;
The performance control means is
Upon receiving a winning signal transmitted in response to an increase in the pending memory as the starting condition is satisfied, an icon based on the pending memory can be displayed on the display means, and a winning effect can be executed;
It is possible to start a fluctuating performance using a performance symbol in response to the start of the fluctuating display, and to end the fluctuating performance using the performance symbol in response to an end of the fluctuating display;
It is possible to perform a specific performance in which predetermined information can be displayed by making the performance pattern difficult to see in a customer waiting state where the variable display is not performed,
It is possible to perform an icon change effect that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed by displaying the icon in either a normal display mode or a special display mode different from the normal display mode,
When the fluctuating display is executed in a specific fluctuating pattern, a specific fluctuating effect can be executed, and the icon change rendering can be executed at a predetermined timing;
When the main control means executes the next fluctuation display based on the next determination information stored in the hold storage following the current fluctuation display that is currently being executed, the effect control means responds to the current fluctuation display. If a communication error occurs in which the specified signal for the variable display cannot be received while the current variable display is being executed,
Even if the current variation display ends and the specific variation pattern is executed as the next variation display in the main control means, execution of the icon change effect can be restricted,
If a communication abnormality occurs in which a predetermined signal of the variable display cannot be received during execution of the specific performance, the specific performance can be continued;
If a predetermined signal of the variable display is received while the specific production is continuing, the specific production is ended and the predetermined production pattern is made visible ;
If the starting condition is satisfied while a predetermined number of the icons are being displayed, and the entry award signal in which the number of the reserved memories is one more than the number of the icons is normally received, the icons are displayed in the normal addition mode. In addition to displaying one additional award, the above-mentioned award performance is executed once,
The starting condition is met while a predetermined number of the icons are being displayed, and the entry award signal in which the number of pending memories is one more than the number of icons is not normally received, and then the starting condition is met. If the input award signal in which the number of the reserved memories is more than the number of icons is successfully received, the icons are additionally displayed in a special addition mode, but the input award presentation is not executed multiple times. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is executed once every 20 minutes .

Images